Home

Landbird Monitoring Protocol - The Institute for Bird Populations

1. qq ssoq IWIM pjoajsau njjouanig XIe AOpeo A UI9 S9AA KiogueA u dg KiojueAu d gI awy yY 9 qissoq TIMA snasiu oyd sninjasy PIIQYov _ p SurA p y popiooownoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN K1ojueAu d gI aZVI DUAOWUD DULAISSDI Sununq t nze T K1ogueAu d gI AlIOWWAUT gI KrojueAu dgI Koyunu gI K1ojueAu d gI DHg 01 01 4 snoyonayd yeaqsolg popeou xioe gq AIOWOAUT YI K1ojueAu d gI popiooosnoN e qissoqd 21418804 nraa sippuiau oounr oounf p ye i popiooownoN popioooswnoN K1ojueAud gI popiooownoN 4520 1402 0 MOiIedg K1ojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dI KxojyuoAu d dT dSOM s amp udoona Dn 214JOuOZ AMOLTE POUMOIS d TY M popiooosnoN popiooosnoN 21418804 om 4911 nujooui pz dsol yy s ujoourT Koud dI KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoeAu d dT dSOS Dipojaui pzidsol yy o1meds Suog popiooo noN popiooownoN KiogueAu dg Iwy KiojueAu dgI dSOd D20111 Djjo42ssugq Moreds KiojueAud gI K1ojueAu dgI popiooosnoN lq ssoq SAVS SISUBYOIMPUDS snym ss oa qeuueAeg popiooownoN KiogueAugd gI popiooosnoN awy dSHA sn ununpA s ooq Mosreds 1odsoA K1ojuoAud gI KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT dSHO puu sspd pyjazids Moueds urddiu AJOWOAUT GA KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu
2. Tears Species AMRO Number of Vari 2007 16 Elevation O6f 01 Mean Variance 22 2 tailed Variance group non of mean df t stat class slope ofslope p value Park Panel s zero sites slope OLYM 1 Anni Low 4 0 0337 0 000715 m 2 Anni Mid 4 0 0341 0 000612 m 3 Annl High 4 0 0091 0 001378 4 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 Low 20 0 0302 0 030507 5 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 Mid 20 0 0276 0 01932 6 Alt2 A1t3 Alt4 A1t5 Alt6 High 20 0 0084 0 015879 Combined panels Low 24 0 0308 0 001064 Mid 24 0 0173 0 000675 m High 24 0 0086 0 000561 Grand mean All 72 0 0224 0 00035 38 26 1 1976 0 2384 NOCA 1 Annl Low 4 0 0302 0 000486 2 Annl Mid 4 0 0029 0 003128 3 Anni High 4 4 00E 04 0 000745 4 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 Low 20 0 0467 0 010676 m 5 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 Mid 20 0 0039 0 013248 6 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 High 20 0 0216 0 007386 Combined 15 Low 24 0 044 0 000374 Mid 24 0 0028 0 000482 High 24 0 0181 0 000262 Grand mean All 72 0 0178 0 000157 45 54 1 4181 0 163 MORA 1 Annl Low 2 0 0058 4 60E 05 2 Annl Mid 4 0 0206 0 000669 3 Annl High 4 0 0098 0 002933 4 Alt2 A1t3 Alt4 A1t5 Alt6 Low 10 0 0514 0 048625 5 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 Mid 20 0 1521 0 049226 6 Alt2 A1t3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt6 High 20 0 0066
3. This Standard Operating Procedure explains the procedures and topics to cover in training observers to collect data for the NCCN landbird monitoring program We recommend conducting an intensive training program immediately preceding the field season The optimal duration of this program will depend somewhat on the skill and experience level of the crew members but our experience in training crews for the NCCN landbird inventory projects has shown that even relatively experienced and or skilled observers can benefit from 2 full weeks of training to hone their skills and fully prepare themselves for fieldwork Less experienced individuals may require up to 3 weeks of training to truly be prepared to collect reliable data at the beginning of the field season Our experience further suggests that one experienced trainer can adequately train 3 5 individuals in this timeframe depending on their skill levels but if the crew is larger than that then the assistance of an additional trainer at least during part of the training session is highly desirable The training session must be carefully planned and scheduled to ensure that all necessary topics are adequately covered and that crew members receive adequate exposure to as many of the network s bird species as possible During training for the inventory projects we found this was best achieved by dividing the training session between time spent at OLYM and time spent at NO
4. popiooowloN y popiooownoN Haq Si D1u2p1220 snup2a aq ueoi od UMOIg popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooowIoN o qrssoq popiooownoN JAMY seuou amp yj40upIio snup2a aq utot od WYM ueormoury popiooownoN popiooowIoN Iwy popiooownoN dSH1 poysoona piuo4poun22 ojgq unojg s qoeoT popiooownoN popiooowIoN popiooowION 2 418804 popiooesnoN 491 DUIOLPOUDIIQ o3oq uuojg popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoq popiooownoN SINS S141 0411U2 snuffnd PPMS po re1 11008 popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoq popiooownoN HSOS SHasi48 snuffnd IOPMILA A100 popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoq popiooownoN HSHd s di uip snuifing JoyeMIvIYS po100J uso 4 popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoq HSud sndojn242 snuifing JayeMIvIYS 14 popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN fq ssoq popiooownoN NAON Si D120 8 sniva Ieui n uI9Q O N popiooownoN popiooownoN o qissoq popiooownoN 7748 sadidiu pinsoqaoyd ssoneqry popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN oy g qissog YOUM sijpjuapio20 snsoydouysay UIASIM popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN o qrssoq popiooownoN YONA Dua82asi48 sda2ipog p y u p yi popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN e qissoqd popiooownoN snnunp sd xipoq again p uqoH popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN lq ssoq popiooownoN yogd sdaoipod snqudnpoq
5. Overview Guidelines for Data Entry and Verification This document describes the general procedures for entry and verification of field data in the working project database For related guidance and a clarification of the distinction between the working database and the master database refer to protocol Section 4C Overview of Database Design and Section 4D Data Entry and Processing The following are general guidelines 1 Data should be entered as soon after data collection as possible so that field crews remain current with data entry tasks and identify any errors or problems as close to the time of data collection as possible 2 The working database application is in the project workspace For enhanced performance users should copy the front end database onto their workstation hard drives and open it there This front end copy may be considered disposable because it does not contain any data but rather acts as an interface with data residing in the back end working database 3 Each data entry form is patterned after the layout of the field form and has built in quality assurance components such as pick lists and validation rules to test for missing data or illogical combinations Although the database permits users to view the raw data tables and other database objects users are strongly encouraged only to use the pre built forms as a way of ensuring the maximum level of quality assurance 4 As data
6. 134e cep epeui s bueu 104 NPI IP Andines ye 9q o 5563 Jo 3511429949 1511 4521 IM 39s fiuryiom aip io syynsar Kienb esueinsse yiyenp synsey vo im suomne2o ajdwies Oyu 540 Iq pue pinb o p sn s un s 9 qIelA amp ie jouo Buunp paubieso suope2o ajdwes ym syueuen j28suv1j 70 p yeroosse sobewy sdnois oou amp eueA Iq uone oy l Bey IIe 01 uope2o ajdwes uoge ynio Dbuuojiuour 10 uodn suone o7 P empeqss m o papenjdn aq o uonduosep uone ol ul dsqu Aq S3 Al Sq0 yoaloid spi0221 salon IQ 936 Uod IP s pulp4002 141 uod y aydines aip n nonmafian i ou Jo uonezuojoe1eu iq ua exel weg nn saus 1m suone2o 141 FE suopeuesqoE o pue s r ds p f 10 ssayowesed uona s s jeue pue uBisap Buunp p sn sasse uoneounen Bens iq Sjua Iq exe poloig np 51n320 uon llo e ep Buunp sajep jo ueds ayy seeds Po 10 suoneniesqo ejuspr3ul fF pjduiay 392 woums m qo open mei pelod np SIOAINSGO IP pepeusun are so qe orroods 1 efouq s lqe dnyoo psepurys UMOIG IYSI so qe3 prepuvejs s
7. This SOP gives step by step instructions for classifying vegetation at each of the point count locations The objective of habitat classification at each of the point count stations is to 1 use vegetation class as a covariate in developing detectability functions 2 determine if there are any coarse grained changes in vegetation classes associated with the avian monitoring points and 3 aid in point relocation in subsequent years We have selected two measures of vegetation structure ocular estimation of canopy cover and largest size class because these two data are used to classify vegetation in the Park s current land cover classification scheme and provide addition information Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 Vegetation is to be classified at each location where a point count is conducted but is not required for transect origin points Vegetation will be classified within a 50 m radius circle centered at the point count All vegetation within the 50 m radius circle should be considered when classifying the habitat The Habitat Classification Form is provided at the end of this SOP Use the following methods when completing the Habitat Classification Form Park Enter LEWI MORA NOCA OLYM or SAJH Transect Enter the 4 digit transect number Date Enter the date as mm dd yyyy Observer Enter the first and last name of the observer Point Enter the 4 character point name The first two characters indicate the
8. popiooosnoN owy MNVO snupolx nu s dl yip Uuo UP popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 21418804 21415804 HAOM snjajosqo sajouidjng UIM YOY KiojueAu dgI K1ojuoAu d gI KrojuoAu dgI KiojueAu d gI K1ojuoAu d gI woud 14 1 uMoIg popiooownoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooosnoN K1ojuoAu d gI ANSA SISUAUIJOLDI DING WojeunN poiseaq0 oj1u AA KiojueAu dgI KiojueAudgT AIOWOAUT gI AIOWWOAUT G gI KiojueAu dgT ANS sisuappupo DIS yowyny poisevo1q pow popiooosrnoN KiojueAudgT Ex 21415804 KiojueAudgT Hs nsa snununu snupduypsa jusng KrojuoAumd GT KiojueAud gI K1ojuoAu dgT K1ojuoAumd 41 KiojueAudgT su s fnu 2112204 pey rq p y cq nu s q popiooownoN popiooosnoN KxojuoAu d gI qq ssoq AIOWWOAUT GI HOOW yaqups pey rq urejunoJA AIOWWOAUT gI p pso ynoN popiooosnoN KrojuoAu dgI KiojueAu d I Hood snjnidponp aji2204 pey rq peddeo xoviq KrojuoAu dgI KiojueAu dgI owy owy 21418804 Suva DONSNA AOT PA ueg AJOWOAUT gI KiojueAu dgI popioooswnoN EX KiojueAu dgI MSTO pjouoyIia amp d AOT PAS HT AOT PAS KxojuoAu d dI popiooosnoN KxojuoAu d dI SAK N smuuadisas x amp 121dopio 21g posulm ysnoy ur quoN elM1 zHfWS zWYOIN zINA10 V20N 9109 s rs d snu aweu uoululo3 panujuoj oman S PB SE pue 1580 UHON ay l aq Ajay s l ds psig 1 ayqey Landbird Monitor
9. FLIS SUNSON 1621220 Aq s uH3p rq yu i sSurpsoN s334 SunsoN saroodg 40 9q ASojousyd 4 Kepoj s s u oAroe Aue paAJ3sqo NOK JT SUODEAT Sqo ASojouaud yur 1o pue suoreAJd9sqo 3j pr Sursod9jur 19030 p q uno u suro qo td nsidoy Aue aqriosoq SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points S uaurulo E Ioua Sjuoululo SUD I JA ISIA IINJLIA sSojeurp i00 7039 oedse dofs N snorA vd y juaururo N A yod PAELL eged s uone uy N A BEC p yepdn popuoju posue J9AJ49SqO 49AJ98q0 84 11295 1 4 4077 JISIA Joosue1 sparqpue T NOON Jo LOOT 8 ALIN 090 01g Sur10jruoJA prqpue NOON 54 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page intentionally left blank SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts 55 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This SOP gives step by step instructions for surveying birds with unlimited radius 5 minute poin
10. Year Panel 6 Year Figure 3 Example of AMRO data log transformed densities for rotating panels 5 and 6 Solid lines connect the data dotted lines are estimated linear trends 143 144 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Panel Elevation 277 Moan slope Variance of Variance of Degrees of tstatistic One tailed class dias slope mean slope freedom p value 10 Years Annual Panel Low 4 0 00992 0 0000957 Mid 2 0 0556 0 000697 High 4 0 0154 0 000418 Rotating Panels Low 20 0 00829 0 00452 Mid 18 0 000258 0 00769 High 20 0 0193 0 00459 Combined Low 24 0 00856 0 000157 77 Mid 20 0 00533 0 000349 High 24 0 0135 0 000161 Grand Mean Al 68 0 00842 0 0000800 46 9 0 942 0 175 20 Years Annual Panel Lovv 0 0133 0 0000968 Mid 0 00268 0 0000574 High 4 0 0145 0 0000339 Rotating Panels Low 20 0 0145 0 000326 Mid 18 0 0146 0 000770 High 20 0 0266 0 000427 Combined Low 24 0 0143 0 0000119 77 Mid 20 0 0134 0 0000348 High 24 0 0246 0 0000150 Grand Mean All 68 0 0159 0 0000070 44 8 5 99 0 0000002 30 Years Annual Panel Low 4 0 0120 0 0000421 Mid 0 0104 0 0000121 High 0 0132 0 0000149 Rotating Panels Low 20 0 0144 0 0000733 Mid 18 0 0140 0 0000974 High 20 0 0158 0 000298 Combined Low 24 0 0140 0 0000028 7 Mid 20 0 0136 0 0000044 High 24 0
11. p ffiq p rq popiooownoN M Y popiooownoN 2 418804 AJOWUIAUT gI O109 Jow pavo uoo uowwop popiooownoN AIOWUIAUT II popiooownoN 2 418804 popiooownoN O Ivd Doifiond pavo uoo oyloeg popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN lq ssoq popiooownoN DID l 18 Davo uoo paworp poy AMIJI zHfVS zWUOIN zINA10 V20N 19102 s r d snu aweu uoululo9 10M8N sapesse pue 18802 UHON ay l pejejunooue aq o1 Al yil s l ds psig 1 ayqey Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 36 popiooownoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 2 415504 n n sa4daajut DIADUALY ouojsuun Appny popiooownoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN eY popiooosnoN ODVIA pop f DSOUNT po q1e A popiooownoN popiooosnoN e qrssoq popiooosnoN n s7 SNUDILAIUD snu tunN A nmn p fllq 9uo 7 popiooosnoN popiooosnoN Iy popiooownoN INIHA sndo pud snu tunN Te1quiqA K1ojuoAugd d aey KxojuoAu d dT K1ojuoAu d dI VSdS SUYIV Jadidpues ponodg popiooesnoN popiooosnoN e qissoq popiooosnoN TIM snypujpodnu s snsoydoujdoyog PIIM popiooosnoN popiooosnoN 21415504 popiooosnoN HAHT sadiapjf p uuT SSo MO 9A 1 SS T popiooosnoN popioooswnoN popiooosnoN oy popiooosnoN JAND ponajouvjaut p ulur SS TAVO A K
12. sese tentes 115 SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications esee tnnt ttn 3 2 119 SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures 123 SOP 20 Product Posting and Distribution entere tnnt ttn tnnntnnnn 127 SOP 21 Revising the Protocol Appendix 1 Roles and Responsibilities Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List sss eterne tentent tentent tentes Appendix 3 Schedule for Project Deliverables sss 137 Appendix 4 Example of Trend Analysis for the American Robin sss 139 Appendix 5 Simulation Methods Used to Estimate Power to Detect Trends in 22 Representative Avian Species in Olympic National Park Based Upon the Proposed Augmented Serially Alternating Panel Design n 72 Transects 147 Appendix 6 BirdTrend 1 1 User s Manual entente treten trennen 149 Appendix 7 Landbird Monitoring Protocol Database Docume ntation 173 Appendix 8 Administrative History for Landbird Monitoring Protocol Development 195 Figures Figure 1 Maps shovving location of transect starting points at Mount Rainier National Park North Cascades National Park Service Complex and Olympic National Park Figure 2 Map showing location of point count survey stations
13. sniuoppadnu snpang urqos ueorioury popiooownoN popiooownoN Ao u Au 4 41 KiogueAu d GI AIOWWOAUT gI 14 snjpjna3 SNADYIDI usnsu LL VWH K1ojueAud gI KiojueAu dgI K1ogueAu d gI KiojueAu d gI KiojueAu dgI HLAS snipinjsn spy 45 s uosureA S popiooesnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN pepiooownoN KiojueAu dgI YAAA suaosaosnf SNADYIDI AT N popiooownoN popiooownoN 46 AIOWOAUT gI OSOL 1pu sumo saisapp amp y Ss puosuAQ popiooosnoN popiooosnoN qq ssoq ore ISON SaplOoMAANI DIIDI purqonpg ureyunoyy p p o ynoN popiooownoN 21415804 Koyunda gI DUDIIXAU 0101 purqonpg WASIM popiooosnoN popiooosnoN aie yy E K1ogueAud gI njnpua vo snyn3 y poumors Aqny Ao u Auld dI KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d 41 K1ojuoAud gI KxojuoAu d 41 D pdpuys sn ns y je gury popiooownoN popiooosnoN K1ojuoAumd gI K1ogueAud gI KiojueAud gI IQINV snunoixaui snj2ui Joddiq ueououry K1ojuoAu d dI KxojuoAu d gI popioooesnoN KxojuoAu d dT UAV siajsnjpd STI101 01817 UIM YSN K1o0juoAugd gI KxojuoAu d dI K1ojuoAu d dT K1ojuoeAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT MALA sajkpo sou saJ amp poj804T UIM IUM KxojuoAu d dI popioooesnoN lq ssoq KxojuoAu d AI saj amp poj804T U TAA SnOH popiooosnoN K1ojuoAu dgI popiooosnoN 9 qissoq popiooownoN UMA injoiMaq s uputodur uI 5 p p 02 ynoN
14. Manage Lookup Tables H 3 Species list Project crew list Other lookup tables Close View C Edit View details View details New record eee ee ee ee gt AMBI Yes Botaurus lentiginosus American bittern American bittern bird AMCO Yes Fulica americana American coot American coot bird AMCR Yes Corvus brachyrhynchos American crow American crow bird AMDI Yes Cinclus mexicanus American dipper American dipper bird AMGO Yes Carduelis tristis American goldfinch American goldfinch bird AMGP Yes Pluvialis dominica Lesser golden plover American golden plover bird AMKE Yes Falco sparverius American kestrel American kestrel bird AMPI Yes Anthus rubescens American pipit American pipit bird AMRE Yes Setophaga ruticilla American redstart American redstart bird AMRO Yes Turdus migratorius American robin American robin bird AMVVI Yes Anas americana American wigeon American wigeon bird ANHU Yes Calypte anna Anna s hummingbird Anna s hummingbird bird ANMU Yes Synthliboramphus antiquus Ancient murrelet Ancient murrelet bird ATTW Yes Picoides dorsalis American three toed woodpecker American three toed wood bird AWPE Yes Pelecanus erythrorhynchos American white pelican American white pelican bird BADO Yes Strix varia Barred owl Barred owl bird BAEA Yes Haliaeetus leucocephalus Bald eagle Bald eagle bird The species popup form can be used for adding or editing species records Required field
15. Note Files must keep the same name and relative organization once these database links have been established Users should not rename or reorganize the directory structure for linked image files without first consulting with the Data Manager E Deliver Image Files for Final Storage Note For additional information about delivery specifications refer to SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications At the end of the season and once the year s data are certified data images for the year may be delivered along with the working copy of the database to the Data Manager on a CD or DVD To do this simply the folder for the appropriate year s and all associated subfolders and images onto the disk These files will be loaded into the project section of the NCCN Digital Library and the database links to data images will be updated accordingly Prior to delivery make sure that all processing folders are empty Upon delivery the delivered folders should be made read only to prevent unintended changes 80 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page is intentionally left blank SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification 81 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change
16. pA doupdo spuy 1221 uoureuur popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooowoN 9 qrssoq K1ojuoAu dgT ALMA SAODSIP spuy PaL posurm ontg K1ojueAugd gI awy KxojuoAud gI Iwy AJOWIAUT gI TIYN souou amp yApjd spuy PEREN popiooownoN popiooowIoN popiooownoN 2 418804 21415504 IMIAV DUDILIAUD spuy UO STAA UPOLIQULV popiooowloN oy 21415804 popiooowIoON MAYD pu d us spuy popiooowloN popiooownoN awy a qIssog NdGOM psuods XIV yong poom KxojuoAu d gr K1ojuoAu dgI K1ojuoAu dgIT 2 418804 418804 ONVO Sisuapouvd DIUDAg soor epeue owy y owy popiooownoN nAnL punp 6 KOJN L popiooownoN popiooowIoN 21418804 HHNO 542252414 sapuoing popiooowloN popiooowloN 2 418804 Dro pq p PIJ WAD Ao u Aul gI popiooowIoN oy fq ssoq 4 spipod y on g AD popiooownoN popiooowIoN popiooownoN 21418504 IWY snsou18 uua snanpjog ulojrg ueorjury popiooowIoN KxojuoAud gT popiooownoN y popiooowloN OOdd snoi8pjad XDAODJOLIDIOY JULIOWLIOD Fed K1ojuoAu d TI KxojuoAugd AI awy popiooowION 0224 snnunp XD402042D Di d YURIOWLIOD pojso1o o qnoqq popiooowION popiooownoN o qrssoq popiooowION XDLOIOAIDIDY JULIOUIOD Sjpue1g popiooowIoN
17. 3 The GIS Specialist will process the raw GPS data and store the processed data in the project workspace 4 The GIS Specialist will upload corrected coordinate information into the database and create any GIS data sets The Field Lead should periodically review the processed GPS data to make sure that any errors or inconsistencies are identified early E Quality Review After the data have been entered and processed they need to be reviewed by the Project Lead for quality completeness and logical consistency The working database application facilitates this process by showing the results of pre built queries that check for data integrity data outliers and missing values and illogical values The user may then fix these problems and document the fixes Not all errors and inconsistencies can be fixed in which case a description of the resulting errors and why edits were not made is then documented and included in the metadata and certification report see Sections 4F Metada Procedures and 4G Data Certification and Delivery and SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification 4 Data Handling Analysis and Reporting 15 Data Edits after Certification Due to the high volume of data changes and or corrections during data entry it is not efficient to log all changes until after data are certified and uploaded into the master database Prior to certification daily backups of the working database provide a crude mea
18. MORA unknown unspecified False NOCA unknown unspecified False OLYM unknown unspecified False Record il T 1 bb b k of 5 gt Taxon 10 7E184015 4CCB 4298 AF62 B79449CF6DFA Project code BDa03 Created 171 Record status reconciled j Status notes 2003 Aug 14 0700 Updated 2006 Jan 30 15 41 by Boetsch John 90 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork The second tab of the lookups module is a list of contacts for the project Manage Lookup Tables R 4 Species list Project crew list Other lookup tables Active Name 1 1 Organzaion SC Title Close View edit contacts ee Bagnall_Keith NPS OLYM Intern Field biologist kebagnall animail net Boetsch_John NPS OLYM Ecologist Data Manager john_boetsch nps gov 360 565 3064 Happe_Patti NPS OLYM Wildlife Branch Chief patti_happe nps gov 360 565 3065 Hoffman_Roger NPS OLYM GIS Manager roger_hoffman nps gov 360 565 3062 Holmgren_Mandy Institute for Bird Populations ntem Field biologist mandyholmgren hotmail co Krumlauf_Jeremy Institute for Bird Populations Intern Field biologist holkrum gmail com Kuntz_Bob NPS NOCA Wildlife Biologist robert_kuntz nps gov 360 856 5700 ext 368 Marek_Sarah Institute for Bird Populations Intern Field biologist Schaberl Jim NPS MORA Wildlife Ecologist jim_schaberi nps gov 360 569 2211 ext 3373 S
19. Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P Laake J L Borchers D L and Thomas L 2001 Introduction to distance sampling estimating abundance of biological populations Oxford University Press Oxford Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P Laake J L Borchers D L and Thomas L eds 2004 Advanced distance sampling estimating abundance of biological populations Oxford University Press Oxford Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 Vegetation and landform database development study final report Pacific Meridian Resources Portland Thomas L Laake J L Strindberg S Marques F E C Buckland S T Borchers D L Anderson D R Burnham K P Hedley S L Pollard J H Bishop J R B and Marques T A 2005 Distance 5 0 Research Unit for Wildlife Population Assessment University of St Andrews UK Program Distance Home Page web site at http www ruwpa st and ac uk distance Accessed October 10 2007 114 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page intentionally left blank SOP 17 Special Considerations for Small Parks 115 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 17 Special Considerations for Small Parks Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change In addition to monitoring
20. Part of metadata development includes determining whether or not the data include any sensitive information which is partly defined as the specific locations of rare threatened or endangered species Prior to completing the SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 105 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Standard Operating Procedure SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This Standard Operating Procedure describes methods for analyzing data associated with the NCCN landbird monitoring program and provides guidelines and templates for the annual and 5 year reports Items 2 4 apply only to data analysis in conjunction with the 5 year reports 1 Querying Data from the Database Our custom designed Microsoft Access database includes features that allow the analyst to query the database to produce most of the data summary tables that should be included in the annual report and allow for an easy transition between the database and the properly formatted summary tables described below However detectability modeling point specific density estimation and temporal trend assessment require exporting data to other software applications for manipulation and analysis Guidelines for performing these operations are provided in sections 2 4 of this SOP 2 Computing and
21. Point Enter the 2 digit point code T for the first point 02 for the second point etc Intended Location Enter N if you have any reason to believe you were not in the intended location for this point count This might occur if you were unable to find the marker for a previously marked point or if a new landslide prevented you from following the route taken the last time the transect was surveyed Enter Y if you believe you conducted the point count in the place where it was conducted previously for previously established transects or if you determined the location by correctly following the protocol for new transects Comment If you answered N to the previous question provide a brief explanation here Site Data Enter Y or N to indicate whether new site data was collected for the Point Establishment Form Coordinates Enter Y if new coordinates were collected for the survey point even if they differ little or not at all from previous coordinates collected Enter N if for some reason no coordinates were collected Travel Feature Desc Enter Y or N to indicate whether new travel feature descriptions were collected for the Point Establishment Form Photo Doc Enter Y or N to indicate whether new digital images were collected Point Marking Enter Y or N to indicate whether a new marker was installed Comments Provide any additional information needed to explain the e
22. Point Enter the 4 character point name The first two characters indicate the cardinal or semi cardinal direction traveled from the origin point to the first point for example NW for northwest or NN for north The last two characters indicate the sequential order of the point along the half transect starting from the origin point for example the first point surveyed by an observer who traveled northwest from the origin to the first point would be NW01 the second point would be NVV02 even if the observer encountered a barrier and had to change directions after the first point count When completing a Point Establishment Form for the origin point simply enter T O Transect Origin Point Type Circle Origin if the point is an origin point otherwise circle Survey Bearing to Point Enter the compass bearing in declinated degrees to the point from the previous point or from the origin point if completing for point 01 Leave this space blank on the Point Establishment Form for the origin point If the trail was deliberately followed rather than an off trail bearing to the present point then write Trail rather than providing a compass bearing Change of Direction Enter Y if it was necessary to change the direction of travel to reach this point that is if it was necessary to change direction after conducting the previous point count Enter N if direction was not changed or when completi
23. The first page of the quality review form has a results summary showing each query sorted by name the number of records returned by the query the most recent run time and the description There also is a button for refreshing the results which may need to be done periodically as changes in one part of the data structure may change the number of records returned by other queries Results Summary View and Fix Query Results Browse data tables Note Double click on a record to open that result set Refresh results Runtime qa 1a Strata missing critical info 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa_1b_Strata_illogical_dates 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2a Sites missing critical info 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa_2b_Sites_park_inconsistencies 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2c Sites duplicates on code and park 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2d Sites missing evaluation codes 3 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2e Sites site status inconsistencies 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2f Sites illogical dates 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2g Sites missing panel type 109 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 2h Sites missing site name 661 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3a Locations missing critical info 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3b Locations park inconsistencies 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3c Locations duplicates on site and loc code 4 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3d Locations duplicates on site and loc name 2 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3e Locations duplicates on loc name and park 7 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3f Locations missing sampling events 12 03 29 2006 16 57 qa
24. by species processing is necessary since the trend analysis is conducted by species this will help identify records missing from a database query The example data set does not contain errors warnings or notes but these would be displayed throughout the file if they were generated Table A6 3 contains a list of the possible errors warnings and notes that can result from a call to PreBirdTrend Running BirdTrendAnnualDensity The first time BirdTrendAnnualDensity is run in a particular working directory you must type gt source dirloc BirdTrendAnnualDensity V 1 1 R at the command line prompt and hit enter The dirloc is the exact directory location where the BirdTrend computer files are stored This command makes the program resident in the working directory Then type gt BirdTrendAnnualDensity V 1 1 infile INFILE csv outfile OUTFILE txt outfile2 OUTFILE2 txt at the command line prompt and hit enter The NFILE csv is the name and exact directory location of the clean input file that has been produced by PreBirdTrend The OUTFILE txt and OUTFILE2 txt are the requested names for the annual density results files including the exact directory location where they should be stored by the program OUTFILE txt will contain the density estimates table OUTFILE2 txt will contain any notes generated by the program Note that these files should have txt extensions to simplify output format
25. Add Multipliers for Other When running the calculations for each species and each set of habitats use the Data tab to enter the appropriate multiplier detection probability estimate standard error and degrees of freedom values from the modeling efforts in Section 2 above Use the Data Filter to specify not only the species but also the truncation point which should be the distance that was used in generating the models see section 2 above Remember to change the multiplier and truncation values each time analysis is conducted on a new species If two separate models one for closed canopy points and one for open canopy points are to be used for a given species also use the Data Filter to specify the set of habitats for which the program should produce density estimates When defining models select the uniform key function with no series expansions this way the program will simply use the parameter values you have specified without constructing new models Specifying Sample under Level of Resolution of Estimates in the Model Definition Properties box will instruct the program to return a density estimate of the species indicated in the Data Filter at each survey point SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 107 4 Assessing Temporal Trends in Density Estimates Temporal trends in density estimates of bird species should be assessed using the custom made software program BirdTrend developed by TerraStat Consulting G
26. Search 2nd sat or Where Averaging Averaging will only show up if the GPS is getting a good signal and is stationary If the GPS is averaging it also will show the duration at which the unit has been receiving satellite data at that point on the next line for example 9 minutes and 6 seconds X GPS unit letter see the back of the GPS unit MORA M NOCA N OLYM O backup unit P Yy last two digits of the year 05 Mm month use two digits Dd day use two digits 10 467842E 6 Scroll to OK when finished typing in the job file name 5327384N 7 Push ENTER H45 Note There is an 8 character limit in file names 03 21 23 PM After naming the job file Averaging 8 Select a feature library called a data dictionary in 00 09 06 Trimble s realm HAD83 UTM 9 Select XXXX mmf where XXXX is the specific feature 48 05 935N m Push Enter and the Job Mode screen will appear 123 25 915W 11 Select Post processing HAD83 Lat Lon 12 Push ENTER The New Feature screen will appear Open a File Feature Library When you are ready to collect a data file 1 Push the LOG button 2 Highlight Create New Job and push ENTER Select the data dictionary created for a specific project MANET AF Create New Job Open Existing Job Reference Station 3 Use the scroll arrows to get to Clear bottom of the 13 Select the feature for which data will be collected keyboard Change fi
27. Strong breeze large branches moving wind whistling 40 50 km h Wind stronger than this precludes point counts Rain Code Explanation 1 No rain 2 Mist or fog 3 Light drizzle Rain stronger than this precludes point counts 60 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol March 19 2007 NCCN Landbirds Point Count Form Park Transect Date Observer Species code Time Flyover Comments 4 char Interval Y _ b Q l G l Ge Q l Q l Q l Ge Ge Go Go Q l Gel Q l Ge Q l Q l Ge Q l Ge Q l G l Ge Q l G l Q l Q l 9 b l b l NY t l b l b l h l t h l N b N b l b l t l b l b l t KY b l t l b l b l h l b l b l h l b l N t l t N 3 Time Interval 3 first detected during first 3 minutes of point count 2 first detected during last 2 minutes Mark Y for yes when positive if negative leave blank SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation 61 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change
28. Techniques and Methods 2 A6 y m Wa MCN NS A I dua eS 7 MER E n WC b iv U S Department of the Interio W U S Geological Survey Cover Steller s Jay middle Western Tanager right Chestnut backed Chickadee left Bird images are copyrighted and used with permission of photographer Matt T Lee Biologist image courtesy of National Park Service Cover Graphic Design Sandra Arbogast Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network By Rodney B Siegel Robert L Wilkerson The Institute for Bird Populations Kurt J Jenkins U S Geological Survey Robert C Kuntz II North Cascades National Park Service Complex John R Boetsch Olympic National Park James P Schaberl Mount Rainier National Park and Patricia J Happe Olympic National Park Chapter 6 of Section A Biological Science Book 2 Collection of Environmental Data Prepared in cooperation with the North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service Techniques and Methods 2 A6 U S Department of the Interior U S Geological Survey U S Department of the Interior DIRK KEMPTHORNE Secretary U S Geological Survey Mark D Myers Director U S Geological Survey Reston Virginia 2007 For product and ordering information World Wide Web http www usgs gov pubprod Telephone 1 888 ASK USGS For more information on the USGS the Federal source for science about the Farth it
29. 0 0058 0 0206 0 0098 0 0514 0 1521 0 0066 0 0419 0 1302 0 0071 0 0433 0 0269 Variance of Slope 0 000715 0 000612 0 001378 0 030507 0 01932 0 015879 0 000486 0 003128 0 000745 0 010676 0 013248 0 007386 4 60E 05 0 000669 0 002933 0 048625 0 049226 0 015099 Variance of Mean Slope 0 001064 0 000675 0 000561 0 00035 0 000374 0 000482 0 000262 0 000157 0 003377 0 001714 0 000545 0 000808 0 000133 Appendix 6 167 February 27 2007 2 tailed df t stat p value 38 26 1 1976 0 2384 45 54 1 4181 0 163 20 99 1 522 0 1429 146 83 2 3328 0 021 168 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol Table A6 8 Example slope output file generated by BirdTrend Species AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO Slope 0 036267 0 008422 0 069981 0 020156 0 06886 0 03235 0 02403 0 01125 0 005102 0 033696 0 039519 0 04176 0 0 01374 0 13538 0 10042 0 06264 0 245898 0 267673 0 036317 0 029225 0 167195 0 030672 0 070769 0 0443 0 078934 0 205072 0 093013 0 44441 0 23345 0 224456 0 189479 0 049528 0 021232 0 080761 Elevation 1 T N O
30. 1 Clean Inventory and Store Field Gear AND on a label affixed to the damaged equipment Do NOT return any unlabeled equipment needing repair to Each field team at each park is responsible for cleaning the equipment cabinet and properly storing all field gear checked out to them at the beginning of the field season First aid kits should be inventoried so that all used supplies can be replenished First aid supplies should be checked to insure items with expiration dates will still be usable during the following field season Items that are or will be out of date should be noted so that they can be replaced at the beginning of the next field 2 Data Manageme nt Report missing or faulty equipment or equipment needing repair to the Project Lead so that equipment can be repaired or replaced before the following field season season Wash all bear resistant food canisters and dry Ensure that all data are properly entered into the thoroughly computer database Clean all water pump filters and store in sealed plastic Ensure that all GPS data have been delivered to the GIS container Specialist for processing After all field gear is cleaned and assembled use the equipment checkout sheet posted at each park on the LTEM equipment cabinet to inventory items as they are replaced for storage 3 Close Out e Return keys radios or any other park property 94 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Co
31. 189 190 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol tlu Noise Code List of noise codes for bird observations Field name Index key Data type Description Noise code primary tinyint Noise code desc text 100 tlu Observer Role List of observer role assignments template Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork February 27 2007 Field name Index key Data type Description Observer role primary text 25 Role desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Origin Code List of origin codes for park taxa standard Field name Index key Data type Description Origin code primary text 16 Origin desc text 100 NPSpp_ID int Sort_order tinyint tlu Panel Type List of sampling panel types template Field name Index key Data type Description Panel type primary text 20 Panel type desc text 200 Sort order tinyint tlu Parks List of NCCN parks and park codes standard Field name Index key Data type Description Park code primary text 4 Park name text 50 tlu Park Taxa Park specific attributes for taxa template Index Index columns Origin Park_origin Park_status_source Park_status_IBP pk_tlu_Park_Taxa primary Taxon_ID Park_code Record_status Record_status Taxon_status Park status Field name Index key Data type Description Taxon ID primary FK text 50 Taxon identifier Park_code primary text 4 Park code
32. 2003 2004a 2004b 2004c 2005 In 2003 USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center formally assigned research ecologist Dr Kurt Jenkins to spearhead an effort to develop and write a landbird monitoring study plan have the study plan peer reviewed and Table 1 Summary of landbird inventories completed in North Coast and Cascades Network national park units by park year s inventories were conducted year final report was completed and cooperative agreement and modifications used to complete work at each park Parks Year s Reports Cooperative agreements LEWI 2004 2005 H9471011196 Mod 6 MORA 2003 04 2005 H9471011196 Mod 4 5 6 NOCA 2001 02 2004 H9471011196 Mod 1 2 OLYM 2002 03 2004 H9471011196 Mod 1 2 4 5 SAJH 2002 2003 H9471011196 Mod 2 LEWI Lewis and Clark National Historical Park MORA Mount Rainier National Park NOCA North Cascades National Park Service Complex OLYM Olympic National Park SAJH San Juan Island National Historical Park 196 produce a landbird monitoring protocol and a set of standard operating procedures for use in NCCN parks Dr Jenkins had attended the initial workshop at NOCA in September 2000 and had attended annual workgroup meetings as a member of the NCCN Landbird Monitoring Group and was familiar with the issues and questions facing NCCN parks in their desire to development a landbird monitoring program Through USGS cooperative agreement 03VVRAC0040 IBP was assigned the lea
33. A 1994b Management research and monitoring priorities for the conservation of Neotropical migratory landbirds that breed in Washington Olympia Washington Washington Department of Natural Resources Atkinson S and Sharpe F A 1985 Wild plants of the San Juan Islands Seattle Washington The Mountaineers Boetsch J R Christoe B and Holmes R E 2005 Data management plan for the North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program USDI National Park Service Port Angeles Washington 88 p available only online at http www L nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt cfm accessed January 25 2007 Bolsinger C L and Waddell K L 1993 Area of old growth forests in California Oregon and Washington USDA Forest Service Resource Bulletin PNW RB 197 Breidt F J and Fuller W A 1999 Design of supplemented panel surveys with application to the national resources inventory Journal of Agricultural Biological and Environmental Statistics v 4 p 391 403 Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P Laake J L Borchers D L and Thomas L 2001 Introduction to distance sampling estimating abundance of biological populations Oxford University Press Oxford Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P Laake L Borchers D L and Thomas L eds 2004 Advanced distance sampling estimating abundance of biological populations Oxford University Press Oxford Bunnell F L
34. Feature_type indexed text 16 Type of feature Feature_desc text 100 Brief description of the feature Distance m double Distance in meters measured from the previous point for travel features Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 Feature azimuth int Azimuth degrees declination corrected from the sampling point to the feature Constraint Is Null Or 220 And lt 360 Photo frame text 10 Frame number for photographic images Image filename text 100 Name of the image including extention jpg but without the image path NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol Appendix 7 179 February 27 2007 tbl GPS Info GPS information associated with sample location coordinates Index Index columns Coord ID Coord ID Corr type Corr type Datum GPS datum Feat name Feat name Feat type Feat type GPS date GPS date Location ID Location ID pk tbl GPS Info primary GPS ID Field name Index key Data type Description GPS ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for the GPS record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Coord ID indexed FK text 50 Coordinate identifier Location ID indexed text 50 Sample location used for temporary links Feat type indexed text 20 Feature type point line or polygon collected with GPS Data dict name text 50 Data dictionary name used to collect feature Feat name indexed text 50 Feature name in data dictionary GPS file text 50 GPS file name GPS date ind
35. February April schedule and instructions SOP 18 Prepare draft report and distribute to Park Biologists for Project Lead and NPS Lead By April 1 preliminary review Product Delivery Submit draft I amp M report to Network Coordinator for NPS Lead By April 30 Section 4J SOP 18 review Review report for formatting and completeness notify Network Coordinator May Project Lead of approval or need for changes Upload completed report to NCCN Digital Library 1 NPS Lead Upon approval submissions folder notify Data Manager SOP 18 Deliver other products according to the delivery Project Lead and NPS Lead Upon completion Product check in Data Manager Upon receipt Posting amp Distribution Section 4J SOP 20 Submit metadata to NPS Data Store Data Manager By March 15 Create NatureBib record post reports to NPS clearinghouse Data Manager Upon receipt Update NPSpecies records according to data observations Data Manager December March Submit certified data and GIS data sets to NPS Data Store Data Manager June after 2 year hold Sections 3D and 4L Archival amp Records Store finished products in NCCN Digital Library Data Manager Upon receipt Management Review clean up and store and or dispose of project NPS Lead and Project Lead January Section 4K SOPs 2 fies according to NPS Director s Order 19 and 20 Season Close out Inventory equi
36. National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group workshop held at North Cascades National Park on September 12 13 2000 North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2003 Landbird inventory meeting notes National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group meeting held at Olympic Park Institute on February 25 27 2003 North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2004a Meeting notes for National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group annual meeting held at Mount Rainier National Park on February 25 26 2004 North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2004b Meeting notes for National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group annual meeting held at Olympic National Park on November 16 17 2004 North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2004c Supplemental meeting notes written by John Boetsch on data management for National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group annual meeting held at Olympic National Park on November 16 17 2004 Appendix 8 197 North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2005 Landbird monitoring meeting notes for National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group annual meeting held at Olympic National Park on November 29 30 2005 NCCN Avian Monitoring Study Plan Documents and Study Plan R
37. Park_status indexed text 16 Status of the taxon in this park from NPSpecies Default unknown Park_status_IBP indexed text 12 Park status according to IBP inventory data Park_origin indexed text 16 Origin of the taxon in this park from NPSpecies Default unspecified Local_list bit Indicates that the taxon is the preferred one for use at the park from NPSpecies Local_accepted_TSN int Taxonomic serial number of the local preferred taxon from NPSpecies Preferred_sci_name text 255 Preferred scientific name of the taxon at the park from NPSpecies Park_taxon_notes text Comments about the taxon specific to this park Record_status indexed text 16 Indicates the status of the record in terms of synchrony with Default new record Created_date datetime master databases Time stamp for record creation Appendix 7 191 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Default Now Updated date datetime Date of the last update to this record Updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits tlu Park Taxon Source List of sources of park species occurrence info Field name Index key Data type Description Taxon status code primary text 12 Taxon status desc text 250 Sort order tinyint tlu Park Taxon Status List of codes for park species occurrence standard Field name Index key Data type Description Taxon status code primary text 16 Taxon status desc text 250 NPS
38. Select m km hectare Open this job file each time GPS job files are downloaded from the GPS unit to the PC desktop Data Transfer Between GPS and MobileMapper Office 1 Connect the GPS to the computer using the serial cable 2 Turnon the GPS unit 3 Launch MobileMapper Office if it is not already open 4 In MobileMapper Office click on the File menu 5 Select Download from GPS 6 Click on the File menu within the MobileMapper Transfer window 7 Select Connect 8 Select GPS Device via Cable This will bring up a list of all files in the GPS unit on the left side pane 9 Use the dropdown box in the right side pane to navigate to the directory to which GPS files will be copied and stored e g Raw or Unprocessed folder 10 Copy files from the left pane to the right pane by a Highlighting the job s name use Shift or Ctrl keys to highlight multiple files Right clicking c Andselecting Copy to This will automatically begin the file s transfer from the GPS unit to the directory in the right pane Note Use the Copy option not the Move option It appears to be safer to copy not move The Move option takes the files out of the GPS unit and into the directory shown in the right pane NCCN has experienced transfer errors that corrupt GPS receiver job files using the Move option Note Highlight and copy only the GPS receiver job files There is no need to copy background map and feature library files 11 Close the
39. Time interval Field name Event ID Obs distance m Observation ID Taxon ID Time interval Index key Data type Description Observation ID Event ID Taxon ID Obs distance m Seen first Ever sang Time interval Prev observed Flyover Group size Obs notes primary text 50 Unique identifier for each observation record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv indexed FK text 50 Sampling event indexed FK text 50 Taxon observed indexed int Observation distance in meters Constraint Is Null Or 220 And 1000 bit Indicates whether the initial observation was visual Default False bit Indicates whether the group individual observed made territorial vocalizations during the sample time Default True indexed tinyint Indicates the time interval during which the observation was made first 3 minutes or last 2 minutes Constraint 2 Or 3 Or Is Null bit Indicates whether the observed was recorded on more than one point count Default False bit Indicates whether the observed was flying over the sample point during sampling Default False int Number of individuals observed Default 1 Constraint 50 And 2200 text 200 Comments about this observation tbl Point Desc Event specific location description information to be uploaded to tbl Locations upon certification Index Index columns Event ID Event ID pk Point Desc primary Event ID Field
40. UNBI Unidentified Bird UCFI Unidentified Carpodacus Finch UNDU Unidentified Duck UEFL Unidentified Empidonax Flycatcher UNFL Unidentified Flycatcher UNGU Unidentified Gull UNHA Unidentified Hawk UNHU Unidentified Hummingbird UNOW Unidentified Owl UPCH Unidentified Poecile Chickadee UNSA Unidentified Sapsucker UNSP Unidentified Sparrow USWA Unidentified Swallow USWI Unidentified Swift UNTH Unidentified Thrush UNWA Unidentified Warbler UNWO Unidentified Woodpecker UNWR Unidentified Wren Distance Record the horizontal distance in meters to a bird when it was first detected If the bird moves closer to you later during the count do not change the distance estimation Record distances for all birds except individuals or groups classified as flyovers see definition of Flyover Seen First Y N Y indicates the distance to the bird was estimated after visually locating the bird N indicates the distance to the bird was estimated without first seeing the bird Ever Sang Y N Y indicates the bird sang at least once during the 5 minute point count N indicates the bird did not sing during the 5 minute point count Here we provide guidelines for differentiating songs from calls Most songbirds have a typical song that generally is not confused with typical call notes An example is the Black headed Grosbeak whose song can be described as a high drunken rolling warble and w
41. Unkn Building Eggs Transect and Point if detected during point count Nesting Stage check one Nestlings Recent Fledglings Description include fieldmarks and or vocalization description and indicate sex and any nest sightings or behavior indicative of nesting Park Time Observer 1 Observer 2 Species Name Species Code Quantity Location Name Coordinate Source circle one GPS GPS Model GPS File Name Northing GPS Error m Datum Unkn _ Building Eggs Transect and Point if detected during point count Nesting Stage check one Nestlings Recent Fledglings Description include fieldmarks and or vocalization description and indicate sex and any nest sightings or behavior indicative of nesting SOP 9 Field Form Handling Procedures 67 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 9 Field Form Handling Procedures Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Field Form Handling Procedures As field data forms are part of the permanent record for project data they should be handled in a way that preserves their future interpretability and information content If changes to data on the forms need to be made subsequent to data collection the original values should not b
42. Wilkerson R L Jenkins K Kuntz R C II Schaberl J Happe P and Boetsch J 2005 Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network April 20 2005 A final report in partial fulfillment of USGS cooperative agreement 03VVRAC0040 The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Stevens D L Jr 2005 Review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 28 2005 TerraStat Consulting Group 2004 Protocols for Analyzing and Reporting Trends in Avian Abundance in NCCN parks Task 1 Report Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center November 5 2004 Seattle WA TerraStat Consulting Group 2005a Protocols for Analyzing and Reporting Trends in Avian Abundance in NCCN parks Task 2 Report Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 11 2005 Seattle WA TerraStat Consulting Group 2005b Protocols for Analyzing and Reporting Trends in Avian Abundance in NCCN parks Task 3 Report BirdTrend Program User s Manual Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center August 31 2005 Seattle WA Cooperative Agreements Modifications and Contracts Rolph B Kuntz R C II Siegel R B and McLaughlin J 200
43. are classified as songs Jays and crows Never sing Regard all vocalizations as calls Chickadees Song includes MOCH s cheeseburger and BCCH s fee bee fee beeyee All other vocalizations for these two species should be classified as calls CBCH is more ambiguous and may not have a structured song at all regard all vocalizations as calls Time Interval Circle 3 if the bird was first detected in the first 3 minutes of the point count and 2 if the bird was first detected during the last 2 minutes of the point count Prev Obs Enter Y to indicate that the same individual bird was recorded on more than one point count The Y should be associated with the count on which the species was at a greater distance from the observer Otherwise this field should be left blank Flyover Y indicates the detection was a flyover a bird or birds that flew over the top of the vegetation canopy never touched down in the observer s field of view and did not appear to be foraging displaying or behaving in any other way that might suggest a link to the habitat below The space should simply be left blank when the detection is not a flyover Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Group Size A blank field indicates a single individual whereas a numerical entry indicates the number of birds in a flock Landbird species for which group size entries may
44. but not required Knowledge of or preferably certification in wilderness first aid desirable but not required Possession of a reliable vehicle Note Unless NPS vehicles are available for field work at least one half of the crew will need to provide personal vehicles Although the first three of the above qualities should be considered mandatory the others are desirable but not strictly required As with selection of the Field Lead priority consideration should be given to returning crew members to maximize year to year consistency in field operations and methods Soon after being hired Field Technicians should be sent the following A written description of expectations duties and responsibilities to be signed and returned A list of all bird species likely to be encountered during the field season see SOP 3 Training Observers Song recordings and or other materials that will assist Field Technicians to bolster their bird identification skills prior to the field season A list of required and recommended personal equipment 2 Organizing Supplies and Equipment An equipment list should be compiled and equipment organized and made ready for the field season several weeks in advance of the training session This allows time to make needed repairs and order equipment Table 1 provides a list of field equipment needs for each pair of crew members In addition to the equipment specified in table 1
45. data collection Crews also should brainstorm potential responses to theoretical emergency situations and have a clear understanding of what to do if a partner should become seriously injured or go missing 10 Backcountry Rules and Ethics Field Technicians should receive instruction on backcountry regulations for the large parks including permit requirements and procedures campsite restrictions food storage etc Note Some of these rules differ among the parks If possible arrangements should be made for a backcountry ranger or other qualified NPS employee to meet with the crew to discuss these topics Regardless the Field Lead is responsible to ensure that all crew members understand the rules they must follow 11 Coordination with Park Biologists Arrangements should be made for crews to meet with Park Biologists and other personnel for example Data Manager GIS Specialists as needed This will provide opportunities to Clarify expectations and procedures for crews to notify Park Biologists of their schedule and whereabouts in the park Arrange computer access if needed Arrange acquisition of gate keys if needed Clarify procedures for obtaining backcountry permits Ensure that GIS data are collected to protocol Note Park Biologists require at least 2 4 weeks preferably even more notice to arrange computer access keys etc for individual crew members 12 Computer Data Entry During the pre seaso
46. indexed text 12 Current status of the marker Default active text Comments about the marker datetime Date the marker was first installed datetime Date the marker record was last updated datetime Date the marker was removed tbl Nesting Obs Nesting observation records Index Index columns Event_ID Event_ID Nest_activity Nest_activity pk_tbl_Nesting Obs primary Nest_obs_ID Taxon_ID Taxon_ID Field name Index key Data type Description Nest_obs_ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each observation record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Event_ID indexed FK text 50 Sampling event Taxon_ID indexed FK text 50 Taxon observed Nest_activity indexed text 20 Type of nesting activity observed Nest_obs_notes text Comments about this observation NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol Appendix 7 183 February 27 2007 tbl Observers Observers for each sampling event Field name Event ID Contact ID Observer role Observer notes Index key Data type primary FK text 50 primary FK text 50 primary text 25 text 200 Description Sampling event identifier Observer identifier Role of the observer during data collection optional Comments about the observer specific to this sampling event Point Counts Point count observation data Index Index columns Event ID Obs distance m pk Point Counts primary Taxon ID
47. species simulated on 72 avian monitoring transects did not differ from zero slope of log transformed density indices We estimated power to detect 4 percent per year exponential increases evaluated at a 0 10 associated with sampling 72 transects following the proposed augmented serial repeat design reported in this protocol The analysis is based on the distribution of site means for 22 avian species derived from the landbird inventory conducted in Olympic National Park in 2002 03 Siegel and others 2004a Statistical power analysis requires the assumption of a single alternative hypothesis scenario In this case simulations were designed to estimate the probability of detecting 4 percent exponential trends if present at all sites The exponential trend scenario is based on the starting average density of birds densities at sites with more birds are assumed to increase faster than densities at sites with fewer birds The observed trends in the simulations vary 2 Sampling Design 9 based on year to year variability including measurement and sampling error Statistical power for the alternative hypothesis with multiple levels of exponential trends among sites was not tested and is likely to be lower than the power results discussed here Power to detect simulated trends in 22 representative avian species is reported in table 2 After 10 20 and 30 years of simulated trend power to detect 4 percent per annum increase exceeded 80 p
48. yip e Ayl ds O JURA NOA TI Kjisuaqjonuuypuas psig unio1 pue oureu AY ou JOD rz MoU L UIM ELA ndino ev sup ul YOTYM 3STX JOU soop AY a71 jno perroedg Cisuaqyonuuypua pA unioi pue YOM s1eo ATUO urejuoo o fi jndur v AHPOVN Aquo Kreurums enuue ue sojeJouos ure1godd 5111 ouo ULY IOU 107 Sp402 1 surejuoo 49S CWA IossoooJdoud v UNII pue ndur v Ajrpour q oss old nd yno yndur uni sp lq syooyo 10ssoooJdoud ssed jou prp erep ynduy Qisu qiypnuuypu 4 pAg UNII pue oureu AY Mou jroedg sjsrxo Ape rie o r yndyno yoda porjroodg Knsuaggonuuypuaarp4ig UNII pue f y v 15 jou soop 1ndur perroedg Ajisuaqjonuuypuas pg UNII pue oureu e y dmo puooes Ajroedg 3ueum ae z271 7no Buss Ausuagpnuuypua4 pig unio1 pue sojeuinso Aylsuap eureu Ajloadg 3uoumSae Sutsst Knsuagonuuypuaarp4ig UNII pue eureu 1ndur ue Ajioadg 3ueumaue 271fu1 SursstjA ESS T V MOHMH dowd MOMHMH dowd MOMHMH dowd 910 Ncc a 930N BULUU As SSUIU IU AA MONA kkk SJO LI q amp usuaqpnuuypua4 psig Aq poye1ouoS oq ULI jeu sojou pue SSUTUIEM SIOLIO JO JST SOV AQEL 1002 LT 0503014 SurojuoJA NOON 165 Appendix 6 lqe euo ul s r ds ydninui H yndyno Kreurums u r yip e Ayl ds o NOA
49. 0 015099 Combined panels Low 12 0 0419 0 003377 Mid 24 0 1302 0 001714 High 24 0 0071 0 000545 Grand mean All 60 0 0433 0 000808 20 99 1 522 0 1429 Combined 204 0 0269 0 000133 146 83 2 3328 0 021 N Density Reporting and Trend Assessment for the Smaller Parks For each of the small parks the 5 year report should provide annual density estimates for each species with adequate data for density estimation The 5 year report also should present simple linear regression analysis of parkwide density over time See SOP 17 Special Considerations for the Small Parks for more detailed instructions 6 Additional Components of the 5 year Report In addition to the extra analyses and tables described above the 5 year report also should assess spatial patterns in the density estimates identify any possible distributional changes within the parks and perhaps try to place network results within the larger context of bird population changes throughout the Pacific Northwest as measured by regional efforts such as the BBS or MAPS The report also should evaluate operational aspects of the monitoring program such as whether any transects need to be eliminated or moved due to access problems whether the sampling period remains appropriate the optimal sampling season could conceivably change over time in response to climate change etc SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 113 References Cited
50. 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 9 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 10 WIWA 1 3068 1 159 Appendix 6 0 0 0 0 0L 0 0 0 0 01 z HIY g 81 0 0 0 0 OL 0 0 0 0 01 z HIY 8 11 0 0 0 0 0L 0 0 0 0 0L HIY Y 91 0 0 0 0 0L 0 0 0 0 0L HIY Y 91 0 0 0 0 0L 0 0 0 0 01 HIY Y yl 0 0 0 0 0L 0 0 0 0 0L HIY Y l 01 0L 0L 0L 01 01 0L 0L 0L 0L Luuy e 0L 0L 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 Luuy LL 0L 0L 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 Luuy 0L 0L 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 Luuy 6 0L 01 01 01 OL 0L 01 01 0L 01 z Luuy 2 8 01 0L 0L 01 01 01 01 0L OL 0L z Luuy z Z 0L 01 01 01 0L 01 01 01 0L OL z Luuy z 9 0L 01 0L 01 01 01 0L 0L OL 0L z Luuy z g 0L 01 0L 0L 0L 0L 0L 0L 0L 01 Luuy Y 0L 0L 0L 0L 0L 01 0L 0L 01 0L Luuy 01 01 0L 0L 01 01 01 0L 01 01 Luuy 2 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 Luuy 102 0102 6002 8002 1002 9002 9002 rooz 6002 2002 ei Pued doen ued slojdqns jo syequunu ee sjepeeu 1epun e qej ui S UNOD 31 ON INA IO Yed 10 AHVININDIS LO IdgriS LOd3SNVH L OHNV Sal93dS 9002 62 91 20 6c JEW POM ASO hJeseojsoAso ngpiiq so rjAun 10sseooJdeud INANI 1 Wor 3ndjno o r Wodar o dureg Z9V o qe LOOT L7 priqpue T NOON Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 160 o suen or z uou Utt IIOU ALY 18 1 dnor3 oouermA v H ndur poerjroeds qoy e qirssod jou S
51. 77 4 9443 0 MORA 60 0 082 0 000475 17 35 3 7676 0 001 Combined 204 0 090 0 000128 150 7 7 9335 0 L Detectability Parameters Used for Calculating Density Estimates The 5 year report should discuss results of detectability modeling and should provide the detectability parameters used for calculating density estimates The table structure may change somewhat if analysts decide to use covariates other than habitat such as observer year etc Note These are fabricated values the actual table will include many more species Density adjustment parameters obtained through detectability modeling z Relatively closed canopy habitats Relatively open canopy habitats pecies Number of Sample Detection probability Number of Sample Detection probability detections width m P SE df detections width m P SE df Western Wood Pewee 64 90 0 707 0 323 220 62 94 0 780 0 090 70 Hammond s Flycatcher 120 72 0 665 0 240 150 67 79 0 680 0 069 95 Pacific slope Flycatcher 350 72 0 600 0 268 94 70 79 0 654 0 069 100 Ch backed Chickadee 805 85 0 504 0 066 400 805 85 0 504 0 066 400 112 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network M Detailed Species Specific Trend Results The 5 year report should provide a table with detailed trend results for each species for which density estimates have been calculated A sample table is provided below Note This table is produced by BirdTrend
52. C Measurable Objectives The primary and secondary objectives of this monitoring project are 1 To detect trends in the density of as many landbird species including passerines near passerines and galliformes as possible throughout accessible areas of five NCCN parks during the breeding season 2 To track changes in the breeding season distribution of landbird species throughout accessible areas of the large wilderness parks In testing the statistical power of our project design see appendix 5 we assessed whether the proposed sampling would likely detect a 4 percent per annum decline in avian population trend assessed over a 20 year period that is about a 50 percent decline for a large suite of species at either the level of individual parks or for the network of parks The exact ability of the proposed monitoring program to detect change however will vary immensely among species depending on species abundances and sampling variation For many common species we will be able to detect a lesser magnitude of change at the individual park level For some rarer species and habitat specialists that occur only in alpine riparian or other limited habitats it may not be possible to infer population trends at the geographic scale of the individual park but it will be possible to infer at the network wide scale For some particularly uncommon species statistical assessment of trends in estimated abundance may still not be possible
53. CO CO Co To To To TO KH Var Group 1 Oc101C TBZBBDssDsBDnBBnBnDsBDBI MDBILPBBIPBEBUB DB B S o co 06CGTDDnDmm c Panel Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Alti Alti Alti Alti Alt2 Alt2 Alt2 Alt2 Alt3 Alt3 Alt3 Alt3 Alt4 Alt4 Alt4 Alt4 Alt5 Alt5 Alt5 Alt5 Alt1 Alt1 Alt1 Transect 1 ON O O C rn 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 26 27 28 37 38 39 40 49 50 51 52 61 62 63 64 17 18 19 Park OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM OLYM February 27 2007 Appendix 6 169 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Table A6 9 Example summary output file generated by BirdTrend BIRDTREND SUMMARY OUTPUT No Mean Variance Non zero of of 2 tailed Species Years Park Transects Slope Slope df t stat p value AMRO 2002 2011 OLYM 72 0 022 0 00035 38 26 1 1976 0 2384 2002 2011 NOCA 72 0 018 0 000157 45 54 1 4181 0 163 2002 2011 MORA 60 0 043 0 000808 20 99 1 522 0 1429 2002 2011 Combined 204 0 03 0 000133 146 83 2 3328 0 021 VVIVVA 2002 2011 OLYM 72 0 098 0 00038 47 62 5 0157 0 2002 2011 NOCA 72 0 088 0 000317 50 77 4 9443 0 2002 2011 MORA 60 0 082 0 000475 17 35 3 7676 0 0015 2002 2011 Combined 204 0 09 0 000128 150 7 7 9335 0 170 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks i
54. Distance Thomas and others 2005 to model relationships between detectability and distance from the observer and then use those models to adjust detection rates for detectability thereby producing estimates of absolute density Buckland and others 2001 Numerous factors may influence detectability including species habitat observer year and perhaps other variables Some of these factors are likely to vary over time or space and therefore must be accounted for before density estimates can be made and trends in density can be assessed Because avian detection probabilities may depend on habitat structure we will test whether separately derived detection models for each species in relatively open canopy habitats primarily meadow and subalpine forest versus relatively closed canopy habitats primarily low and mid elevation forests are preferable to using a single model incorporating data from all habitats Detection probability also may vary with observer Ideally detectability could be modeled separately for each combination of species habitat and observer but in practice this is rarely possible as at least 60 80 detections are generally necessary for reliably modeling detection functions Buckland and others 2001 We are unlikely to amass an adequate number of detections by each observer in both open and dense habitats for all but the most common species Nevertheless for some species we may be able to model observer as a
55. Golden crovvned Kinglet 8 12 Dark eyed Junco 41 93 Includes all species detected during point counts in the specified small park and year H Maps to nclude in the Annual Reports The annual report should include maps indicating the general location of each transect that was surveyed in each large park during the current year In the sample map provided below squares indicate low elevation transects triangles indicate mid elevation transects and octagons indicate high elevation transects Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network 1 Other Components of Annual Reports In addition to the tables and figures described above annual reports should include A brief Narrative section describing any logistical problems that were encountered and providing suggestions for preventing or coping with similar problems in the future A Methods section detailing data collection procedures and analytical techniques this may change little from year to year but should still be included as part of each year s report The section should highlight any changes from previous methods A Results section that describes the content of the tables and figures Graphs showing trends in the raw counts of at least the most common species detected on the annual panel These graphical presentations of trends in raw data will not be analyzed quantitatively because they represent interim data th
56. MORA survey crew and the roving crew will spend approximately 1 week surveying at either SAJH or LEWI before beginning work at MORA In all three large parks we will begin sampling at low elevations early in the season and gradually move upslope as the season progresses All surveys will be completed by July 31 The project sampling scheme is built around an assumption that pairs of observers will work six 7 day sessions many of which will be spent entirely in the backcountry D Details of Taking Measurements A pair of observers will work together to conduct a single 10 point transect each morning The first time a transect is surveyed observers will be given a map and coordinates that indicate a transect starting point that lies on a trail From this starting point the two observers will walk 100 m along the cardinal or semi cardinal directions that most closely approximate perpendiculars to the trail in opposite directions from one another Each observer will conduct a point count and then continue walking in the same direction conducting another point count every 200 m until five point counts have been completed Point counts will begin within 10 minutes of official local sunrise and must be completed by 3 5 hours after official local sunrise as bird activity tends to decrease later in the morning If a barrier such as a cliff or uncrossable stream is encountered the observer will return to the last successfully s
57. NPS Management Policies National Park Service 2006 and in Director s Order 66 These guidelines apply to all NCCN staff cooperators contractors and other partners who are likely to obtain or have access to information about protected NPS resources The NPS Lead has primary responsibility for ensuring adequate protection of sensitive information related to this project The following are highlights of our strategy for protecting this information Protected resources in the context of the NCCN Inventory and Monitoring Program include species that have State or Federally listed status and other species deemed rare or sensitive by local park taxa experts Sensitive information is defined as information about protected resources that may reveal the nature or specific location of protected resources Such information must not be shared outside the National Park Service unless a signed confidentiality agreement is in place n general if information is withheld from one requesting party it must be withheld from anyone else who requests it and if information is provided to one requesting party without a confidentiality agreement it must be provided to anyone else who requests it To share information as broadly as legally possible and to provide a consistent tractable approach for handling sensitive information the following shall apply if a project is likely to collect and store sensitive information Rand
58. Reyes Station California The Institute for Bird Populations Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Kuntz IL R C and J F McLaughlin 2004b Landbird inventory for North Cascades National Park Service Complex Point Reyes Station California The Institute for Bird Populations Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Pedersen H K and Kuntz II R C 2002 Landbird inventory of San Juan Island National Historical Park Technical Report NPS D 73 of the National Park Service Silsbee G G and Peterson D L 1991 Designing and implementing comprehensive long term inventory and monitoring programs for National Park System lands Denver Colorado Natural Resources Report NPS NRUW NRR 91 04 Simons T R Rabenold K N Buehler D A Collazo J A and Fransreb K E 1999 The role of indicator species neotropical migratory song birds in Peine J D ed Ecosystem Management for Sustainability Principles and Practices Illustrated by a Regional Biosphere Reserve Cooperative New York Lewis Publishers p 187 208 Smith M R Mattocks Jr P W and Cassidy K M 1997 Breeding birds of Washington State in Cassidy K M Grue C E Smith M R and Dvornich K M eds Washington State Gap Analysis Final Report Seattle Washington Audubon Society Publications in Zoology v 4 no 1 References Cited 25 Smith W P Twedt D J Cooper R J Wiedenfeld D A Hamel P B and Ford R P 1995 Sample size and allocation of e
59. S Suoule lt v UY o1our ou V DALY p nous sjoesue IV IMO sjo dqns jo 1equinu yenb un ue sey yy supAT PP SULIL SUIUTE Mk JeoK Jad s oqdans sjo dqns Aueur ydures AT AMN JO urnurutui e pnous sposuen TV IMO OOL SIA sjo dqns 21 lt sey q7 22sup4g 1oosuv1 FUU M kk JeoK q d syojdqns ordures 100d e yp rpur Lew sjo dqns 5 15 yo umnurrumu p nous syoosuen 117 rmno A9 SIEA Jre 10 sjo dqns 9 gt seu 7 22sup4 199sue1 Surum A JeoK q d sjyo dqns s oydqns ueu oo 1eo ejdures AT AN JO umnurrxeui v p nous sjoesue v IMO QUO js 9 1 107 sjo dqns ZI lt seu q 22sup4 199sue1 Surum A JeoK q d sjyo dqns ordures 100d gorpur Lew sjo dqns rea 5 xis yo ununum e sey p nous sjoesuen 117 IMO QUO jse9 Je 107 sjo dqns 9 gt seu 7 722sun4 1995 9 1 SurumeA SISATEUE pu n ur DOULLIVA PasvoIOUI osneo vui JOSUL sIeo 1970 107 Uey sjo dqns jo 1equinu u s yip e urtprA sjo dqns Jo siequinu Sur TeA sTeo Suoure Sey IULEN JUONI ou 10 yep JO Jvo ouo ISLI IV IMO sjo dqns 1equinu yenb un ue sey 7 22suD4 J PSULIL Surum A SUODETD TE oURLIvA JO 1095 81 ouo ULY AJOU ojur sjoosued 1145 o sueour se p sn oq Aew 50 8 ooueLmA sTeo JO ouo UIOJJ SUISSIUI sosto ur IoA9OQ Avul dnois oouermA ouo Uey IIO
60. SOP In addition to marking the origin point observers should mark the first two off trail points of the transect the first point on each transect half These usually will be the first two points of the transect but if for example the first two points heading northeast need to be placed on the trail the first northeast point would not be marked but instead the third northeast point the first one to be conducted off trail should be marked The first two off trail points should be marked using the guidelines in Section 4 Installing Permanent Markers of this SOP These points can be marked the afternoon before the point counts are conducted or the following morning after the point counts have been completed Either way observers must be sure to record all relevant information in the Permanent Marker Information section at the bottom of the Point Establishment Form for the appropriate points Once the origin point and the first two off trail points have been marked the observers can return to camp for the night They should be sure to time the walk so that the proper time to leave camp the next morning can be determined 46 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork B Day of Point Count Survey Observers should arrive at the transect origin the next morning vvith plenty of time to then separate and reach their first point count stations such that their first point counts
61. SOP provides step by step instructions for collecting position information using Thales MobileMapper GPS receivers as well as downloading that information in preparation for sending it to the GIS Specialist The material in this SOP is excerpted from the document NCCN Global Positioning System Data Acquisition and Processing 2006 http www nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt_guide cfm which also provides information on processing GIS data once the data have been downloaded and given to the GIS Specialist 1 General Practices for GPS Data Collection Regardless of GPS receiver type certain data collection standards must be followed Most of the quality control measures below can be established by the user and should be followed whenever possible to produce the most accurate data possible e Satellite availability and satellite geometry PDOP GPS users can increase mapping accuracy by using planning charts and targeting their data collection to the times of day when satellite availability and geometry are best However such timing does not always work in the field Length of time GPS data file is open Positional accuracy will be better the longer a file is open and the more GPS positions are collected and averaged Mulitpath error or signal interference Although mostly beyond a user s control some adjustments can be made to minimize multipath error These include positioning the GPS in the most unobstructed view of t
62. TO travel feature Pulloff 50 20060126154148 117824554 443359 4005 NVV04 travel feature small short bank that you have to go up 35 20060126154148 118091523 647308 3128 VVVV03 travelfeature stream crossing easy 120 20060126154148 120035827 159882 3130 NE02 seen from po Large mossy WEHE 10 20060126154148 121662020 683289 3122 WWO07 travel feature downed tree that runs parallel to trail 85 20060126154148 124145269 393921 3134 8 seen from po Shredded stump 2 5 meters tall 25 20060126154148 12474656 1050415 3125 04 seen from po cedar T 20060126164142 12422170 5602444 2192 FFNS travel featiire Rouildar field 2n Important As with all edits performed during the quality review these types of direct edits in the data tables should be made with extreme care as the validation checks that are built into the front end data entry forms are not present in the tables themselves It is possible therefore to make edits to the tables that may result in a loss of data integrity and quality While the automated queries are intended to check for these it is not possible to check for every possible error combination Note Whenever making quality review edits whether through a query or directly in a table the user should remember to update the Updated date and Updated by fields to the current date and the current user name Generating Output for the Certification Report The first page of the quality review form has a button
63. are being entered the person entering the data should visually review each data form to make sure that the data on screen match the field forms This should be done for each record prior to moving to the next form for data entry 5 Atregular intervals and at the end of the field season the Field Lead should inspect the data that have been entered to check for completeness and perhaps identify avoidable errors The Field Lead also may periodically run the Quality Assurance Tools that are built into the front end working database application to check for logical inconsistencies and data outliers this step is described in greater detail in Section 4E Quality Review and also in SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification Database Instructions Getting Started The first action to be taken is to make sure the data entry workspace is set up properly on a networked drive If you are unclear about where this should be contact either the local Park Wildlife Biologist or Data Manager Store the back end database file on the server so that others can enter data into the same back end file The back end file has be as part of its name Upon saving this back end file the user may want to append the local park code to distinguish it from other back end files associated with other crews for example Landbirds BDa03 be 2007 OLYM mdb 82 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netv
64. as follows 1 File Structure Setup Set up the file organization for images prior to acquisition 2 Image Acquisition 3 Download and Process a Download the files from the camera b Rename the image files according to convention c Copy and store the original unedited versions d Review and edit or delete the photographs e Move into appropriate folders for storage 4 Establish Database Links 5 Deliver Image Files for Final Storage 78 A Hle Structure Setup Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Prior to data collection for any given year project staff will need to set up a new folder under the Images folder in the project workspace as follows Year Park code _Processing Data Site_code Date Miscellaneous Site_code Date Originals Site_code Date Non NPS This folder structure permits data images to be stored and managed separately from non record and miscellaneous images collected during the course of the project This structure also provides separate space for image processing The appropriate year 2007 2008 etc Arrange files by park OLYM NOCA etc Processing workspace Data images Arranged by transect for images taken at transects Arranged by date for images not taken at transects Non data images taken by project staff Arranged by transect for images taken at transects Renamed but otherwise unedited image file copies
65. be greater than one are limited to swallows Cedar Waxwing Red or White winged Crossbill Evening Grosbeak Pine Siskin Gray crowned Rosy Finch and late season high elevation aggregations of Golden crowned Kinglet and Dark eyed Junco Even for these species only record birds together as a flock if they are clearly behaving as a flock Multiple birds singing in the same general area or chasing each other do not qualify as a flock For all other landbirds even if you see multiple individuals moving together or interacting provide a separate line of data for each individual Note Clusters of individuals of species that do not normally flock may be post fledging family groups in which case the juveniles should not be counted At LEWI SAJH and the coastal strip at OLYM shorebirds of numerous species may be recorded as flocks Comments Use this field only for essential comments about a particular bird detection such as noting any uncertainty about species identification 3 Miscellaneous Things to Keep in Mind While Conducting Point Counts Approach each point as quietly as possible If you need to repack your things or add or remove clothing try to postpone doing so until after the point count Be sure to periodically rotate your body so that you do not spend the entire point count facing the same direction you must do your best to track birds around you in all directions Try to keep track of individual birds so that if t
66. between NCCN results and data from other regional and national efforts The existence of other regional and national landbird monitoring efforts such as the Breeding Bird Survey Droege 1990 Peterjohn and Sauer 1993 does not suggest that monitoring efforts in the NCCN are unnecessary or redundant Oregon Washington Partners in Flight has explicitly called on the NPS to take responsibility for monitoring birds in high elevation areas throughout the Pacific Northwest Altman and Bart 2001 Such areas which are poorly sampled by the Breeding Bird Survey Altman and Bart 2001 are well represented in the NCCN and will be a major focus of our efforts Even in mid and low elevation forests late successional conditions generally are poorly sampled by the Breeding Bird Survey and other regional bird monitoring activities but are well represented in the NCCN parks Additionally although the BBS Breeding Bird Survey has been very valuable in documenting geographically broad population changes BBS data are collected exclusively at roadsides and are thus of limited value for extending inferences to areas not adjacent to roads O Connor 1992 DeSante and George 1994 Sauer 2000 and the resolution of trends generally is too coarse for regional let alone park level decision making Sauer and Cooper 2000 Hutto and Young 2002 Substantial knowledge about habitat relationships and bird community structure in the Pacific Northwest fo
67. but changes in detection rates will be important for qualitatively assessing regional occurrence Uses of these data will depend on the magnitude of trend the conservation status of individual species as well as societal and cultural values and the potential for management actions to effect change 4 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork The monitoring program is limited to the three large wilderness parks MORA OLYM NOCA and two cultural area parks with significant natural landscapes SAJH and LEWD It was necessary to limit inference to accessible areas of parks because substantial areas of the three large wilderness parks in the network are virtually inaccessible to ground crews during spring and early summer due to safety concerns stemming from high water flows and steep slopes For commonly detected species we will be able to detect trends at the level of individual parks allowing comparisons between trends at the different parks A shared methodology between five parks across the NCCN will ensure consistency and allow us to avoid the pitfalls that can make comparisons between parks difficult or misleading Quinn and van Riper 1990 Sauvajot and others 1990 Silsbee and Peterson 1991 Tracking distributional shifts provides an additional metric for assessing changes in bird communities throughout the Network as some important ecological changes such as populations moving ups
68. crews need access to field guides to aid them in bird and plant identification Recommended field guides and reference materials for bird surveys and associated vegetation Table 1 Field equipment list for each pair of crew members Asterisk indicates items that crew members are currently required to supply for themselves Number item needed Survey Equipment 2 Binoculars 2 Celsius thermometers 2 GPS units 2 Altimeters 2 Wristwatches 2 Clinometers 2 Clipboards Many Pens or pencils 4 rolls Flagging 2 Radios 2 Compasses Many Aluminum tree tags Many Nails 2 Lightvveight hammers 2 Lightvveight measuring tapes for assessing dbh in metric General Backpacking Gear 1 First aid kit 1 Tent 2 Sleeping bags 2 Sleeping pads 1 Stove 2 Mess kits 2 Bear proof food containers 1 Water filter 2 Backpacks 2 Daypacks or other means of carrying gear during surveys assessments in the NCCN parks are listed below with the most important items indicated in bold type Atkinson S and Sharpe F A 1985 Wild plants of the San Juan Islands The Mountaineers Seattle WA Biek D 2000 Flora of Mount Rainier National Park Oregon State University Press Corvallis Buckingham N M Schreiner E G Kaye T N Burger J E and Tisch E L 1995 Flora of the Olympic Peninsula Northwest Interpretive Association Seattle Lewis M G and Sharpe F A 1987 Birding in the San Juan Islands
69. d dT KxojuoAud gI OLdS snjpqnopui QAOL penodg Koud 41 KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dI KxojuoAu d dT VIAN Jogeuv UI9 S9AA K1ojyuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dI K1ojuoAud gI K1ojuoAu d dT VMIM pyy snd DIUOS IM IOM S UOS LAN UA d dI KxojuoAu d dT oW KxojuoAu d dT HAO SDW214 s diqyo r JEOIYMOTIOA 40011002 popjoooesnoN KxojuoAu d AI KxojuoAu d dT KxojyuoAu d dT K1ojuoAu d dT VAN 121u 0 smuso10dQ ISJIM S LIN OWN popiooownoN popiooosnoN XI HHIAV p nonunu psvydojag jmjspow ueoroury cIM3T zHfWS zINA10 zWJON 9109 saisadg snu uouluo panujuoj yiompay sepeose pue 38802 UHON au l peJejunooue aq o1 Al yil s l ds purg 1 9Iqer SOP 4 Field Tour Preparation 43 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 4 Field Tour Preparation Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This SOP details procedures for preparing to go on a field tour generally 1 week of continuous work including determining which transects to sample planning travel routes arranging travel logistics securing permits and assembling field equipment and food 1 Determining Which Transects to Sample Before beginning a field tour crews must determine which tran
70. data transfer window This will return to the main MobileMapper Office job window 76 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Delete Files from GPS Receiver Delete GPS files from GPS receivers only after files have been transferred to computers and backed up Delete Files from MobileMapper Receiver With the GPS receiver turned on Push MENU Scroll to Delete Files Push ENTER Scroll to the file to be deleted Push ENTER Scroll to Yes to confirm deletion Push ENTER ANAM PWN Note Files must be deleted one at a time There is no option for deleting all files at once from the receiver Delete Files from MobileMapper Receiver Using MobileMapper Office With MobileMapper Office open and the GPS receiver connected to the computer 1 2 3 Click on the File menu Select Download from GPS Click on the File menu within the MobileMapper Transfer window Select Connect Select GPS Device via Cable This will bring up a list of all files in the GPS unit on the left side pane Highlight the job s name use Shift or Ctrl keys to highlight multiple files that will be deleted Right click Select Delete This will delete the selected job files from the GPS receiver SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images 7 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Standard Operating Procedure SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images
71. delivery instructions SOP 15 Metadata Development 103 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 15 Metadata Development Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Data documentation is a critical step toward ensuring that data sets are usable for their intended purposes well into the future This involves the development of metadata which can be defined as structured information about the content quality condition and other characteristics of a given data set Additionally metadata provide the means to catalog and search among data sets thus making them available to a broad range of potential data users Metadata for all NCCN monitoring data will conform to Federal Geographic Data Committee FGDC guidelines and will contain all components of supporting information such that the data may be confidently manipulated analyzed and synthesized Updated metadata are a required deliverable that should accompany each season s certified data For long term projects such as this one metadata creation is most time consuming the first time it is developed after which most information remains static from one year to the next Metadata records in subsequent years then only need to be updated to reflect changes in contact information and taxonomic conventions to include recent pub
72. detecting trend from repeated surveys of ecological resources Journal of Agricultural Biological and Environmental Statistics v 4 p 404 414 Urquhart N S Paulsen S G and Larsen D P 1998 Monitoring for policy relevant regional trends over time Ecological Applications v 8 p 246 257 Wilkerson R L Siegel R B and Schaberl J 2005 Landbird inventory for Mount Rainier National Park first annual progress report Point Reyes Station California The Institute for Bird Populations 26 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season 27 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This Standard Operating Procedure identifies preparatory steps that must be taken prior to the field season of the NCCN landbird monitoring program 1 Hiring the Field Crew A Hiring the Field Lead At least for the initial years of this program The Institute for Bird Populations will provide the Field Lead and Field Technicians The Field Lead will have an identified liaison at each park usually the lead park wildlife biologist or resource specialist that will be the key contact for pl
73. disclose the locations of sensitive resources or withheld from posting and distribution When requests for distribution of the unedited version of products are initiated by the NPS by another Federal agency or by another partner organization for example a research scientist at a university the unedited product the full data set that includes protected information may be shared only after a confidentiality agreement is established between NPS and the other organization Refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures for more information All official FOIA requests will be handled according to NPS policy The NPS Lead will work with the Data Manager and the park FOIA representative s of the park s for which the request applies K Archival and Records Management All project files should be reviewed cleaned up and organized by the Project Lead and NPS Lead on a regular basis for example annually in January Decisions on what to retain and what to destroy should be made following guidelines stipulated in NPS Director s Order 19 which provides a schedule indicating the amount of time that the various kinds of records should be retained Refer to SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records Management L Season Close Out After the conclusion of the field season the Project Lead NPS Lead Data Manager and GIS Specialist should meet to discuss the recent field season and to document any needed changes to the field
74. each panel The pairing process helped to minimize travel costs associated with sampling by an estimated 20 25 percent We abandoned that sampling plan in favor of the independent panel assignments described above because the pairing process could not be accommodated in our intended statistical analysis which we describe in Appendix 4 Example of Trend Analysis for the American Robin The panel design will be the same at MORA except that each panel will contain 10 transects two low four mid and four high elevation transects Because fewer transects will need to be surveyed at MORA than at NOCA or OLYM the crew members assigned to MORA along with the two roving crew members see Section 5A and Appendix 1 Roles and Responsibilities will spend the first 1 2 weeks of the field season each year surveying one of the two small parks D Recommended Number and Location of Sampling Units The survey design described above yields 72 transects in NOCA and OLYM each park will have 12 transects that are surveyed annually and 60 transects that are surveyed every 5 years At MORA where very little of the park lies in the low elevation stratum and the survey period will begin 7 to 10 days later than in the other large parks the survey design will yield 60 transects 10 that are surveyed annually and 50 that are surveyed every 5 years The locations of 72 transect starting points in NOCA and OLYM and 60 transect starting po
75. entering the backcountry on a field tour is to carry enough food to support each person for the duration of the tour Crew members should keep in mind that they will be working long days and hiking both on and off trail for much of the day during each day spent in the field Caloric requirements can be higher than usual At the same time space and weight is often at a premium and time for preparation may be limited Dinners typically are shared between crew members all other food typically is taken care of on an individual basis All food taken into the backcountry should be stored in bear proof food containers at all times SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points 45 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This SOP explains the procedures for establishing marking and relocating sampling points in the three large parks MORA NOCA and OLYM including completion of the Point Establishment Form and the Transect Visit Log Note that all data forms referred to in this SOP are at the end of the SOP Procedures for establishing marking and relocating sampling points in the small parks LEWI and SAJH differ somewhat and the differences are addressed in SOP 17 Spec
76. figure 4 Specific yearly information management tasks for this project and their timing are described in Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List Readers also may refer to each respective chapter section for additional guidance and instructions The stages of this cycle are described in greater depth in later sections of this chapter but can be briefly summarized as follows Preparation Training logistics planning print forms and maps Data acquisition Field trips to acquire data Data entry and processing Data entry and uploads into the working copy of the database GPS data processing etc Quality review Data are reviewed for quality and logical consistency Metadata Documentation of the year s data collection and results of the quality review Data certification Data are certified as complete for period of record Annual Project Information Cycle Figure 4 ldealized flow schematic of the cyclical stages of project information management from pre season preparation to season close out Note Quality assurance and documentation are thematic and not limited to any particular stage Data delivery Certified data and metadata are delivered for archival and upload to the master project database Data analysis Data are summarized and analyzed Product development Reports maps and other products are developed Product delivery Deliver reports and other products for posting and arc
77. for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center January 26 2005 USEPA National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory Corvalis OR Olsen A R 2005b Olympic National Park generalized random tessellation stratified GRTS survey design Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center January 26 2005 USEPA National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory Corvalis OR 198 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Olsen A R 2005c Mount Rainier National Park generalized random tessellation stratified GRTS survey design Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center January 26 2005 USEPA National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory Corvalis OR Olsen A R 2005d Review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 15 2005 Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Jenkins K Kuntz R C II Schaberl J Happe P and Boetsch J 2005 Draft study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network February 25 2005 A report in partial fulfillment of USGS cooperative agreement 03VVRAC0040 The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Siegel R B
78. for differences from zero based on the sample variance of the site specific slope estimates Because the samples are stratified by elevation with potentially different slope variances within strata the sample variance formula and associated degrees of freedom was carefully derived The mean of a stratified random sample is pooled based on the relative size of the strata 1 m res 1 y Ji N is the total number of available population units L is the number of strata N isthe number of population units in strata i and y isthe sample mean in strata i For our case y is the estimated slope parameter and L 3 for three elevation strata The variance of the stratified mean is Var y x Nar 2 i l The mean slope within a strata y is 8 b3 Y k jel k l 3 RO UL e 3 n where s isthe number of panels m is the number of sites from strata i in panel j n is the number of samples in strata i Assuming independence among slope estimates the variance of the mean slope within each strata is estimated as follows s Mj Var yx gt j l k l N n 1 Var y o N n i i 4 where Mm is the finite population factor which is likely to i be close to one in our case The slope estimates in the annual revisit panel are likely to have lower variance than the slope estimates from the rotating panel so we allow these variances to vary and esti
79. identify and correct for any substantial sources of variation in detectability to the extent that sample sizes allow For common species the analyst will model detection probabilities based on species detections amassed during the 5 year analysis period For rarer species it may be necessary to derive detection models using more extensive data sets that contain all NCCN landbird inventory and monitoring data gathered to date As of spring 2006 this amounts to more than 33 000 bird detections with distance estimates By having all data at his or her disposal the analyst retains the flexibility to test the effects of variables such as habitat year and observer on detection probability where sample sizes allow and develop the best possible detectability functions for rarer species 106 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network To import the inventory and monitoring data into Distance Tor detectability modeling first create a text file that contains all detection records for all species of interest if desired records for additional species may be left in the file as they will do no harm At a minimum the file should contain fields indicating the habitat group open or closed canopy survey point species 4 letter codes will be easiest to use and detection distance Other fields may be added if the analyst is interested in exploring additional possible covariates of detectability The rec
80. if existing financial and staffing constraints are relaxed and safety concerns can somehow be resolved the survey could be augmented with transects in the remote stratum We recognize however that our near term decision not to sample the remote stratum means that our inferences will be limited only to the areas of the parks that we have defined as accessible If visitor impacts which would likely be felt exclusively or primarily in the accessible areas increase over the life of the monitoring program it is conceivable that population trends for some species in the accessible stratum may differ from their trends in the remote stratum To address the issue of habitat diversity and complexity in the large parks we have selected an augmented serially alternating panel design Urquhart and others 1998 wherein one half of the annual survey effort will be devoted to surveying transects that are revisited annually while the remaining survey effort will be devoted to one of five panels of additional transects that will be sampled every 5 years A panel design with effort split between annually revisited transects and transects in the 5 year serially alternating panels allows a much larger number of transects hence greater representation of habitats and regions of the parks to be included in the sampling scheme than if each transect were to be revisited annually but still allows for a substantial amount of year to year
81. in the large parks during the current year In the abbreviated sample table below asterisks indicate species that were recorded only on rare bird detection forms The actual table will likely contain 70 100 records Common name Latin name Pileated Woodpecker Dryocopus pileatus Olive sided Flycatcher Contopus borealis Western Wood Pewee Contopus sordidulus Willow Flycatcher Empidonax trailii Hammond s Flycatcher Empidonax hammondii Pacific slope Flycatcher Empidonax difficilis SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 109 E Number of Individuals of Each Species Detected During Point Counts in the Large Parks and the Number of Transects on Which Each Species Was Detected Table 5 in the annual report should indicate the number of individuals of each species detected during point counts in the large parks and the number of transects on which each species was detected An abbreviated sample table is provided below The actual table will likely have 70 or more records Totals include all point counts not just the point counts that contribute to park specific and network density estimates The annual report also should include one or more tables and or bar graphs indicating the numbers of each species detected on the annual panel of transects only d Numher of transects vvith detections Number of individuals detected pecies MORA NOCA OLYM ALL MORA NOCA OLYM ALL Bald Eagle 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Chestnut backed Chickadee 8
82. landbird populations in the large wilderness units of the NCCN this program also monitors landbirds in two of the small units San Juan Island National Historical Park SAJH and Lewis and Clark National Historical Park LEWT Working in these small front country parks differs in many respects from working in the large parks but we have nevertheless tried to integrate them into the larger regional effort This protocol describes the ways in which data collection data analysis and reporting differ from the methods described for the large parks 1 Before the Field Season The project lead should coordinate with Resource Management Specialists at whichever small park is to be surveyed in the current year to make sure that local personnel are aware of the monitoring efforts and the likely survey dates Campsites or other accommodations for the field crews also need to be arranged Resource Management Specialists should be contacted at least 1 month prior to the survey 2 Data Collection SAJH and LEWI are to be surveyed by the NCCN landbird monitoring crew biennially in alternating years At this writing we expect that SAJH will be surveyed in odd years and LEWI will be surveyed in even years If additional funding and or personnel time become available either or both of the parks may be surveyed during their off years but not at the expense of conducting surveys during the regularly scheduled years The sampling design at SAJ
83. name Index key Data type Description Event ID primary FK text 50 Sampling event Elevation double Elevation of the location Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 14500 Elev_units text 2 Units for elevation data Default m Elev_source text 20 Source of elevation data Slope_deg int Slope steepness in degrees Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 184 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Aspect_deg int Dominant slope aspect in degrees corrected for declination Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 360 Or 1 Azimuth_to_point int Azimuth degrees declination corrected to the sampling point from the previous point to facilitate relocating the position 999 signifies points along the trail Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 360 Or 999 Direction_changed bit Indicates whether the azimuth to the point was changed to accommodate navigation Reason_for_change text 200 Brief comments about why the azimuth was changed Travel_notes text Comments about navigation to the point kept up to date as conditions change Location_desc text Environmental description of the sampling location tbl QA Results Quality assurance query results for the working data set Index Index columns pk tbl QA Results primary Query name Time frame Query result Query result Query type Query type Query name Query name Field name In
84. on current NPS formatting standards Annual reports will use the Natural Resource Report template and trend analysis and other peer reviewed technical reports will use the Natural Resource Technical Report template Instructions for acquiring a series number and other information about NPS publication standards are at http www nature nps gov publications NRPM index cfm In general the procedures for reports and publications are as follows 1 The document should be formatted using the NPS Natural Resource Publications template Formatting according to NPS standards is easiest when using the template from the very beginning as opposed to reformatting an existing document 2 The document should be peer reviewed at the appropriate level For example I amp M Annual Reports should be reviewed by other members of the appropriate project work group The Network Coordinator also will review all annual reports for completeness and compliance with I amp M standards and expectations 3 Upon completing the peer review acquire a publication series number from the NPS Technical Information Center or the appropriate local or regional key official currently the Regional I amp M Coordinator 4 Upload the file in PDF and Microsoft Word formats to the NCCN Digital Library submissions folder 5 Senda printout to each Park Curator 6 The Data Manager or a designee will create a bibliographic record and upload the PDF document to NatureB
85. parks 155 156 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 The plot cdf argument options may be entered individually or in any combination of the three possibilities For example if you want CDF plots for both by park and by elevation the call to BirdTrend would include plot cdf c Park Elev Note that c an R function for combine must be used if more than one option is specified The last argument plot outdir provides a directory location for the CDF plots Note that two final backslashes must be part of the directory location oie 33 ese sk k k K sk ee ok K K K Caution Some things to knovv about the CDF plots If the directory for plot outdir does not exist the program will terminate with an error produced by R indicating that the program was unable to produce the metafile If this happens check your plot outdir argument for typos or make sure that the directory you specified does exist The CDF plot files are given fixed names within the program The first time the program encounters a CDF plot file that already exists a new file name will be generated On subsequent runs however BirdTrend will overwrite CDF plot files that have been placed in the same directory unless the user has renamed the wmf files Either rename wmf files from previous runs or specify a new plot cdf directory for each run of BirdTrend If
86. point in time a spotted owl nest is observed at that monitoring station that nest cannot be mentioned or referred to in any report presentation data set or publication that will be shared outside NPS Do share All other information about the protected resource s may be freely shared so long as the information does not reveal details about the nature or specific location of the protected resource s that are not already readily available to the general public in some form for example other published material Species tallies and other types of data presentations that do not disclose the precise locations of protected resources may be shared unless by indicating the presence of the species the specific location also is revealed i e in the case of a small park Details for Specific Products Whenever products such as databases and reports are being generated handled and stored they should be created explicitly for one of the following purposes 1 Public or general use Intended for general distribution sharing with cooperators or posting to public websites They may be derived from products that contain sensitive information so long as the sensitive information is either removed or otherwise rendered in a manner consistent with other guidance in this document 2 Internal NPS use These are products that contain sensitive information and should be stored and distributed only in a manner that ensures their contin
87. read only access to these files except where information sensitivity may preclude general access NPS Data Store is a clearinghouse for natural resource data and metadata http science nature nps gov nrdata Only non sensitive information is posted to NPS Data Store Refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures for details 3NPS Director s Order 19 provides a schedule indicating the amount of time that the various kinds of records should be retained Available at http data2 itc nps gov npspolicy DOrders cfm Specific nstructions for Delivering Certified Data and Related Materials Data certification is a benchmark in the project information management process that indicates that 1 data are complete for the period of record 2 data have undergone and passed the quality assurance checks and 3 data are appropriately documented and in a condition for archiving posting and distribution as appropriate To ensure that only quality data are included in reports and other project deliverables the data certification step is an annual requirement for all tabular and spatial data For more information refer to SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification The following deliverables should be delivered as a package Certified working database Database in Microsoft Access format containing data for the current season that has been through the quality assurance checks documented in SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Cer
88. sample locations that are already present in the back end database This list is automatically filtered by the selected park upper left corner and to show only transect origins Filters can be changed at any time and records can be sorted by double clicking on the field label above each column pow s ansecronge Point setup 20061 03 4 2006 2006 Sep 05 12 17 Holmgren Mandy enfed 2006 Aug 31 14 56 Holmgren Mandy verified oov ense orar Point setup 2008 17 3u 20 _ aa T 2006 Sep 01 1040 Mandy fen ee E EE 15 006 Sep 01 12 13 omar Mandy enter om MN ILC 573 E 12 Jul 2006 18 Jul 2006 Clicking on the Add a sampling point button upper right corner will open the Point Establishment Form to a blank record To open an existing record for edits or to complete data entry click on the Point setup button associated with the desired record SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification Point Sampling Form travel feature 200702261 In the Data Gateway Form double click on the appropriate Transect point cell or on the Visit date cell to open the main data entry form This form has multiple tabs for entering the Transect Visit Log the Plot Revisit Form and the Point Count Conditions Form The main entry data form also has links for entering data from Point Count and Habitat Assessment Forms associated with the transect visit Data Entry
89. sampling protocols the working database application or to any of the SOPs associated with the protocol Refer to Section 3D Details for Taking Measurements for additional close out procedures not specifically related to project information management 5 Personnel Requirements and Training A Roles and Responsibilities Field operations for this program were designed to be staffed by an 8 person crew seven Field Technicians and one Field Lead In addition to collecting data alongside the other crew members the Field Lead will be principally responsible for training and testing the crew providing quality assurance trouble shooting logistical problems throughout the field season and preparing the end of season field report We anticipate the most efficient arrangement likely will be to assign a pair of observers to each large park and then have the Field Lead and the seventh Field Technician visit all parks as needed throughout the field season This roving pair of crew members will join the MORA crew in surveying one of the small parks each year For the first 5 years of this project it is anticipated that personnel at The Institute for Bird Populations will fulfill the roles of Project Lead and Data Analyst in close conjunction with the NPS Lead The Institute for Bird Populations also will provide a Field Lead and Field Technicians The NPS Lead will work closely with the Project Lead throughout the initial 5 years of moni
90. this exercise as well as an individual s pacing can change slightly from year to year 3 Estimating Distances A Estimating Distance to Seen Objects The Field Lead should begin training observers by placing flagging at 10 25 50 100 and 200 m from a central point and having observers estimate distances to trees rocks and flagging that are visible from the central point Distances should be estimated to the nearest meter observers must resist the tendency to round off estimates to the nearest 5 or 10 m As proficiency increases Field Technicians should begin estimating distances to other visible objects including birds that are not within the vicinity of the measured out flags Distances to birds should be estimated and measured as the horizontal distance only that is the distance to a bird in the canopy should be estimated as the distance to the location on the ground beneath the bird After estimating a distance Field Technicians should use pacing measuring tapes or laser rangefinders to determine the actual distance Both the estimated and actual distance should be recorded in a notebook so that Field Technicians can assess their own tendencies to overestimate or underestimate distances and thereby improve their estimates This exercise should be repeated many times over a period of days in various habitats and on flat ground as well as steeper slopes VVith practice Field Technicians should be able to estimate most d
91. transects The profile for each transect will consist of the temporal record of bird densities computed from point count results corrected for detectability For each species in each year the density estimate for a transect will be calculated as simply the average of the density estimates on the constituent points of the transect The transect profile will be summarized by the slope of the linear regression line between years and log transformed bird densities The transect slope estimates will be treated as replicate measurements of park specific trends and tested for differences from zero using a modified t test approach The proposed trend analysis approach assumers that the slope estimates are independent random samples from a population with a common mean The proposed analysis treats years as fixed effects which means that the analysis reveals trends over the specific years measured and does not discriminate random year effects or causes of year effects Although vve are interested in random year effects such as those due to vveather variation in long term data sets examination of such patterns is beyond the scope of this protocol and vvill require more in depth analysis vvith the assistance of statisticians Additional detail and an example of the trend analysis method prepared by TerraStat Consulting Group are included in Appendix 4 Example of Trend Analysis for American Robin After each 5 year round of sampling the summary repor
92. y pua4rpaig UNII pue oumu QF eu JOM eg Mou L 0 eq JIM 3ndjno yey Jo soureurums puodde o oureu o r Surnjsixo ue Ayr ds SULU YOIYM 4sIxo JOU soop l 170 KiDumuns porjroedg SUIUTE AA ss 8 uooq jou Axu s old jpo MMog pue A9 H 54 24 5 QUON 91e s rov ujog Jo A H 5 Jo uoneurquioo Aue 10 UON PICA pua4ppaig o j eo ur juoumng e p god yooyD MOpUIM I are sooroqo UUNI p yod qoy yndur JUUTE M kkk S UTULIEAA IossoooJdoud eu usnoug unio pue ssed 151 ou uio1j segueuo Aress u oui 1ossooodoud ou usnol 3ndur Jossooodoud v nr r unu ua4Ip4igo4Q 8 ssed NVZT se1eorput pue ndur y Ay poul 10sso204doud usnoug yndur uni jeu Sev Aress u oq 80155 1 51 o r 3ndur p yr ds AAOPULA 1 eseo d syooyo 10ssoooJdoud ssed jou prp vyep mdug JONAH eureu o r Mou e Ayr ds pua4 p4ig UNII pue oureu ISNIN sisrxo peoiJpe SISATEUE puan IO IJ edo s AAOPULA I mou jr edg sjsrxo o r edo s poryroedg MOMMA ce eureu o r Mou e Ayr ds pua4ppaig unio1 pue oumu ISNIN sistixo peoue sisA eue puan 10j mdmo AAOPULA I mou Ajr edg systxo opty 1 porjyroedg MONA se pua4rpaig UNII JOU soop oy jnduj AODUIA 4 pue eureu y v 151 jou soop 1ndur poerroedg MONA SUISSIU ST so
93. 0 Collecting GPS Data and in NCCN GPS Guidelines North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2006 Implement Working Database Copy Prior to the field season the Data Manager will implement a blank copy of the working database and ensure proper access on the part of the project staff Refer to Section 4C Overview of Database Design for additional information about the database design and implementation strategy C Overview of Database Design We maintain a customized relational database application to store and manipulate the data associated with this project The design of this database is consistent with NPS I amp M and NCCN standards see the data dictionary and other documentation in Appendix 7 Database Documentation The Data Manager is responsible for development and maintenance of the database including customization of data summarization and export routines The database is divided into two components one for entering editing and error checking data for the current season the working database copy and another that contains the complete set of certified data for the monitoring project the master project database A functional comparison of these two components is provided in table 3 Each of these components is based on an identical underlying data structure tables fields and relationships as documented in Appendix 7 Database Documentation The working database is implemented in
94. 003 Guidelines for long term monitoring protocols Wildlife Society Bulletin v 31 p 1000 1003 O Connor R J 1992 Population variation in relation to migrancy status in some North American birds in Hagan III J M and Johnson D W eds Ecology and conservation of neotropical migrant landbirds Washington D C Smithsonian Institution Press p 46 74 Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 Vegetation and landform database development study final report Pacific Meridian Resources Portland Peitz D G Fancy S G Thomas L P and Witcher B 2002 Bird monitoring protocol for Agate Fossil Beds National Monument Nebraska and Tallgrass Prairie National Preserve Kansas Prairie Cluster Prototype Monitoring Program National Park Service U S Department of the Interior Peterjohn B G and Sauer J R 1993 North American Breeding Bird Survey annual summary 1990 1991 Bird Populations v 1 p 1 15 Peterjohn B G Sauer J R and Robbins C S 1995 Population trends from North American breeding bird survey in Martin T E and Finch D M eds Ecology and management of Neotropical migratory birds New York Oxford Press p 3 39 Quinn J F and van Riper III C 1990 Design considerations for national park inventory databases in van Riper C and others eds Examples of resource inventory and monitoring in national parks of California Proceedings of the Third Biennial Conference on Research in Cali
95. 0154 0 0000104 Grand Mean All 68 0 0141 0 0000015 60 2 11 5 0 Cumulative Probability Cumulative Probability 0 6 0 8 1 0 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 0 4 Elevation strata low middle high eu MN MEE F T T i 0 15 0 10 0 05 0 0 0 05 0 10 0 15 Order Statistics Habitat sparse p 7 dense T T T T T T T 0 15 0 10 0 05 0 0 0 05 0 10 0 15 Order Statistics Figure 4 Empirical Cumulative Distribution plots of estimated slopes for simulated AMRO example Appendix 4 145 146 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page intentionally left blank Appendix 5 147 Appendix 5 Simulation Methods Used to Estimate Power to Detect Trends in 22 Representative Avian Species in Olympic National Park Based Upon the Proposed Augmented Serially Alternating Panel Design n 72 Transects Parameter estimates are based on Distance sampling of 22 avian species collected across 82 transects in Olympic National Park in 2002 03 by The Institute for Bird Populations Siegel and others 2004 Detailed methods are available in a report from TerraStat Consulting Group TerraStat Consulting Group 2005 Protocols for analyzing and reporting trends in avian abundance in NCCN parks Task 2 Report Unpublished Report available from USGS 600 E Park Avenue Port Angeles WA 98362 An abbreviated d
96. 1 Cooperative agreement between National Park Service North Cascades National Park Complex The Institute for Bird Populations and Western Washington University National Park Service agreement number H9471011196 Rolph B Kuntz R C II Siegel R B and McLaughlin J 2001 Modification No cooperative agreement between National Park Service North Cascades National Park Complex The Institute for Bird Populations and Western Washington University National Park Service agreement number H9471011196 Rolph B Kuntz R C II Siegel R B and McLaughlin J 2002 Modification No 2 cooperative agreement between National Park Service North Cascades National Park Complex The Institute for Bird Populations and Western Washington University National Park Service agreement number H9471011196 Rolph B Kuntz R C II Siegel R B and McLaughlin J 2003 Modification No 4 cooperative agreement between National Park Service North Cascades National Park Complex The Institute for Bird Populations and Western Washington University National Park Service agreement number H9471011196 Rolph B Kuntz R C II Siegel R B and McLaughlin J 2004 Modification No 5 cooperative agreement between National Park Service North Cascades National Park Complex The Institute for Bird Populations and Western Washington University National Park Service agreement number H9471011196 Rolph B Kuntz R C II S
97. 10 9 27 18 20 16 54 Wilson s Warbler 1 2 1 4 2 4 1 7 Dark eyed Junco 6 7 7 20 9 11 13 33 F Transect Survey History at the Large Parks Through the Current Year Appendix 1 of the annual report should provide a detailed survey history of each transect surveyed to date An abbreviated sample table is provided belovv The actual table should include a record for each transect that has ever been surveyed Panel Elevation Numher of points completed Park Transect membership class 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 MORA 1 Lovv 4001 10 10 8 9 10 10 MORA 1 Medium 4015 10 10 10 10 10 10 MORA Alt2 High 4017 10 0 0 0 0 10 MORA AIt3 High 4018 0 8 0 0 0 0 NOCA 1 Lovv 1017 10 10 9 10 10 10 NOCA 1 Lovv 1020 10 10 10 0 10 10 NOCA Alt2 Medium 1032 10 0 0 0 0 10 NOCA AIt3 High 1045 0 12 0 0 0 0 OLYM Annl Low 3100 10 10 10 10 10 10 OLYM Annl High 3150 0 10 10 10 10 10 110 G Reporting Results for Small Parks For whichever small park was surveyed in the year of interest the report should List any points that were not surveyed and explain why they were missed Provide the number of individuals detected and the number of points with detections for each species detected during point counts in the small park that was surveyed in the current year A sample table structure is provided below Number of Number of points e Species is individuals vvith detections detected VVinter VVren 36 45
98. 1995 Effects of forest practices on wildlife in Beschta R P and others eds Cumulative effects of forest practices in Oregon literature and synthesis Corvallis Oregon Oregon State University Hansen A J McComb W C Vega R Raphael M G and Hunter M 1995 Bird habitat relationships in natural and managed forests in the west cascades of Oregon Ecological Applications v 5 p 555 569 Huff M H Agee J K and Manuwal D A 1985 Post fire succession of avifauna in the Olympic Mountains Washington in Lotan J E and Brown J K eds Proceedings fire s effect on wildlife habitat USDA Forest Service General Technical Report INT 186 p 8 15 Hutto R L and Young J S 2002 Regional landbird monitoring perspectives from the Northern Rocky Mountains Wildlife Society Bulletin v 31 p 738 750 Jenkins K Beirne K and Seaman D E 2000 Inventory and monitoring of breeding land birds in Olympic National Park preliminary results 1999 annual report Port Angeles Washington U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Olympic Field Station Lewis M G and Sharpe F A 1987 Birding in the San Juan Islands Seattle Washington The Mountaineers Manley P N Zielinski W J Schlesinger M D and Mori S R 2004 Evaluation of a multiple species approach to monitoring species at the ecoregional scale Ecological Applications v 14 p 296 310 24 Landbir
99. 2 NPS Data Store is a clearinghouse for natural resource data and metadata http science nature nps gov nrdata Only non sensitive information is posted to NPS Data Store For details refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures 3 NatureBib is the NPS bibliographic database http www nature nps gov nrbib index htm This application has the capability of storing and providing public access to image data for example PDF files associated with each record NPS Director s Order 19 provides a schedule indicating the amount of time that the various kinds of records should be retained Available at http www nps gov refdesk DOrders DOrder19 html 138 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank Appendix 4 139 Appendix 4 Example of Trend Analysis for the American Robin Provided by A Shelly and T Cardoso TerraStat Consulting Group Seattle This section provides a simulated example of a complete trend analysis for one species AMRO for the augmented serially alternating panel design The example is based on current planned methods which may be subject to minor modifications in the next phase of method development Planned Analysis Methods We hypothesize an equal average slope on the exponential scale For each transect the density will be natural log transformed after adding 1 to account for zeros The sample mean slope is tested
100. 3g Locations missing establishment dates 19 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3h Locations loc status inconsistencies 21 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3i Locations unclassified new points 543 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3j Locations loc type and loc code inconsistent 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 3k Location illogical dates 0 03 29 2006 16 57 qa 31 Locations without coordinates 6 03 29 2006 16 57 na 3m larcatians without field coords 21 03 29 2006 16 57 Stratum record updated date prior to created date Missing site code park code or stratum ID Park code inconsistent vvith strata table Duplicate records on site code and park code Established or rejected sites without evaluation codes Missing site status retired sites without discontinued dates discontinue Discontinued date prior to establishment date or updated date prior to cr Active sites without a panel type Missing site name no remedy required Missing site ID except where loc type incidental location code loca Park code inconsistent with sites table Duplicate records on site ID and loc code Duplicate records on site ID and loc name Duplicate records on loc name and park code Location type lt gt origin and missing an event or event is null and featur Locations with sampling events or field coordinates or discontinued date Missing loc status sampled locations with loc status rejected or prop Newly sampled locations with an undetermined location type location_ty Locations where loc co
101. 4 amp y1 snoidpa amp uydg Joyonsdeg s uosurer TA popiooesnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN lq ssoq popiooosnoN OMI s s ds up yy s st oT popiooosnoN oW A1OJUDAUT gI mad uo amp o p 214422 Ioys yury poyog Kuud dI K1ojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT nHnu snfna snaoudsp ag purqsuruumng snojny popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooosnoN K1ogueAud gI nHV njn jaig odore popiooosnoN popiooosnoN qq ssoq Alo WoAUT gg QHNV puup pr qSururumu s puuy popiooownoN popiooosnoN KiojueAu dgI Aloyuoauy gI K1ojueAud gI MSVA ixnpa panjavyy YA s XneA pepiooownoN pepioossnoN oed lq ssoq K1ojuoAu d dg MASTE sapiojasd amp y IAS 420194 owy awy owy AIOWWOAUTg gI INOO 4ounu s n puoy 00011102 popiooesnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN 9 qtssoq popiooownoN OMSN SNIIpvID snyosay IMO PYM MES UYON elM1 9 zWUOIN zINA10 V20N 19909 s rs d snu uoululo9 panujuoj oman sapeose pue 38802 UHON 3y l aq Ajay s l ds psig 1 ayqey 4 Training Observers SOP 3 ATOWOAUT gI popiooownoN Y e qrssoqd popioooswnoN VAHH si p1u2pi220 Dnoi0puaq ISJIM VUH PLIQAH 19 q1e A KrojuoAu dgI om ory popiooosnoN HMHL 1290 x Ipuasumo DoiDpuaq VWH 8 K1ojuoAu dgI KxojuoA
102. 7 Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 Field_offset_azimuth int Azimuth degrees declination corrected from the coordinates to the target Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 360 Field_coord_source indexed text 12 Field coordinate data source GPS file name text 50 GPS rover file used for data dovvnloads GPS model text 25 Make and model of GPS unit used to collect field coordinates Source map scale text 16 Approximate scale of the source map Source citation text 250 Name and date of the source map Target UTME double Target UTM easting zone 10N Target UTMN double Target UTM northing zone 10N Target datum text 5 Target coordinate datum Default NAD83 Coordinate notes text Notes about this set of coordinates Coord created date datetime Time stamp for record creation Default Now Coord updated indexed datetime Date of the last update to this record Coord updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits Detectability Parameters Detection parameters for each species and detection class Index columns Index Park code Park code Detectability Parameters primary Analysis years Park code Taxon ID Detection class Field name Index key Data type Description Analysis years primary text 20 Range of years for which the results apply Park code primary text 4 Park code Detection class primary text 20 Detection category Date calculated datetime Date on vvhich the detection
103. ATOWWOAUT gI popiooownoN YOON SNULAINDI SnA407 AOI UIOISOMYIION AIOWWOAUTY dI popiooosnoN Koyunda gI K1oguoAu d dI KiojuoAu d dI WONWV so youdyudqyopaq 1440 MOID U OLIGUIV popiooosnoN K1ojuoAu dgI Y Koud 41 ANTO 2 SJJ popiooosnoN e qrssoqd popiooosnoN SH D21440fi 2 pulosojaydy Ke f qniogS U19 S9AA KioquoAu d dI popiooo noN K1ogueAu d dI KiojuoAu d dI KroquoAu d dI VELS 14211245 punooup4 Kef s INS XTOYU AULd1 AIOWWOAUT gI AJOJUOAUT dI Sisuappupo n2a1081424 Keg Aero popiooownoN POPIODOYION popioooswnoN 2 415504 AIOWOAUT gI 1444 n22DA1 O 0241A O9IIA KxoqueAu d dI K1oguoAu d dI KiojuoAu d gI K1oquoAu d dI K1oguoAu d dI TAVA snaps 0241A O9JIA Sul QI6AA Ao u Au 4 41 AIOWOAUT YI awy KiogueAu d II Koyunda gI IANH 1uogmy 0241A O HA S UOgnH popiooownoN KiojueAud gI popiooownoN Koyunu gI IAVO MUISSDI 0241A O HA SUISSE popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoq e qissoqd 1 D211424 SNUUDAKT pllqsury u19 s9AA popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN oe T41 snununu xpuopidurg logojeo ISLIT popiooo noN popioooesnoN popiooownoN awy HdVS DADS STULOKDS q ouq s Aeg KiojueAu d dI KiojueAu dgI Koyunu GI K1ojueAu d gI KiojueAu dgI sd sipoyfi
104. Agency Western Ecology Division Corvallis we selected the sample of monitoring transects in each park from the candidate points using the Generalized Random Tessellation Stratified GRTS sampling method with reverse hierarchical ordering Stevens and Olsen 1999 2003 2004 We selected 24 transects in each elevation stratum in each park except for the low elevation stratum at MORA where we selected only 12 transects due to the relatively small fraction of the park that lies within the stratum boundaries GRTS sampling methods are increasingly being adopted for large scale environmental monitoring programs in part because they can create a spatially balanced sampling design that allows additional samples to be added or subtracted without compromising the spatial balance Stevens and Olsen 2003 2004 C Sampling Frequency and Replication In NOCA and OLYM the survey will have an augmented serially alternating panel design table 1 wherein one panel of 12 transects in each large park will be visited once every year An additional 60 transects will be distributed into five serially alternating panels of 12 transects Each year all 12 transects in one of the alternating panels will be visited in addition to the panel that is revisited annually Each of the six sampling panels includes four low four mid and four high elevation transects We assigned transects to sampling panels according to their order in the GRTS sample For ex
105. Arranged by date for images not taken at transects Images acquired from other sources C Downloading and Processing Procedures and storage of originals l Note For additional information about the project workspace 2 refer to SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records Management Folder Naming Standards 3 In all cases folder names should follow these guidelines No spaces or special characters in the folder name Use the underbar _ character to separate words in folder names Try to limit folder names to 20 characters or fewer Dates within folder names should be formatted as YYYYMMDD for better sorting Transect names typically are a 4 character string for example 3140 B Image Acquisition Capture images at an appropriate resolution that balances space limitations with the intended use of the images Although photographs taken to facilitate future navigation to the site do not need to be stored at the same resolution as those that may be used to indicate gross environmental change at the site it may be more efficient to capture all images at the same resolution initially A recommended minimum raw resolution is 1600 x 1200 pixels approximately 2 megapixels Download the raw unedited images from the camera into the appropriate Processing folder Rename the images according to convention refer to the section Image File Naming Standards If image file names were noted on the field data form
106. By March 15 Data Analysis Section 4H SOP 16 Note The tasks in this section occur every 5 years Export Distance input file from database Data Analyst February March Import into Distance to model detectability functions Data Analyst February March and estimate density by species and detection class Export and reformat Distance output for import into Data Analyst February March database and BirdTrend analytical tool Assign variance groups to transects Data Analyst February March Iterative revision of variance groups as needed to Data Analyst February March provide sufficient data for each variance group Export park specific trends and density estimates for Data Analyst February March each species import into database Appendix 2 135 Project stage Task description Responsibility Timing Reporting amp Product Development Section 4I SOPs 16 and 19 Export automated summary queries and reports from database Data Analyst February March Produce park wide and transect specific map output for archives GIS Specialist January March Generate report quality map output for reports GIS Specialist February March Acquire the proper report template from the NPS website create annual report Data Analyst and Project Lead February April Screen all reports and data products for sensitive information SOP 19 Project Lead and NPS Lead
107. CA We have found birding at MORA which includes very little low elevation landmass to be rather unproductive during the first 3 weeks of May In this SOP we enumerate 12 primary topics that need to be covered during the training session and provide some guidance on effective ways of presenting them 1 Identification of Birds by Sight and Sound For this monitoring program to produce meaningful results all observers must be fully competent at identifying NCCN landbirds by sight and sound See table at the end of this SOP for lists of bird species likely to be encountered at each NCCN park Ensuring that Field Technicians are fully competent by the end of the training session is a process that must begin well before the training session Every effort must be made to recruit and hire observers who are already proficient or nearly proficient at identifying NCCN species by sight and sound or who are proficient at identifying birds from other regions by sight and sound and can demonstrate an enthusiasm and ability to quickly learn to identify new species see SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season No matter how well executed the training session is most observers who do not have substantial birding experience will not be adequately prepared to conduct point counts by the end of the training session Soon after being hired Field Technicians should be sent species lists and other training materials and be urged to begin preparing themsel
108. CDF plots are created they will appear on the screen in a R graphics window Only the final plot will remain visible when the program has completed running 2 sk k sk sk sk sk sk ok KK K K K K K K K Example call to BirdTrend gt BirdTrendV 1 1 infile C myfiles birdfiles testcaseclean csv outfile C myfiles birdfiles testresfull txt slopes out C myfiles birdfiles testslopefull txt summary out C myfiles birdfiles testsummaryfull txt plot cdf c Park Elev plot outdir C myfiles birdfiles Most of the errors that can result from a call to BirdTrend have to do with the function arguments Table A6 6 contains a complete list of the possible errors warnings and notes that can result from a call to BirdTrend The main output file OUTFILE txt from BirdTrend is a tab delimited ASCII file For the best viewing of this file open it using the file open command in MSExcel specifying that the file is tab delimited Table A6 7 displays an example of the unformatted output for one species with three parks Limited formatting by the user should provide report ready tables Header information provides the input file name a date time stamp and the sampled years represented in the input file Output by species and park follows Within each park the number of non zero transects is reported along with mean slopes and variance estimates for each variance group Mean slope and variance estimates for e
109. Form Park OLYM Transect 3001 Date 5 28 2006 Observers Observer Commens Assignment i Next site Point sampling form Point count data Habitat data Transect visit log Short point form coordinates Point count conditions m ee a Lore qas ona Features Metos Hans 50 m the W We only ran the NW arm for ain started just after 5th point cut morning short We had difficulty getting satellites for part of the transect especially point NVV03 when getting to it initially which is why that point is off by about 50 m Did not realize this until after so a Wildlife phenology with food in bill BDOW from point NWO03 3 AMROs mobbing a STJ a family of VV VVRs with fiedglings observations Nest observations irem mam a qe umen En Ce om a p S 070107 Entered 08 31 2006 10 17 Entered by Holmgren Mandy QA motes Updated 10 09 2006 10 32 aly a r k Verifies 83172006 Vid by Holmgren Mandy Logistics notes 85 86 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Upon finishing data entry for each plot the database entries should be compared against the original field forms Most of the data entry screens in particular the Data Entry Form the Point Count Form and the Rare Bird Observation Form have fields for storing miscellaneo
110. Generated the t test p value testing if the mean of the N slope estimates is significantly different from zero Note that the degrees of freedom for the t test are determined by the Satterthwaite formula 10 Repeated steps 3 9 for two additional sampling scenarios 11 Repeated steps 1 10 for 1 000 simulations 12 Estimated the statistical power as the percent of the 1 000 trials with two tailed p values less than 0 10 References Cited Siegel R B Wilkerson R L and Hall S 2004 Landbird inventory for Olympic National Park 2002 2003 The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA TerraStat Consulting Group 2005 Protocols for analyzing and reporting trends in avian abundance in NCCN parks Task 2 Report Available from USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Olympic Field Station Port Angeles Washington 148 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page intentionally left blank Appendix 6 149 Appendix 6 BirdTrend 1 1 Users Manual Appendix 6 BirdTrend 1 1 User s Manual Prepared by TerraStat Consulting Group 29 March 2006 Introduction BirdTrend 1 1 is a software application that has been developed specifically for the analysis of trends in avian densities in three large NCCN parks The program is design specific and is not intended for analysis of trends for other applications The program is run in R version 2 2 1 a free st
111. H and LEWI differs substantially from that of the large parks Rather than arraying points along transects that start from randomly selected points along the trails we have overlaid the two small parks including both American Camp and British Camp at SAH and Fort Clatsop Sunset Beach Cape Disappointment and Dismal Nitch at LEWI with a systematic grid of points 350 m apart This grid based approach yields 53 survey points at SAJH and 91 survey points at LEWI Due to the relatively small number of points and frequently sunny weather during the survey period the survey at SAJH should be completed easily by a 2 person crew working for a 7 day work tour even including travel time to and from the island and a day for familiarization with the area If at all possible SAJH should be surveyed during the first work tour after training is completed this coincides approximately with the last week in May If for some reason SAJH cannot be surveyed during this work tour it may be delayed slightly but should be completed no later than June 21 Delaying the survey any longer may bias the results as many bird species sing less frequently as the summer progresses At LEWI where the sampling points are more numerous and rain during the breeding season is much more frequent completing all intended survey points will be more difficult After the completion of our 2006 pilot season at LEWI we will revisit the sampling design and possibly reduce t
112. Kremsater L L and Wells R W 1997 Likely consequences of forest management on terrestrial forest dwelling vertebrates in Oregon Report M 7 of the Centre for Applied Conservation Biology University of British Columbia Burnham K P and Anderson D R 1998 Model Selection and Inference A practical information theoretic approach Springer New York Coonan T J Austin G and Dye L C 2001 Landbird monitoring 1995 2000 annual report Technical Report 2001 03 Ventura California Channel Islands National Park Cordell H K and Herbert N G 2002 The popularity of birding is still growing Birding v Feb p 54 61 Cordell H K Herbert N G and Pandolfi F 1999 The growing popularity of birding in the United States Birding v 3 p 168 176 Croze H 1982 Monitoring within and outside protected areas in McNeeley J A and Miller K R eds National parks conservation and development the roles of protected areas in sustaining society Proceedings of the World Congress on National Parks Washington D C Smithsonian Institution Press p 628 633 DeSante D F and George T L 1994 Population trends in the landbirds of western North America in Jehl Jr J R and Johnson N K eds A century of avifaunal change in western North America Studies in Avian Biology no 15 p 173 190 Droege S 1990 The North American Breeding Bird Survey in Sauer J R and Droege S eds Surve
113. Microsoft Access to permit greater flexibility when implementing on computers with limited or unreliable network access The master database is implemented in Microsof SQL Server to take advantage of the backup and transaction logging capabilities of this enterprise database software 14 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Table 3 vvorking database copy Functional comparison of the master project database and the updated front end database should be copied from the project workspace to the workstation hard drive EN Working Master The functional components for data entry Projet databasa f nctions and apab l s database database into the working database are described in Software platform for back end data MS Access MS SQL Server The Contains full list of sampling locations and taxa X X flow of data entry generally should proceed as Portable for remote data entry X follows Forms for entering and editing current year data X 1 Point establishment form Quality assurance and data validation tools X X 2 Transect visit log Preliminary data summarization capabilities X ae Full analysis summarization and export tools X 3 Point count conditions Pre formatted report output X 4 Point count data Contains certified data for all observation years X Limited editing capabilities edits are logged X 5 Habitat classification Full automated backups and tran
114. N dno15 1 posuer ou JO parjioads QUO o peusisse aq ATWO JIM 32esueJ ueAIS v Aq E1ouor IMO dnoI3 oouermA ouo ULY 9JOui seu 7 722suD4 7 OSURI JUUL AA kkk jndur oy woy SUISSTUI SI gyep jeu ojeorpur Aeur sy sjoued Sunejor EYEp SUISSTUL JO SIeo 9JOUI 10 IUO SUIARY o np snon ryuo jou sIVdA AYM IMO aavy Aew 3ndu snon nuo Jou 2 402 10 SEIA M kkk S UTULIEAA uoneja1d ro3u OJ UPM Sess y 1002 LT p nunuo 9v 1491 0203014 SUNONUON NOON Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 162 qq ssod y sdnoss souerre JUIIOJJIP OJUT soosuey oy 80011145 pueuruooo1 s1eo 5 sroquinu Furka Ayuslu lq ssod ji dnoi ooueumA 8001145 pueuruooow 0 0 8 v ul sjoesueJ 1oujo ULY s1eo p jdures Jo JoquINU YM sjoesuej surejuoo dno13 oouermA enprAIput ue JT IMO sey dnosjiv dnod8 souevle A ur JIUL ouo jseo TV O10 Nx sexe A An ds r syoosuen p ydures 1eo pue OM IY 10 euo sdnoi ooueteA O s oued Surjo1 oy Suds pueururoood JO SIKIA MALY YLI spoued om pue Jo s1eo om goto spoued om ojduexo sI29 p jdures yo 1equinu owes oy urejuoo qq ssod y dno13 ovuenea Sumiyds AIIP pI IIA oued qoeo roued Su
115. ORT 2002 Species AMRO AMRO AMRO AMRO WIWA WIWA WIWA WIWA Park OLYM NOCA MORA Combined OLYM NOCA MORA Combined Mean Density 0 220 0 280 0 080 0 20 0 260 0 030 0 020 0 150 SE 0 066 0 063 0 040 0 039 0 145 0 028 0 015 0 076 Appendix 6 February 27 2007 163 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 164 sx1ed Jre Je SU TPA T Te 3 poydures st soloads e U VA poje1ouos ATUO s yp ms pourquio lqe euo ul s r ds ydninui 10J senisuop pu dde awieu Sunsixo ue Ay ds gyep JO YOM S Jeo ouo uo suni A UO ureJ8odq JossoooJdoud eu usnoug unio pue ssed 3s11j ou uio1j segueuqo Amess u oui 1ossooodoud ou uSnoug 1ndur Uny pua4rpaigo4q Yno ssed NV TO sapu 1901 Aress uv y Surssiui 51 o r 3ndur porjyroedg eureu AY Mou g AH ds jsn sistxo peoj e o r odos indino JOU soop l Ndug sosessoul ureJ3oJd 310da1 o pesn eureu o ry 1 puooes SutsstjA eureu e qe1 dyno Surtssrq eureu jndur SUSSI 2211 AOPUYA 31 ANODULA 21 31 AOPUYAL 21 AOPUYAL 21 21 ANODULA 31 AOPUYA 21 OL yued ouo 1seo ye 10 5 SUOTEA T 991 utu 1949 esne2oq s i d 10 po1e1ouoS jou sem 5 Ajrsuop p ulquo H and3no Aisu p r
116. Park code LEVVP or SAJH Sharing Sensitive Information Note Refer to SOP 20 Product Posting and Distribution for a more complete description of how to post and distribute products and to keep a log of data requests No sensitive information information about the specific nature or location of protected resources may be posted to the NPS Data Store or another publicly accessible website or otherwise shared or distributed outside NPS without a confidentiality agreement between NPS and the agency organization or person s with whom the sensitive information is to be shared Only products that are intended for public general use may be posted to public websites and clearinghouses these may not contain sensitive information Responding to Data Requests If requests for distribution of products containing sensitive information are initiated by the NPS by another Federal agency or by another partner organization for example a research scientist at a university the unedited product the full data set that includes sensitive information may only be shared after a confidentiality agreement is established between NPS and the agency organization or person s with whom the sensitive information is to be shared All data requests will be tracked according to procedures in SOP 20 Product Posting and Distribution Once a confidentiality agreement is in place products containing sensitive information may be shared following th
117. Probability Plots are used to check the normality assumption of the error term or residuals Click Normal Probability Plots to output the normal probability plot Click OK The test results and outputted scatterplots will be placed onto your spreadsheet Suggested table formats for reporting results from the small parks are provided in SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 118 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page intentionally left blank SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications 119 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Overview This document provides details on the process of submitting completed data sets reports and other project deliverables Prior to submitting digital products files should be named according to the naming conventions appropriate to each product type see below for general naming conventions All digital file submissions that are sent by email should be accompanied by a product submission form which briefly captures the following information about the products Submission date Name of the person submitting the product s Name and file format of each product ndication of whether or no
118. QO 84 WO J 65 1 JEJIQE H SP uqpue NOON YETQEH ANd 393Sue p SOP 8 Reporting Rare Bird Detections 65 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 8 Reporting Rare Bird Detections Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This SOP gives step by step instructions for reporting rare or incidental bird detections using the Rare Bird Report Form which is provided at the end of this SOP All species having a code of anything other than TBPInventory on the NCCN Bird Species List table 1 in SOP 3 Training Observers require a Rare Bird Report Form to be completed upon detection Observers should familiarize themselves with this list before the start of the field season Note Some of the species requiring Rare Bird Report Forms are not truly rare within the parks they are just rarely detected with morning point counts for example owls Rare birds require report forms if they are detected in an NCCN park anytime during the field season including during point counts during the pre season training session and during days off Complete the fields on the Rare Bird Report Form as follows Park Enter LEWI MORA NOCA OLYM or SAJH Date Date of the observation in mm dd yyyy format Time Time of the observation in 24 hour format Obs
119. Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Overview This document covers photographic images collected by project staff or volunteers during the course of conducting project related activities Images that are acquired by other means for example downloaded from a website or those taken by a cooperating researcher are not project records and should be handled separately Care should be taken to distinguish data photographs from incidental or opportunistic photographs taken by project staff Data photographs are those taken for at least one of the following reasons To document a particular feature or perspective for the purpose of site relocation To capture site habitat characteristics and possibly to indicate gross structural changes over time To document a species detection that also is recorded in the data Data photographs are linked to specific records within the database and are stored in a manner that permits the preservation of those database links Other photographs for example of field crew members at work or photographs showing the morphology or behavior of certain bird species also may be retained but are not necessarily linked with database records Effectively managing hundreds of photographic images requires a consistent method for downloading naming editing and documenting The general process for managing data photographs proceeds
120. Selecting Detectability Parameters At the end of every 5 year interval we will conduct a complete analysis of factors influencing the detectability of birds and will develop detectability models to be used in estimating density of birds from raw counts The data analyst should use the most recently available version of the free software program Distance Thomas and others 2005 available at http www ruwpa st and ac uk distance to model detectability and estimate density of NCCN landbirds This SOP provides some guidelines for analyzing the NCCN landbird data in Distance but explaining in detail how to use the software or providing a primer on analytical techniques associated with distance sampling is beyond the scope of this SOP Distance includes a user friendly interface and a user s manual that explains how to use the software The user s manual assumes that the user is already familiar with distance sampling concepts and statistics Data analysts seeking help with the analytical aspects of distance sampling should consult Buckland and others 2001 and Buckland and others 2004 for a discussion of more advanced topics Numerous factors may influence detectability including species habitat observer year and perhaps other variables Some of these factors are likely to vary over time or space and therefore must be accounted for before density can be estimated and trends in density can be assessed Data analysis should
121. The Mountaineers Seattle National Geographic 1987 Field Guide to Birds of North America 3rd Edition National Geographic VVashington D C Pofar J and MacKinnon A eds 1994 Plants of the Pacific Northvvest Coast Lone Pine Publishing Vancouver Sibley D A 2003 The Sibley field guide to birds of western North America Alfred A Knopf New York Smith M R Mattocks P W Jr and Cassidy K M 1997 Breeding birds of Washington State Volume 4 in Cassidy K M Grue C E Smith M R and Dvornich K M eds Washington State Gap Analysis Final Report Audubon Society Publications in Zoology No 1 Seattle 3 Scheduling Field Work The Field Lead should consult with each park liaison to develop a general schedule for conducting the bird surveys prior to beginning the training Point counts surveys should begin no sooner than May 29 at MORA and May 22 at the four other parks Surveys should be completed by July 31 in the large parks and by June 21 in SAJH and LEWI which are entirely at low elevations By sampling the Network s low elevation sites first then the mid elevation sites and finally the high elevation sites crews can ensure that sampling coincides with the peak of breeding activity for most species within each elevation zone However a limited amount of flexibility in scheduling is permissible for example it may be appropriate to sample the first high elevation transect during the same back
122. a and renaming the file s Description of Point Provide any additional notes that might assist subsequent observers in confirming that they are in the right location Permanent Marker Information See Section 4 Installing Permanent Markers of this SOP 4 Installing Permanent Markers Follow the instructions below when installing a permanent marker at an origin point or the first off trail point count station on either half of the transect No other point count stations should receive permanent markers If there are trees within 20 m of the point use an aluminum tag to mark the nearest tree or another nearby tree if for some reason a nearby tree is more prominent than the nearest tree Use a nail to inscribe the tag with the following information e 4 character park code I amp M example NOCA I amp M Bird Mon Transect number T O for transect origin for example 4035T O or transect number direction of travel point number for point count stations for example 4035SS01 Today s date mm dd yyyy Then use a permanent marker pen to write the same information again on the other side of the tag Nail the tag to the back side of the tree you selected being sure to fold the tag so it juts out perpendicularly from the trunk leaving both the inscribed label and the permanent marker label visible If there are no trees within 20 m of the origin point use a plastic ground stake to mark the
123. acking database Name and affiliation of requestor Request date Nature of request Responder Response date Nature of response List of specific data sets and products sent if any All official FOIA requests will be handled according to NPS policy The NPS Lead will work with the Data Manager and the park FOIA representative s of the park s for which the request applies Special Procedures for Sensitive Information Products that have been identified upon delivery by the Project Lead and or NPS Lead as containing sensitive information will normally be revised into a form that does not disclose the locations of protected resources most often by removing specific coordinates and only providing coordinates that include a random offset to indicate the general locality of the occurrence If this kind of measure is not a sufficient safeguard given the nature of the product or the protected resource in question the product s will be withheld from posting and distribution If requests for distribution of the unedited version of products are initiated by the NPS by another Federal agency or by another partner organization for example a research scientist at a university the unedited product for example the full data set that includes sensitive information may only be shared after a confidentiality agreement is established between NPS and the agency organization or person s with whom the sensitive information is
124. ading up to and including the present year Note BirdTrendAnnualDensity module of BirdTrend can perform these calculations taking into account the appropriate weighting of each transect Mean density Mean density Mean density Mean density Park Year Park Yea birds ha SE birds ha SE MORA 2007 0 10 0 006 OLYM 2007 0 10 0 006 MORA 2008 0 11 0 005 OLYM 2008 0 11 0 005 MORA 2009 0 11 0 004 OLYM 2009 0 11 0 004 MORA 2010 0 12 0 006 OLYM 2010 0 12 0 006 MORA 2011 0 10 0 005 OLYM 2011 0 10 0 005 NOCA 2007 0 10 0 006 Combined 2007 0 10 0 006 NOCA 2008 0 11 0 005 Combined 2008 0 11 0 005 NOCA 2009 0 11 0 004 Combined 2009 0 11 0 004 NOCA 2010 0 12 0 006 Combined 2010 0 12 0 006 NOCA 2011 0 10 0 005 Combined 2011 0 10 0 005 K Summary Trend Results for Species With Adequate Data for Density Estimation and Trend Assessment The 5 year report should summarize trend results from BirdTrend for species with adequate data for density estimation and trend assessment An abbreviated sample table is provided below Note BirdTrend produces this summary table Number of Mean Variance 2 tailed Species Years Park non zero of of df t stat p value transects slope slope AMRO 2007 16 OLYM 72 0 022 0 00035 38 26 1 1976 0 238 NOCA 72 0 018 0 000157 45 54 1 4181 0 163 MORA 60 0 043 0 000808 20 99 1 522 0 142 Combined 204 0 030 0 000133 146 83 2 3328 0 021 WIWA 2007 16 OLYM 72 0 098 0 00038 47 62 5 0157 0 NOCA 72 0 088 0 000317 50
125. am which certifies that they can competently identify by sight and sound all species they are expected to encounter during the field season 20 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 6 Operational Requirements A Annual Workload and Field Schedule Preparation for the field season must begin well in advance of the pre season training session Appendix 2 provides a Yearly Project Task List that identifies each task by project stage indicates who is responsible and establishes the timing for its execution We recommend beginning the process of recruiting and hiring qualified crew members no later than December of the preceding year Crew training should begin between May 1 and May 7 Point count surveys should begin no sooner than May 22 The sampling design assumes that in NOCA and OLYM two observers will work together to survey 24 transects and in MORA a pair of observers will work together to sample 20 transects plus survey one of the small parks A fourth pair of roving observers will assist with the small park survey and then spend the remainder of the season assisting in any or all of the three large parks wherever help is needed We recommend providing observers with a 3 day break after each 7 day tour conducting fieldwork Depending on hiking distances weather and geographic proximity of the transects to one another observers should be able to complete 2 4 trans
126. ample transects 1 4 in each elevation stratum were assigned to panel 1 transects 5 8 in each elevation stratum were assigned to panel 2 and so on until transects 21 24 in each elevation stratum were assigned to panel 6 This process produced six sampling panels each comprising a spatially balanced sample of independent sampling units At each park we assigned panel as the annual panel unless there were compelling reasons to assign panel 2 as the annual panel based on a better dispersion of sampling transects in panel 2 Table 1 2 Sampling Design 7 Proposed panel design for landbird monitoring at North Cascades and Olympic National Parks Panel 1 includes 12 transects that will be sampled annually whereas the other five panels each contain 12 transects that will be surveyed every 5 years on a rotating schedule The panel design will be the same for MORA except that each panel will contain 10 transects rather than 12 Number of transects to be surveyed Panel Year 1 Year 2 Year3 Year4 Year5 Year6 Year7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 1 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 2 12 g E 12 z 3 12 2 12 z 4 z 12 M 2 E 12 B 5 z 2 2 12 z 12 6 12 2 E 12 Initially we proposed to assign transects to sampling panels as pairs of nearest neighbor transects using a systematic process to ensure that the assignment of pairs of transects to panels produced a spatially balanced sample within
127. andbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork natural area parks Mount Rainier MORA and Olympic OLYM National Parks North Cascades National Park Service Complex NOCA and four small historic cultural parks Ebey s Landing National Historical Reserve EBLA Lewis and Clark National Historical Park LEWI Fort Vancouver National Historical Park FOVA and San Juan Island National Historical Park SAJH The protocol reflects decisions made by the NCCN avian monitoring group which includes NPS representatives from each of the large parks in the Network as well as personnel from the U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center USGS FRESC Olympic Field Station and The Institute for Bird Populations at meetings held between 2000 Siegel and Kuntz 2000 and 2005 The protocol narrative describes the monitoring program in relatively broad terms and its structure and content adhere to the outline and recommendations developed by Oakley and others 2003 and adopted by NPS Finer details of the methodology are addressed in a set of standard operating procedures SOPs that accompany the protocol narrative We also provide appendixes containing additional supporting materials that do not clearly belong in either the protocol narrative or the standard operating procedures 1 Background and Objectives A Background and History Reported declines of many Neotropical
128. anning and logistics Over time the NPS may assume control over hiring and staffing the field crew Regardless if the Field Lead is to be a seasonal employee rather than year round staff member then the Field Lead recruiting process should begin in late November or early December of the preceding year Qualities to seek in potential Field Leads include the following Proficiency at identifying western landbirds by sight and sound Bird survey experience preferably conducting point counts with distance estimation Substantial backcountry orienteering and backpacking experience High level of physical fitness Familiarity with one or more of the NCCN parks Familiarity with NCCN plant communities Leadership experience Strong organizational skills Ability to get along well with others in a field crew setting Knowledge of or preferably certification in wilderness first aid Possession of a reliable vehicle If at all possible priority consideration should be given to previous years Field Leads or Field Technicians to maximize year to year consistency in field operations and methods Once selected the Field Lead especially if new should review all relevant sections of the protocol and discuss any questions with the Project Lead B Hiring the Field Technicians Recruitment of the rest of the field crew should begin by late December of the preceding year As with hiring the Field Lead initiating the recruitment pro
129. anopy cover of overstory vegetation 22 m in height for the PMR habitat type under consideration Percent canopy cover ranges on the data form include 11 40 41 70 and 71 100 If the estimated canopy cover is less than 11 percent leave all canopy cover fields blank 62 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Tree Size Class em Place an X in the field that Refe rence Cited contains the largest tree size class dbh in cm for the PMR habitat under consideration Tree size class ranges include lt 23 cm 23 53 cm 54 81 cm Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 Vegetation and landform 81 122 cm and gt 122 cm database development study final report Pacific Meridian Resources Portland Oregon Notes Provide any comments or notes needed to elaborate on the classification of the habitat within 50 m of the survey point SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation 63 Table 1 PMR habitats in each of the North Coast and Cascade Network parks Most habitat categories come from Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 but a few were developed as part of separate habitat classification efforts LEWI and SAJH PMR habitat name 57 NOCA OLYM MORA SAJH LEWI habitat code Alaska Yellow cedar ALYC Yes Yes Yes No No Beach BEAH No No No Yes Yes Big Leaf Maple BIGM Yes Yes No No No Black Cottonwood BLCO Yes No No No No Conifer Deciduous Mix CODM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Devel
130. assigned the result of 1 2 to an object named foo Type foo and the contents of foo 3 are printed on the screen Many functions are included in the base R package and they can also be created by the user Functions are called by typing the name of the function then supplying the appropriate input arguments within a set of parenthesis For example vectors of data are created using the function c as follows gt foo2 c 1 2 3 4 5 gt foo2 Other useful R tips e The escape key deletes the text written after the current prompt e The up arrow key copies the previous command to the current prompt multiple up arrows scroll through the existing commands If enter is hit before a function is completed with a close parenthesis a plus sign appears on the next line and the user can complete the command escape voids the whole command e Directory locations must be specified with double backslashes such as C birds birdfile It is possible to run commands as a batch in R by opening a script file file new script and typing your commands in the script editor To run all commands in the script use edit run all To run selected lines use edit run line or selection or use the icon on the displayed toolbar BirdTrend 1 1 consists of three main functions PreBirdTrend BirdTrendAnnualDensity and BirdTrend The user opens R makes the functions resident in the current working directory and runs the f
131. ast and Cascades Netvvor 4 Field Season Reporti ng Clear documentation and explanation of any diversions from established protocols The Field Lead should prepare a brief report to the Discussion of any interesting or potentially important Project Lead generally not more than three pages that observations about the parks bird communities that includes the following may have been noted during the field season for Clear enumeration of which transects were completed example apparent changes in phenology from previous during the season years or notable changes in apparent abundance of Description of any logistic difficulties that arose and particular species explanation of how they were addressed Suggestions for improving the training session or field season logistics in the future SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification 95 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Overview This document describes the procedures for validation and certification of data in the working project database Refer also to protocol narrative Section 4C Overview of Database Design Section 4E Quality Review and Section 4G Data Certification and Delivery for related guidance and a clarification o
132. at San Juan Island National Historical Park crt e en ett a hte da ERR RC AYA das Figure 3 Map showing location of point count survey stations at Lewis and Clark National Historical Park cett tette a ua yasda aaa A Rd Figure 4 Idealized flow schematic of the cyclical stages of project information management from pre season preparation to season close out Tables Table 1 Proposed panel design for landbird monitoring at North Cascades and Olympic National Parks cent nm Table 2 Estimated power of serially augmented panel design n 72 transects to detect a simulated 4 percent per annum exponential increase in 22 representative landbird species in Olympic National Park after 10 20 and 30 years of monitoring Xr en Bode pA REM saad aa seas Table 3 Functional comparison of the master project database and the working database COPY edet sete xe s maa lli Table 4 Annual budget for implementing landbird monitoring in the North Coast and Cascades Network eh Ro eI Eq Rd Table 5 Five year data analysis budget for determining trends in North Coast and Cascades Ne v rk salsa Re Conversion Factors Multiply By To obtain centimeter cm 0 3937 inch in kilometer km 0 6214 mile mi meter m 3 281 foot ft Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork By Rodney B Siegell Rob
133. at has not accounted for annual differences in avian detectability to be analyzed at the end of each 5 year interval A brief Discussion section that highlights and interprets any notable findings such as detections of unexpected species factors such as unusual weather patterns that might have affected results or unexpectedly large changes in raw detection counts obtained from the annual panel An Acknowledgements section thanking individuals who contributed to the field season or the report Standard Report Format Annual reports and trend analysis reports will use the NPS Natural Resource Publications template a pre formatted Microsoft Word template document based on current NPS formatting standards Annual reports will use the Natural Resource Report template and trend analysis and other peer reviewed technical reports will use the Natural Resource Technical Report template These templates and documentation of the NPS publication standards are available at http www nature nps gov publications NRPM index cfm In addition to the material recommended for the annual reports the 5 year reports also should include the following tables SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 111 J Estimated Annual Density of Each Species in Each Large Park and in All Three Parks Combined The 5 year reports should provide the estimated density bird ha of each species at each large park and at all three parks combined during each year le
134. ata Tables page on the form can be used to open the table directly for viewing and editing as needed 100 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Quality Assurance Review Form Cu 7 Results Summary View and Fix Query Results Browse data tables Table fo Features 7 ata ba pleas ba fhe pdt 1 date and updated by fields if they are present in the table mi Feature ID Location ID Featuretype Feature dese Distance m Feature n 20060126154148 10005176 0673523 3128 523 seen from po 2 downed trees on top of each other 20060126154148 100306808 948517 3122 VVVVO6 travel feature dried up stream bed sharp turn in trail x 20060126154148 101900339 126587 3126 SVV04 travel feature madrone grove 165 20060126154148 104477941 989899 3134 SVVO5 travel feature Beginning of uphill part 10 20060126154148 105189085 006714 4005 SE01 seen from po 1 huge Western redcedar tree 8 20060126154148 105338335 037231 3128 EE04 travel feature open sparsely vegetated area 150 20060126154148 107122898 101807 4005 TO travel feature beginning of pulloff 2 20060126154148 107996821 403503 3126 SVV01 seen from po 2 large DOF s on either side of trail 15 20060126154148 111695110 797882 3134 SWO6 Huge Douglas fir 8 20060126154148 112080156 803131 3134 9W02 travel feature another creek 150 20060126154148 113767266 273499 3134
135. ate check in review and posting of data metadata reports and other products to national databases and clearinghouses according to schedule Maintain and update database application Provide database training as needed Role Responsibilities Name Position NPS Lead Project oversight and administration Bob Kuntz Wildlife Biologist Track project objectives budget requirements and progress toward project NOCA objectives Facilitate communications between NPS and cooperator s Coordinate and ratify changes to protocol Assist in training field crews Assist in performing data summaries and analysis assist interpretation and report preparation Review annual reports and other project deliverables for completeness and compliance with Inventory and Monitoring Program specifications Maintain and archive project records Project Lead Project operations and implementation Rodney Siegel Research Certify each season s data for quality and completeness Scientist IBP and Bob Complete reports metadata and other products according to schedule Wilkerson Biologist IBP Data Analyst Perform data summaries and analysis assist interpretation and report preparation Field Lead Train and ensure safety of field crew IBP Field Biologist Plan and execute field visits Acquire and maintain field equipment Oversee data collection and entry verify accurate data transcription into database Complete a field season report Technicians Col
136. ation Marker Comments Height Above Ground cm Offset Dist m Offset Bearing 52 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbirds Point Revisit Form Park Transect Date Observer Point Type circle one Origin Survey Visit Type Circle One 7 Coordinate Source circle one Map GPS GPS Model GPS file name Fasting Northing GPS Error m Datum Point Type circle one Origin Survey Visit Type Circle One Coordinate Source circle one Map GPS GPS Model GPS file name Easting Northing GPS Error m Datum Point Type circle one Origin Survey Visit Type Circle One 7 Coordinate Source circle one Map GPS GPS Model GPS file name Fasting Northing GPS Error m Datum Point Type circle one Origin Survey Visit Type Circle One 7 1811 Coordinate Source circle one Map GPS GPS Model GPS file name Fasting Northing GPS Error m Datum Fi Point Type circle one Origin Survey Visit Type Circle One T Coordinate Source circle one Map GPS GPS Model GPS file name Easting Northing GPS Error m Datum 53 Aq pamaiaay s3urf3p yq yu i sSurpseN s334 Surppng umouyun ouo adeIS SunsoN 1621020 Aq p tppdn s ull p lH JWSINYSSUIPSON s334 Surppung xouyun ouo
137. atistical analysis software package available online For more information on R see the website http www r project org This user s manual describes how to download and create data directories in R how to prepare the input file how to run the BirdTrend program and how to interpret the output of BirdTrend Note that Version 1 1 is an incremental update that incorporates some new functionality not included in the original Version 1 0 program suite BirdTrend 1 1 provides e Summary of input data files by species and park Annual density estimates o Output includes average densities and corresponding standard errors for each species by park and combined parks e Complete statistical trend analysis o Output includes average trend and variance estimates for elevation strata park and combined parks e Cumulative Distribution plots displaying trend slope distributions by park and or elevation stratum Downloading R and preparing data directories Instructions as of 3 06 minor changes may occur To download R go to the website http www r project org and find the closest CRAN mirror website from which to obtain the software by clicking on the icon below the Getting Started heading Click on the selected mirror on the mirror index page Click on the appropriate version of R BirdTrend has been set up for the Windows version but it should run on other versions as well Click on the base directory then on R 2 2 win32 ex
138. ault 1 Constraint gt 0 And lt 200 Nest activity indexed text 20 Type of nesting activity observed Default no nest observed Rare obs notes text Comments about this observation Appendix 7 185 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 tbl Results Trend results for each species Index Index columns Park code Park code pk Results primary Analysis years Park code Taxon ID Species code Species code Field name Index key Data type Description Analysis years primary text 20 Range of years for which the results apply Park code primary text 4 Park code Species code indexed text 20 Species code Num nonzero sites int Number of sites where the taxon was detected Mean_slope double Mean trend slope for the taxon Var_mean_slope double Variance of the mean trend slope Deg_freedom double Degrees of freedom T_stat double t statistic P_value double P value Taxon_ID primary FK text 50 Taxon record in the taxonomic lookup table tbl Sample Periods The span of dates during which data collection occurs Index Index columns Period_updated Period_updated pk_tbl_Sample_Periods primary Period_ID Protocol_version Protocol_version Start_date Start_date Field name Index key Data type Description Period_ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each sample period Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Start_date indexed datetime Start date of the
139. ave been surveyed previously complete the Point Establishment Form only if the following circumstances arise 48 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork a n the field if all or part of an established transect has become inaccessible due to some change a landslide for example since the time the transect was last visited it is necessary to re route the transect b You believe that you are not at the location where the previous observer conducted the point count and for whatever reason you are unable to get to that location You wish to correct or improve upon the previous observer s description of the point or the travel features see explanation of the Point Establishment Form below When surveying points that have been surveyed previously and none of the three conditions above applies it is not necessary to complete a full Point Establishment Form rather a Point Revisit Form which is simply an abbreviated version of the Point Establishment Form may be completed Note Each field on the Point Revisit Form should be completed according to the instructions for the corresponding field on the Point Establishment Form The Point Establishment Form Should be completed as follows Park Enter LEWI MORA NOCA OLYM or SAJH Transect Enter the 4 digit transect number Date Enter the date as mm dd yyyy Observer Enter the first and last name of the Observer
140. aversable and the other is not follow the traversable one for the remainder of the transect If neither direction is traversable assess the directions defined by the original direction 907 in the same manner as described above ii Follow this new direction of travel for the duration of the transect unless another impassable barrier is encountered in which case follow the above methods again to determine another new direction of travel Regardless of how many times the direction of travel must be changed all points along the half transect will be named according to the original direction of travel the one followed to reach the first point from the transect origin When establishing a new transect both observers must be careful to ensure they do not allow their separate halves of the transect to overlap with one another Observers should examine the topographic map and coordinate with one another in planning their intended travel routes before beginning the transect All survey points must be placed at least 200 m from one another Observers should stop conducting point counts when another point count cannot be completed before 3 5 hours after sunrise 2 Relocating an Existing Transect A Day Before Conducting Point Counts As when establishing a new transect observers should find the transect origin point the afternoon prior to conducting the point count survey If the origin point was marked in a previous year and can be rel
141. ay from the access routes For each large park we started with GIS coverages of roads and trails and then eliminated segments of roads or trails that were inappropriate for drawing starting points for sampling transects These eliminated segments were along roads in steep areas where off road sampling would not be possible paralleled shorelines of large lakes or reservoirs where one half the points would be in open water or were along roads that were too wide and or busy with traffic to allow for safe or meaningful sampling We then defined potential starting points for transects every 50 m along the remaining segments of roads and trails We used GIS data to classify the transects as low mid or high elevation strata based on the elevation of the starting points For NOCA and OLYM we defined the low elevation stratum as all potential transects with starting points less than 650 m above sea level the mid elevation stratum as all potential transects with starting points between and including 650 and 1 350 m above sea level and the high elevation stratum as all potential transects with starting points greater than 1 350 m above sea level For MORA only we adjusted the boundary between the low and mid elevation strata to 800 m as virtually none of the park is less than 650 m above sea level but otherwise defined the elevation strata in the same manner as for the other parks With assistance from Tony Olsen U S Environmental Protection
142. be safely navigated and a very imprecise statement of the target population We opted for a precise definition of the sampled population as areas within km of a road or trail Doing so enhances safety and sample size hence power and minimizes costs and logistical problems associated with finding plots In our judgment the premium on safety costs and trend detection will greatly enhance the likelihood that this project will persist over a temporal scale of decades rather than years 2 Sampling Design 5 Although we will conduct our point counts off trail transects will start from selected on trail points and run perpendicularly away from the trails Extending transects from trails will greatly facilitate relocating survey points in successive years as starting points will be much easier to find even without the aid of GPS than would starting points that were hundreds or even thousands of meters off trail in large undifferentiated tracts of forest Thus crews will expend less time searching for starting points which will be marked in a visually unobtrusive manner and consistently will be able to find the starting points which will mean they are able to find the remaining points along the transects with a much greater level of accuracy Under current budgetary and logistical constraints sampling the remote stratum would incur excessive opportunity costs and safety risks for little if any real benefit In the future
143. can begin within 10 minutes of official sunrise Determining Direction of Travel VVhen Establishing a Nevv Transect The direction of travel from the transect origin to the first point count station in each direction should be determined as follovvs a Using a topographic map and a ruler rotate the ruler around the origin point until the ruler intersects the trail at a distance of 200 m from the origin point Mark this 200 m linear intersection from the origin point on both lengths of the trail If this segment of trail is straight then simply mark the points that are 200 m up trail and 200 m down trail from the origin If the trail bends or turns however mark points instead that are 200 m from the origin as the crow flies b Place the ruler on the map with the edge touching both of the 200 m intersections and draw a line between the two points now known as the perpendicular line c Place the edge of the ruler on the origin point and rotate the ruler until it forms a right angle with the newly drawn perpendicular line Hold the ruler at this right angle and draw a line on the map along the edge of the ruler this is the direction of travel indicator line d The direction of off trail travel is the cardinal or semi cardinal direction NN NE EE SE SS SW WW or NW that most closely matches the travel indicator line drawn on the map The direction of travel selected will determine the name of t
144. cates the taxonomic resolution and certainty represented by this record Default specific Taxon notes text General notes about the taxon Created date datetime Time stamp for record creation Default Now Updated date datetime Date of the last update to this record Updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits Taxon is active bit Indicates that the record is currently available for data entry pick lists Default True Record status indexed text 16 Indicates the status of the record in terms of synchrony with master databases Default new record Rec status notes text 255 Notes about the disposition of the record Project taxon notes text Project specific comments about the taxon AOU number text 5 AOU number assigned to bird taxa tlu Site Status List of status codes for sampling stations standard Field name Index key Data type Description Site status primary text 10 Site status desc text 200 Sort order tinyint tlu Source Scale List of common map scales associated with maps and imagery standard Field name Index key Data type Description Source scale primary text 16 Source scale desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Taxon Category List of taxonomic categories standard Field name Index key Data type Description Category primary text 20 Category desc text 100 NPSpp ID int Sort order tinyint tlu Taxon Rec Status List of status codes for taxon records standa
145. ce map however there is a GPS file name a field horizontal error or GPS model filled in to suggest that the source is GPS SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification 97 Query_name Returns records meeting the following criteria qa_4f_Coordinates_final_UTM_inconsistencies Final UTM coordinates are incomplete or they are present and the coordinate type or datum is missing or coordinate type or an estimated error value is present and the coordinates are missing qa_4g_Coordinates_public_UTM_inconsistencies Public UTM coordinates are incomplete or they are present and the public coordinate type is missing or public coordinate type or public coordinate scale is present and the public coordinates are missing qa_4h_Coordinates_illogical_dates Coordinates with updated dates before creation dates qa_4i_Coordinates_target_coord_inconsistencies Target UTM coordinates are incomplete or they are present and the target datum is missing qa_4j_Coordinates_without_final_or_public_coords For GIS specialist records missing final UTMs and or public coordinates qa 5a Sample period errors Missing start or end dates start date time after end date time or updated dates prior to created dates qa 6a Events missing critical info Missing location ID project code or start date qa 6b Events duplicates on location Duplicate records on location ID also shows how many records exi
146. ce only certified finalized versions of data sets should be shared with others The NPS Lead will handle all data requests as follows Discuss the request with other Park Biologists as necessary to make those with a need to know aware of the request and if necessary to work together on a response Notify the Data Manager of the request if s he is needed to facilitate fulfilling the request in some manner Respond to the request in an official email or memo In the response refer the requestor to the NPS Data Store http science nature nps gov nrdata so they may download the necessary data and or metadata If the request can not be fulfilled in that manner either because the data products have not been posted yet or because the requested data include sensitive information work with the Data Manager to discuss options for fulfilling the request directly for example burning data to CD or DVD Ordinarily only certified data sets should be shared outside NPS If the request is for a document it is recommended that documents be converted to PDF format prior to distributing it If the request is for data that may reveal the location of protected resources refer to the section in this document about sensitive information and also to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures 7 After responding provide the following information to the Data Manager who will maintain a log of all requests in the NCCN Project Tr
147. cess early is critical for ensuring that well qualified candidates are available Although the Field Technicians do not need to have the same level of experience nor all required skills as the Field Lead similar general qualities should be sought Proficiency at identifying western landbirds by sight and sound If a full pre season training session is planned see SOP 3 Training Observers then this requirement may be relaxed slightly Successful candidates should at least be nearly proficient at identifying NCCN landbirds by sight and sound or be proficient at identifying landbirds of other regions by sight and sound and be able to demonstrate enthusiasm and ability to learn to identify new species e High level of physical fitness Ability to get along well with others in a field crew setting Bird survey experience preferably conducting point counts with distance sampling If a full training session is planned this requirement can be eliminated However experience with some kind of formal data collection is still highly desirable 28 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Backpacking experience and proficiency at backcountry orienteering The orienteering requirement may be waived if orienteering will be emphasized during training Familiarity with one or more of the NCCN parks desirable but not required Familiarity with NCCN plant communities desirable
148. ciated with it To avoid unplanned edits to the document reset the document to read only by right clicking on the document in Windows Explorer and checking the appropriate box in the Properties popup Inform the Data Manager so the new version number s can be incorporated into the project metadata As appropriate create PDF files of the versioned documents to post to the internet and share with others These PDF files should have the same name and be made from the versioned copy of the file 7 Post the versioned copies of revised documents to the NCCN Digital Library and forward copies to all individuals who had been using a previous version of the affected document Example of Document Revision SOP 2 Records Mgmt doc is revised on October 31 2008 and circulated for review Changes are accepted by the group and changes are finalized on November 6 2008 The revised SOP is a b o Copied into the Archive folder That versioned copy is renamed as SOP 2 Records Mgmt_20081106 doc Both the current primary version and the versioned copy are set to read only A PDF of the document is created from the versioned copy and named SOP_2_Records_ Mgmt 20081 106 pdf Both the PDF and the versioned document are uploaded to the NCCN Digital Library The PDF is sent to any cooperators Appendix 1 Roles and Responsibilities Appendix 1 131 Facilit
149. come proficient at determining their own location as well as traveling to a distant unseen destination using only a compass and topographic map These skills should be practiced until all observers are proficient 36 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 7 Recording Data Field Technicians must be instructed how to complete each of the data forms and have an opportunity to practice completing them during training so that questions can arise and be resolved before official data collection begins 8 Conducting Transects Once all constituent skills have been practiced observers should conduct practice transects in small groups Working in groups allows crew members to standardize the assessment of safe versus unsafe terrain and test against one another their accuracy of pacing and following a compass bearing 9 First Aid Safety and Emergency Procedures Pairs of crew members will work together for up to a week at a time in remote rugged areas of the large parks with a substantial portion of each day spent working off trail It is therefore essential that everyone to the extent possible be prepared for emergency situations Although providing full scale training in wilderness first aid is beyond the scope of the landbird monitoring training program we recommend at least requiring the crew to read and discuss in detail a simple wilderness first aid booklet prior to beginning
150. continuity Breidt and Fuller 1999 Urquhart and Kincaid 1999 McDonald 2003 To optimize allocation of effort while maintaining sample size requirements we have chosen to visit survey points no more than once each year Although some studies recommend resampling points in a season to account for missed detections and seasonal effects Ralph and Scott 1981 other researchers have suggested that increasing the number of points sampled rather than the number of visits to a point can be more efficient under some conditions Smith and others 1995 At an avian sampling workshop held at North Cascades National Park Service Complex in September 2000 avian sampling experts reached consensus in recommending that we sample more locations at the expense of resampling points throughout a breeding season Siegel and Kuntz 2000 6 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Small Park Sampling Scheme We will sample landbird populations in the small parks from a series of point counts distributed as a systematic grid established in the N S and E W directions with a random grid starting point Each grid point will be 350 m apart yielding 54 points at SAJH including 38 points at American Camp and 16 points at British Camp and 91 points at LEWI including 33 points at Fort Clatsop 5 points at Sunset Beach 4 points at Clark s Dismal Nitch and 49 points at Cape Disappointment Our intention is to
151. country trip in which the last mid elevation transects are sampled if this would result in saving substantial travel time and snow cover at the site is minimal As a general tule survey locations should be nearly free of snow cover before they are surveyed Unpredictable weather precludes the scheduling of sampling events to specific annual dates as point counts cannot be conducted in the rain Prior to the start of the field season transect location maps and directions for all transects in the annual panel and the appropriate alternating panel in the large parks should be SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season 29 printed and studied along with field maps for the appropriate small park The Field Lead should plan the optimal order to sample the necessary transects in each park even though unpredictable weather may require that the plan be revised during the field season Knowledgeable park personnel should be consulted as to whether any bridges have been washed out or especially heavy snowpack or other factors might alter the accessibility of any transects To maximize efficiency we recommend that field crews work a schedule of approximately 7 days working and then 3 days off This will allow time for two 7 day tours in each elevation stratum at each large park except for MORA where only one 7 day tour will be available to survey low elevation transects 4 Additional Miscellaneous Tasks to Complete Before Field Season I
152. covariate rather than attempting a completely separate analysis for each observer Buckland and others 2001 2004 When data are insufficient to assess variation among observers we will pool data from multiple observers to model detectability For the more common species it may be possible to model observer specific detectability functions at least for some observers in some habitats When this is possible we will do so and use an information theoretic approach Akaike 1973 Burnham and Anderson 1998 to determine whether observer specific models are preferable to pooled observer models Unless we discover substantial temporal changes or observer effects in detectability pooled observer models may include data from all years of the survey as well as data collected during the avian inventory projects conducted between 2001 and 2004 Siegel and others 2002 2004a 2004b Wilkerson and others 2005 using a similar field methodology For some rarer species we may never gather enough data to even test for year or observer effects in such cases we may simply use the pooled observer models For all species we will use the data at our disposal to construct the best possible detectability functions accounting for all sources of variation in detectability to the extent that the data permit Trend Detection Park specific trends will be assessed for each species using a profile summary approach for the repeated measurements on
153. d Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Manu val D A 1991 Spring bird communities in the southern VVashington Cascade Range in Ruggiero L F Aubry K B Carey A B and Huff M H eds VVildlife and vegetation of unmanaged Douglas fir forests USDA Forest Service Pacific Northvvest Research Station General Technical Report PNVV GTR 285 p 160 174 McDonald T L 2003 Review of environmental monitoring methods survey designs Environmental Monitoring and Assessment v 85 p 277 292 Meslow E C and Wight H M 1975 Avifauna and succession in Douglas fir forests of the Pacific Northwest in Smith D R ed Proceedings of the Symposium on Management of Forest and Rangeland Habitats for Non Game Birds USDA Forest Service General Technical Report WO 1 p 266 271 National Park Service 2005 Reporting Guidelines USDI National Park Service website at http www nature nps gov publications NRPM index cfm Accessed January 25 2007 Nelson J T and Fancy S G 1999 A test of the variable circular plot method when exact density of a bird population was known Pacific Conservation Biology v 5 p 139 143 North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2006 GPS Guidelines USDI National Park Service website at http www 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm Accessed January 25 2007 Oakley K L Thomas L P and Fancy S G 2
154. d Type List of coordinate types standard Field name Index key Datatype Description Coord_type primary text 20 Coord_type_desc text 100 Sort_order tinyint tlu Datum List of coordinate datum codes standard Field name Index key Data type Description Datumprimary text 5 Datum desc text 50 Sort order tinyint tlu Edit Type List of the types of post certification edits made to data standard Field name Index key Data type Description Edit type primary text 12 Edit type desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Elevation Source List of elevation data source codes template Field name Index key Datatype Description Elev source primary text 20 Elev source desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Evaluation Status List of evaluation codes for sample sites template Field name Index key Datatype Description Eval code primary text 2 Eval status text 20 Eval status desc text 100 Sort order tinyint NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol tlu Feature Type List of feature types used for site relocation Field name Index key Data type Description Feature_type primary text 16 Sort_order tinyint tlu GPS Model List of GPS devices used to collect coordinate data template Field name Index key Data type Description GPS model primary text 25 Sort order tinyint tlu Tmage Format List of image formats template Field name Ind
155. d role in writing the draft study plan and making revision to the plan after peer review IBP with the help of the NCCN landbird monitoring workgroup completed a draft study plan in 2004 The USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center conducted peer review of the study plan in March 2005 The study plan was reviewed by six biologists environmental statisticians and or environmental monitoring specialists Coonan 2005 Courbois 2005 Geissler 2005 Fancy 2005 Olsen 2005d Stevens 2005 A response was drafted to address the review comments Jenkins and others 2005 and a revised final study plan was completed in April 2005 Siegel and others 2005 In 2004 Dr Jenkins began collaborating with the TerraStat Consulting Group to provide statistical support in developing a landbird monitoring protocol for the NCCN Through a series of meetings and completed reports TerraStat Consulting Group provided recommendations on how to analyze and report trends in avian density from data that would result from the sampling design recommended by the NCCN avian monitoring group TerraStat Consulting Group 2004 TerraStat consultants evaluated the power of trend detection resulting from the preferred sampling design and prepared computer algorithms for computing densities and trends in densities TerraStat Consulting Group 2005a as well as a step by step handbook for conducting the analyses described in this protocol TerraStat Consulting G
156. de TO and loc type lt gt origin or vice versa or Discontinued date prior to establishment date or updated date prior to cr Locations without coordinates l acatians that have samnlina events hiit no field coordinates nna remeciv Upon double clicking a particular query name the second page will open up to show the results from that query Quality Assurance Review Form Results Summary View and Fix Query Results Browse data tables Query name PORDEGEERIEETUEEEDEREAE _Design view Username Query Established or rejected sites without evaluation codes description details Q results SiteID Site code Site name Park code Stratum ID Evaluation code Evaluation note Sif k 20060126112748 212330937 385559 4013 20060126112748 606938242 912292 4041 20060126112748 834396362 304688 4051 20060329165806 709037899 97 1008 MORA Medium discarded discarded discarded rejec rejec relec SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification 99 A switch in the upper right corner allows the user to put the form in either view mode default or edit mode Upon changing to edit mode the form changes color to provide a visual reminder that edits are possible At this point the query results may be modified and the remedy details may be entered in the appropriate place If certain records in a query result set are not to be fixed for whatever reason this also is the place to documen
157. de data sheets Review each other s sheets for missing or incorrectly recorded data make any needed corrections and discuss any interesting or surprising bird detections SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points 51 NCCN Landbirds Point Establishment Form Park Transect Point Bearing to Point Coordinate Source circle one Map Elevation Source circle one Altimeter GPS Model Point Type circle one Change of Direction Y N Elevation circle units m ft Easting Northing Travel Feature 1 Date Observer Origin Surve Visit Type circle one First Return i T ype viis Visit Reason Slope at Point GPS Map Aspect at Point GPS File Name GPS Error m Datum Distance from previous point Travel Feature 2 Distance from previous point Travel Feature 3 Distance from previous point Travel Feature 4 Distance from previous point Notes regarding travel between points Photo Frame Description File name Conspicuous features seen from point Description Distance m Bearing Frame Description Distance m Bearing Frame Distance m Frame Description Description of Point Bearing Permanent Marker Information Marker Number Install Date Removal Date Marker Type Marker Substrate Marker Location Inform
158. de is then documented and included in the metadata and certification report The queries are named and numbered hierarchically so that high order data for example from tables on the parent side of a parent child relationship such as sample locations should be fixed before low order data for example individual species observations The rationale for this is that one change in a high order table affects many downstream records and so proceeding in this fashion is the most efficient way to isolate and treat errors In addition to these automated checks the person performing the quality review should remain vigilant for errors or omissions that may not be caught by the automated queries Another task that cannot be automated is the process of ensuring that all data for the current season are entered into the database This will often involve manual comparisons between field forms or other lists of the sites visited and the results of queries showing the sites for which data exist The Data Manager also is available as needed to help construct new database queries or modify existing ones as needed 96 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Query name Returns records meeting the following criteria qa la Strata missing critical info Missing park code project code stratification date stratum name stratum definition qa 16 Strata illogical dates Stratum record updat
159. dex key Data type Description Query name primary text 100 Name of the quality assurance query Query type indexed text 20 Severity of data errors being trapped 1 critical 2 warning 3 information Query_result indexed text 50 Query result as the number of records returned the last time the query was run Query_run_time datetime Run time of the query results Query_description text Description of the query Query_expression text Evaluation expression built into the query Remedy_desc text Details about actions taken and or not taken to resolve errors Remedy_date datetime When the remedy description was last edited QA user text 50 Name of the person doing quality assurance Time frame primary text 30 Field season year or range of dates for the data being passed through quality assurance checks Rare Bird Obs Rare species observations Index Index columns Event ID Event ID Nest activity Nest activity Obs distance m Obs distance m pk Rare Bird Obs primary Rare bird obs ID Taxon ID Taxon ID Field name Index key Data type Description Rare bird obs ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each observation record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Now Event ID indexed FK text 50 Sampling event Taxon ID indexed FK text 50 Taxon observed Obs distance m indexed int Observation distance in meters Constraint Is Null Or 220 Group size int Number of individuals observed Def
160. dix 7 Landbird Monitoring Protocol Database Documentation Appendix 7 Landbird Monitoring Protocol Database Documentation The database for this profect consists of three types of tables core tables describing the vvho where and when of data collection project specific tables and lookup tables that contain domain constraints for other tables Although core tables are based on NCCN standards they may contain fields domains or descriptions that have been added or altered to meet project objectives The database includes the following standard tables tbl Strata tbl_ Sites tbl Locations Coordinates tbl GPS Info tbl Sample Periods tbl Events Observers tbl QA Results tbl Edit Log Task List tbl Markers tbl Images tbl Point Counts tbl Rare Bird Obs tbl Incidental Obs tbl Nesting Obs tbl Point Desc tbl Habitat tbl Features tbl Training Notes tbl Schedule tbl Variance Groups tbl Analysis Notes tbl Detectability Parameters tbl Results tlu Project Crew tlu Project Taxa tlu Park Taxa Stratification classes used during design and analysis Sample sites transects are clusters of sample points used as the basis of sampling summary and analysis Sample locations point count positions transect start points and locations of rare bird observations Coordinate data for sample locations GPS information associated with sample location coordinates The span of dates during which data c
161. e ideal variance groups outlined above may be too small 1 e less than two for variance estimation In this case the variance groups within the elevation stratum must be combined In some cases only one variance estimate for the elevation stratum may be possible Further if there is only one transect for a particular elevation stratum variance can only be estimated for the elevation stratum if the single transect is added to the most appropriate variance group in a different elevation stratum This combination should be made with care for each species the transect should be placed in the most appropriate variance group For example if the transect is a high elevation transect it should be added to a middle elevation variance group If it is a middle elevation transect the appropriate variance group may differ for different species Note that variance groups should not contain more than one elevation stratum unless one of the elevation strata contains only one transect For rare species having few observations one variance group may be defined for the species This will cause BirdTrend to process estimates by combining across elevations Missing years 1 e transect was not visited in planned year may or may not require adjustment to the variance groups depending upon scale For example after 10 years of sampling if some transects in the annual panel have one or two missing years one variance estimate for the annual panel is appropr
162. e ENGS Dense Grand Fir GRAF Dense Grassland GRAS Sparse Hardwood Mix HAMI Dense Heather HEAT Sparse Lodgepole Pine LOPI Dense Meadow MEAD Sparse Mixed Conifer MICO Dense Mountain Hemlock MOHE Dense Noble Fir NOBF Dense Pacific Silver Fir PASF Dense Pasture PAST Sparse Ponderosa Pine POPI Dense Quaking Aspen QUAS Dense Red Alder REAL Dense Rock Sparsely Vegetated ROSV Sparse Sand Dune SADU Sparse Shore Pine SHPI Dense Shrub SHRU Dense Sitka Spruce SISP Dense Snow SNOW Sparse Subalpine Fir SUBF Sparse Subalpine Larch SULA Sparse Water WATE Sparse Western Hemlock WEHE Dense Western Redcedar WERC Dense Western Redcedar Western Hemlock WRCH Dense Willow Shrub Wetland WSWE Dense scale of the detection function but not its shape that is the covariates affect the rate at which detectability decreases with distance but not the overall shape of the detection curve Once the analyst is satisfied that the best possible models of detectability for each species have been developed he or she should record the essential parameters of the selected model s for each species truncation point w detection probability estimate P standard error of the detection probability estimate se of P and degrees of freedom of the detection probability estimate df of P All these values should be reported in the 5 year report 3 Estimating Density Once the detectability model parameters have been derived they should be used to estimate densi
163. e erased or otherwise rendered illegible Instead changes should be made as follows Draw a horizontal line through the original value and write the new value adjacent to the original value with the date and initials of the person making the change All corrections should be accompanied by a written explanation in the appropriate notes section on the field form These notes also should be dated and initialed f possible edits and revisions should be made in a different color ink to make it easier for subsequent viewers to be able to retrace the edit history Edits should be made on the original field forms and on any photocopied forms These procedures should be followed throughout data entry and data revision On a 5 year basis data sheets are to be scanned as PDF documents and archived see protocol narrative Section 4K Archival and Records Management and SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications The PDF files may then serve as a convenient digital reference of the original if needed 68 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data 69 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Standard Operating Procedure SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This
164. e exact directory location where they should be stored by the program Note that these files should have txt extensions to simplify output formatting Also the program will not overwrite or append to OUTFILE txt and SLOPEFILE txt if either of the output files exist with the requested names an error will result SUMMARYFILE txt allows appended output in order to generate a summary table that contains information for all species So if the specified summary file does not exist the program will generate a warning If you want appended output then change the output file name and rerun BirdTrend The combine parks and plot cdf arguments do not need to be included in the function call because they have default assignments Only include them if you want to modify the selections If not specified the combine parks argument will default to F which means that a trend result for combined parks will not be generated Change this argument to T if you want combined results these results will be provided if sufficient data are included in the input file The plot cdf argument will default to None which means that no cumulative distribution plots CDF plots will be produced If you want to produce CDF plots for each species there are three choices e Park which produces CDF plots by park across all elevations e Elev which produces CDF plots by elevation across all parks and e Both which produces CDF plots by elevation within
165. e feature offset from your current position Beari 12 Horz Distance 8 500 m Vert Distance m n Current Position nformation Use the position screen to see current coordinates and obtain a running average of your current position The position screen will show the duration and average UTMs during that duration Relatively small movement like shoulder width distance will reset the duration clock and create a new running coordinate average This screen shows a primary at the top and secondary at the bottom coordinate system these displays are set during the configuration process NCCN units have UTM zone 10 NAD 1983 as the primary coordinate screen The 10 preceding the easting at the top is the UTM zone Background Maps Background maps are useful reference for fieldwork For example a background map can show target points where field crews will place plots roads trails and park boundaries Background maps will display at scales set during map creation in MobileMapper Office and at a level set in the GPS unit configuration 74 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork MobileMapper GPS receivers can display vector data points lines polygons in a background map One attribute can be displayed for each vector feature in the background map Shapefiles are imported in MobileMapper Office and saved as a map file mmp Background maps are transferred to t
166. e to download the executable file which will install R onto your computer The default download for R should save a shortcut on your desktop If you want to save your data in different project directories you can copy the shortcut on your desktop rename it and change the properties so that the program when started from this shortcut starts in the appropriate project directory When exiting R you will be prompted to save the workspace image this will save any functions or objects that have been created during the current session so that they are accessible for the next session R Basics 150 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 R is an object oriented command line program with simple functional format It operates as a base package containing commonly used functionality and contributed packages containing more complex statistical functionality for specific purposes The packages can be downloaded separately from the same website as the base package Various help manuals for R are available online or as pdf documents if specified as part of your installation The links are found on the help menu in R Object oriented means that data are stored as objects and sent to functions The output of functions is typically stored as a new object For example type gt foo 1 2 at the prompt in the command window You have just
167. ect Lead Mid February Plan schedule and logistics including ordering any Project Lead NPS Lead and Park By March 1 needed equipment and supplies SOP 1 Biologists Inform GIS Specialist and Data Manager of specific Project Lead By March 31 needs for upcoming field season Generate field navigation reports roster of sample points Project Lead By March 31 and coordinates from the database SOP 1 Prepare and print field maps SOP 1 Project Lead By April 15 Update and load data dictionary background maps and GIS Specialist By April 15 target coordinates into GPS units SOP 1 Ensure that project workspace is ready for use and GPS NPS Lead Data Manager and By April 30 download software is loaded at each park SOP 2 GIS Specialist Implement working database copy Data Manager By May 1 Initiate computer access and key requests may need Park Biologists May park specific dates Provide field crew email addresses and user logins to Park Biologists May Data Manager Provide database GPS training as needed Data Manager and GIS Specialist May Train field crew in bird identification distance Field Lead May estimation sampling protocols and safety SOP 3 Examination and certification of field observer Field Lead May qualifications enter training results into database SOP 3 Data Acquisition Notify Park Biologist and Project Lead of tour itinerary Technicians Before each tour Section 3C SOPs 4 Collect field observations and position data d
168. ects per 7 day tour Sampling will begin with the low elevation transects in each park and observers will gradually progress upslope throughout the season The final transect must be completed by July 31 Field crews will enter data into the custom designed database throughout the field season and should be able to complete data entry within or 2 days after completing their last transect in late July Detailed data entry instructions are provided in SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification We recommend that data verification and certification should be completed by the end of November and data analysis and the preparation of the annual report should be completed by the end of April before the next field season begins B Facility and Equipment Needs This project requires minimal special facilities and equipment The crew will require housing in the vicinity of each large park for the duration of the season early May late July Crew members will provide their own backpacking gear excluding the equipment itemized in this section and personal vehicles Computer access is necessary during the training session and throughout the season so that crew members can enter their own data Based on four 2 person crews the following equipment will be required 8 binoculars 4 park radios 8 two way radios 8 GPS units 8 compasses 8 digital cameras 8 bear proof food canisters 4 tents 4 water filters 4 camp stoves a
169. ed to ensure we maintain nondestructive methods in our program B Field Season Preparations and Equipment Setup Preparing for the field season requires getting an early start to recruit and hire a well qualified crew The importance of securing a well qualified crew for this project cannot be understated During the training period at the beginning of the season protocols can be taught and bird identification skills can be sharpened but it is essential that all members of the Network crew be experienced birders very physically fit and comfortable spending extensive time in the backcountry Every reasonable effort should be made to entice the previous year s observers to return but it seems likely that at least some new observers will need to be hired every year We recommend beginning the recruiting process in December to ensure that maximally experienced qualified observers are available for hire Once new observers are hired they should be sent species lists and other materials that will enable them to be as familiar as possible with Network birds and their vocalizations prior to the start of the training session in May Beginning in February or March equipment should be inventoried including testing of breakable items such as GPS units radios and water filters and any needed items should be purchased Data forms should be printed or copied about 50 percent on rain proof paper and topographic maps 1 24 000 scale for the yea
170. ed date prior to created date qa 2a Sites missing critical info Missing site code park code or stratum ID qa 2b Sites park inconsistencies Park code inconsistent with strata table qa 2c Sites duplicates on code and park Duplicate records on site code and park code qa 2d Sites missing evaluation codes Established or rejected sites without evaluation codes qa 2e Sites site status inconsistencies Missing site status retired sites without discontinued dates discontinued dates on status other than retired or discontinued dates without establishment dates qa 2f Sites illogical dates Discontinued date prior to establishment date or updated date prior to created date qa 2g Sites missing panel type Active sites without a panel type qa 2h Sites missing site name Missing site name no remedy required qa 3a Locations missing critical info Missing site ID except where loc type incidental location code location type or park code qa 3b Locations park inconsistencies Park code inconsistent with sites table qa 3c Locations duplicates on site and loc code Duplicate records on site ID and location code qa 3d Locations duplicates on site and loc name Duplicate records on site ID and location name qa 3e Locations duplicates on loc name and park Duplicate records on location name and park code qa 3f Locations missing sampling events Locat
171. egular intervals and at the end of the field season the Field Lead should inspect the data being entered to check for completeness and perhaps identify avoidable errors The Field Lead also may periodically run the Quality Assurance Tools that are built into the front end working database application to check for logical inconsistencies and data outliers this step is described in greater detail in Section 4E Quality Review and also in SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification Field Form Handling Procedures As the field data forms are part of the permanent record for project data they should be handled in a way that preserves their future interpretability and information content Refer to SOP 9 Field Form Handling Procedures for details on how to handle these forms Image Handling Procedures Photographic images also should be handled and processed with care Refer to SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images for details on how to handle and manage these files GPS Data Procedures The following general procedures should be followed for GPS data see SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data and Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List 1 GPS data should be downloaded by the field crew from the units at the end of each field trip and stored in the project workspace see SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records Management 2 Raw files should be sent in a timely manner to the GIS Specialist for processing and correction
172. elevation 2 for mid elevation or 3 for high elevation Transect ID Unique alphanumeric identifier Subplot ID Unique alphanumeric identifier Species 4 digit species code Estimated Subplot Density Numeric field Variance Group ID Unique alphanumeric identifier see explanation below Defining the Variance Group 152 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 VVithin each elevation stratum transects vvith equal or nearly equal numbers of sampled years are assumed to have similar trend slope variance If all transects are sampled in each planned year and the species is observed at least once on each transect then the annual panel would be one variance group and rotating panels with equal numbers of samples 1 e in years 10 15 20 would comprise a second variance group In years that are not a multiple of five there would be two variance groups for rotating panels Similar groups in different elevation strata would comprise additional variance groups For example in this ideal case when rotating panels have the same number of years and there are no missing transects there will be 6 variance groups total 2 for each elevation stratum When entire transects are missing either there are no non zero densities or the transect could not be sampled in any of the planned years for some species the sample size within some of th
173. en they are encountered 3 Data Analysis and Reporting Data analysis for SAJH and LEWI will not make use of the BirdTrend software that was developed to accommodate the more complicated sample design at the large parks Rather data analysis should use the best available detectability estimation parameters at least for the initial years of the project these will need to be obtained from pooling detections from all NCCN parks as described in SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting to estimate a biennial park wide density for each species detected in each park Simple linear regression should then be used to test for temporal trends in the biennial estimates for each species Linear regression may be performed using numerous widely available statistical software packages as well as spreadsheet applications Instructions for performing linear regression analysis in Microsoft Excel are provided below Import annual density estimates calculated in Distance into an Excel spreadsheet such that the years are in one column and the density estimates are in another column Click Tools gt Data Analysis m the vvindovv titled Data Analysis select Regression and click OK A nevv vvindovv titled Regression should appear This window has many options Below 15 a brief explanation of each Highlight the density estimates and put into Input Y Range Highlight the years and put into Input X Range Click Labels if the variable name
174. ents of supporting information such that the data may be confidently manipulated analyzed and synthesized At the conclusion of the field season according to the schedule in Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List the NPS Lead and Project Lead will be jointly responsible for providing a completed up to date metadata interview form to the Data Manager The Data Manager and GIS Specialist will facilitate metadata development by consulting on the use of the metadata interview form by creating and parsing metadata records from the information in the interview form and by posting such records to national clearinghouses Refer to SOP 15 Metadata Development for specific instructions 16 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork G Data Certification and Delivery Data certification is a benchmark in the project information management process that indicates that 1 the data are complete for the period of record 2 they have undergone and passed the quality assurance checks Section 4E Quality Review and 3 they are appropriately documented and in a condition for archiving posting and distribution as appropriate Certification is not intended to imply that the data are completely free of errors or inconsistencies that may or may not have been detected during quality assurance reviews To ensure that only quality data are included in reports and other project deliverables the data cer
175. er to allow comparison with Breeding Bird Survey data which are based on 3 minute counts Observers will estimate the horizontal distance to the nearest meter to each bird detected These estimations will allow detection probabilities to be calculated as a function of distance for each species and will therefore allow estimation of absolute density The observer also will record whether the distance estimate was based on an aural or visual detection and whether the bird ever sang during the point count These last two pieces of data may facilitate analysis of a error associated with estimating distances to unseen birds and b estimation of the density of singing males rather than all birds pooled Juvenile birds will not be recorded on the point count data form All adult birds detected at each point will be noted on the data form but there is a field for observers to indicate that a particular bird was already detected from a previous point The form also will provide a separate field for tallying flyovers birds that fly above the top of the vegetation canopy never touch down in the observer s field of view and do not appear to be foraging displaying or behaving in any other way that might suggest a link to the habitat below them A sample field form for conducting point counts is provided in SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts After completing their last point count each morning observers will retrace their steps back to the
176. ercent for 2 16 and 20 of the 22 species respectively These results indicate that if trends are consistent across the target populations the proposed monitoring will be sufficient to detect 4 percent per year increases in most of species after four cycles through the sampling rotation If trends are consistent network wide they should be detected earlier Table 2 Estimated power of serially augmented panel design n 72 transects to detect a simulated 4 percent per annum exponential increase in 22 representative landbird species in Olympic National Park after 10 20 and 30 years of monitoring Values represent the proportion of 1 000 computer simulations in which a significant population trend was identified Simulation methods are presented in Appendix 5 Simulation Methods Analysis provided by TerraStat Consulting Group 2005 Years of monitoring Avian species 10 20 30 American Pipit 0 135 0 349 0 665 American Robin 0 539 1 000 1 000 Brown Creeper 0 418 0 999 1 000 Chestnut backed Chickadee 0 658 1 000 1 000 Dark eyed Junco 0 574 1 000 1 000 Golden crowned Kinglet 0 617 1 000 1 000 Gray Jay 0 301 0 979 1 000 Hammond s Flycatcher 0 402 0 989 1 000 Hairy Woodpecker 0 307 0 942 0 994 Olive sided Flycatcher 0 220 0 702 0 937 Pacific slope Flycatcher 0 734 0 995 1 000 Red breasted Nuthatch 0 495 1 000 1 000 Sooty Grouse 0 361 0 972 0 994 Steller s Jay 0 202 0 790 0 935 Swainson s Thrush 0 214 0 742 0 939 Tow
177. erson making data edits Table affected indexed text 50 Table affected by edits Fields_affected text 200 Description of the fields affected Records_affected text 200 Description of the records affected Data_edit_notes text Comments about the data edits tbl Events Data collection event for a given location Index Index columns Certified_by Certified_by Certified_date Certified_date Cloud_cover Cloud_cover Entered_date Entered_date Location_ID Location_ID Noise_level Noise_level Period_ID Period_ID Precip_cond Precip_cond pk_tbl_Events primary Event_ID Project_code Project_code Start_date Start_date Updated_date Verified_date Updated_date Verified_date Wind_cond Wind_cond Field name Index key Data type Description Event ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each sampling event Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Now indexed FK text 50 Sampling location for this event indexed text 10 Project code for linking information with other data sets and applications Location ID Project code Default BDa03 Period ID indexed FK text 50 Sample period during which this event occurred Start date indexed datetime Start date of the sampling event Start time datetime Start time of the sampling event End date datetime End date of the sampling event optional End time datetime End time of the sampling event optional Declination text 25 Declination co
178. ert L Wilkerson Kurt J Jenkins Robert C Kuntz II John R Boetsch James P and Patricia J Happe Narrative Version 1 0 Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Acknowledgments This protocol was developed using funding from the USGS Status and Trends of Biological Resources Program administered through Memoranda of Understanding between The Institute for Bird Populations U S Geological Survey USGS and the National Park Service NPS Funding was provided to the Institute through a cooperative agreement with the USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Additional substantial contributions in staff time were provided by USGS and NPS We are grateful to everyone who has worked with us in the NCCN bird monitoring workgroup Jerry Freilich Scott Gremel Roger Hoffman Ron Holmes Alice Shelly Scott Stonum Darin Swinney and Andrea Woodward We thank Natasha Antonova Roger Hoffman and Darin Swinney for using their GIS expertise to assist with point selection We thank Bill Gleason and Scott Stonum for assistance with development of the sampling protocol at San Juan Island National Historical Park and Lewis and Clark National Historical Park respectively We appreciate assistance from Paul Geissler Phil Larsen Tony Olsen John Sauer Alice Shelly and Scott Urquhart on sampling design and Tony Olsen for selecting sam
179. erverl First and last name of the person who collected the most detailed notes on the bird detection Observer2 First and last name of secondary observer if none leave blank Species Name Full common name of the detected species Species Code Four letter species code Quantity Enter the number of individuals of the species detected Location Name Record the colloquial name of the observation location here If there is no colloquial name leave this space blank Coordinate Source Circle Map if coordinates could not be obtained from a GPS unit and instead the location vvas estimated solely by using the field map Circle GPS if coordinates vvere obtained from the GPS unit GPS Model Enter name of the GPS unit you are using for example Thales Mobile Mapper GPS File Name Enter the name of the GPS unit assigned to the file for this survey point Leave blank if no GPS file vvas produced Easting UTM easting based on NAD83 of the survey point Northing UTM northing based on NAD83 of the survey point GPS Error Error in meters as provided by the GPS unit Leave blank if no GPS unit was used Datum Enter the datum on which the coordinates are based Field maps are based on NAD83 Transect and Point Record the transect and point number if the bird was detected during a point count otherwise leave blank Nesting Stage If a nest was observed in conjunction with this detection indica
180. escription of simulation methods follows 1 Selected 96 site means for each species 32 for each elevation strata from the appropriate zero modified lognormal distribution 2 Constructed the 30 year series of means for each site by adding 4 exponential trend positive or negative to the initial site mean generated above as follows X X x l dr l for t 2 3 30 A set with 0 trend also was included in order to check Type I error 3 Randomly assigned the sites to panels for the current sampling scenario 12 annual 12 rotating equal numbers from three elevation strata in each panel 4 Generated a single random count for each sampled year from the Poisson distribution with the given annual mean for each species at each site 5 For each transect multiplied the annual counts by the appropriate habitat specific constant to estimate density birds hectare 6 Transformed each series of densities by adding one then taking the natural logarithm 7 Estimated the linear regression slope for each series for the appropriate number of years and with only the appropriate samples for each panel rotating panels have four out of five annual samples left out of the slope calculation Sites for which all observations 30 years were zero were removed from the analysis 8 Estimated the pooled mean and variance of the slope estimates among panels including consideration for unequal slopes among annual and rotating panels 9
181. ese guidelines 126 Alvvays clearly indicate in accompanying correspondence that the products contain sensitive information and specify vvhich products contain sensitive information Indicate in all correspondence that products containing sensitive information should be stored and maintained separately from non sensitive information and protected from accidental release or re distribution Indicate that NPS retains all distribution rights copies of the data should not be redistributed by anyone but NPS Include the following standard disclaimer in a text file with all digital media upon distribution The following files contain protected information This information was provided by the National Park Service under a confidentiality agreement It is not to be published handled re distributed or used in a manner inconsistent with that agreement The text file also should specify the file s containing sensitive information If the products are being sent on physical media for example CD or DVD the media should be marked in such a way that clearly indicates that media contains sensitive information provided by the National Park Service Confidentiality Agreements Confidentiality agreements may be created between NPS and another organization or individual to ensure that protected information is not inadvertently released When contracts or other agreements with a non federal partner do not include a specific prov
182. eslow and Wight 1975 Hagar and others 1995 Bunnell and others 1997 Altman 2005 Pacific Northwest landbirds breeding in habitats other than coniferous forests face substantial threats as well Species that breed in the subalpine and alpine zones may face ecological changes resulting from visitor impacts alterations to natural fire regimes or changing climate Indeed Oregon Washington Partners in Flight has explicitly called on the NPS to take responsibility for monitoring birds in high elevation areas throughout the Pacific Northwest Altman and Bart 2001 Additional threats face migratory landbirds that breed in Pacific Northwest For example land use changes on both the wintering grounds and along migration routes may influence overwinter survival of migratory species The three large parks in the NCCN Olympic North Cascades and Mount Rainier range from sea level to nearly 4 400 m and contain huge tracts of late successional coniferous forest on the Olympic Peninsula and the west slope of the Cascades as well as large areas dominated by subalpine and alpine plant communities North Cascades National Park Service Complex also includes substantial tracts of coniferous forest typical of the east side of the Cascades which hosts a somewhat distinct avifauna Altman 2000 San Juan Island National Historical Park in the rainshadow of the Olympic Mountains includes small but important examples of coastal prairie and Garry Oa
183. eviews Coonan T 2005 Review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 18 2005 Courbois P 2005 Review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 18 2005 Fancy S 2005 Review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 30 2005 Geissler P 2005 Review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center March 25 2005 Jenkins K Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Kuntz R C II Schaberl J Happe P and Boetsch J 2005 Response to peer review of Study plan for establishing a landbird monitoring program for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network Prepared for USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center April 19 2005 Olsen A R 2005a North Cascades National Park generalized random tessellation stratified GRTS survey design Prepared
184. ex key Data type Description Image format primary text 12 Image format desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Image Quality List of quality ranks for images template Field name Index key Data type Description Quality code primary tinyint Image quality text 20 Image quality desc text 100 tlu Image Type List of image types template Field name Index key Data type Description Image type primary text 12 Image type desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Linear Unit List of measurement units for linear distances template Field name Index key Data type Description Units primary text 2 Units desc text 25 Sort order tinyint tlu Location Type List of location type codes template Field name Index key Data type Description Location type primary text 20 Loc type desc text 200 Sort order tinyint tlu Marker Status List of status codes for site markers template Field name Index key Data type Description Marker status primary text 12 Marker status desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu Marker Type List of marker types used to facilitate site relocation template Field name Index key Data type Description Marker type primary text 20 Sort order tinyint tlu Nest Activity List of nest activity codes Field name Index key Data type Description Nest activity primary text 20 Sort order tinyint Appendix 7 February 27 2007
185. exed datetime Date GPS file was collected GPS time datetime Time GPS file was collected AM or PM text 2 Ante meridian or post meridian AM or PM if a 12 hour clock was used Corr type indexed text 50 GPS file correction type GPS UTME double UTM easting in GPS unit GPS UTMN double UTM northing in GPS unit UTM zone text 5 UTM projection system zone Default 10N GPS datum indexed text 5 Datum of GPS coordinates Elev m double Elevation meters in GPS unit Num sat int Number of satellites tracked by GPS unit during data collection GPS duration text 25 Length of time GPS file was open Filt pos int Number of GPS positions exported from GPS file PDOP double Position dilution of precision scale HDOP double Horizontal dilution of precision scale H err m double Horizontal error meters V er m double Vertical error meters Std dev m double Standard deviation meters GPS process notes text 255 GPS file processing notes tbl Habitat Characterization of the vegetation at the sample point Index Index columns Canopy cover Canopy cover PMR code PMR code Habitat primary Tree size class Event ID Habitat num Tree size class Field name Index key Data type Description Event ID primary FK text 50 Sampling event Habitat num primary tinyint Habitat inclusion number assigned in the field PMR code indexed text 4 Pacific Meridian vegetation code of the inclusion Canopy cover indexed text 6 Percent co
186. exercise for dealing with this problem is to have a group of observers remain at a mock point count location while one or two others serve as scouts who walk out of sight of the group and locate with certainty a singing bird The scouts then call the group via walkie talkie and call the group s attention to the located bird when it sings Each member of the group independently estimates the distance to the singing bird and the scouts then measure the actual distance from the bird back to the group Although this exercise can be time consuming and even feel tedious at times it is worth the effort and should be repeated with multiple species in a variety of habitats 4 Conducting Point Counts When Field Technicians can identify most species and have begun practicing distance estimation part of each training day should be devoted to conducting simultaneous SOP 3 Training Observers 35 point counts Working in groups of 2 6 Field Technicians should conduct practice point counts at the same time in the same location At the end of each count they should compare notes and discuss any discrepancies in the species detected and the estimated distances to them Continue these simultaneous counts until there is consistency among observers in the species and distances recorded While conducting these practice point counts Field Technicians should adhere to all aspects of the field protocol see SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts with one pos
187. ext of bird population changes throughout the Pacific Northwest as measured by regional efforts such as the BBS or MAPS 18 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Evaluate operational aspects of the monitoring program such as whether any transects need to be eliminated or moved due to access problems vvhether the sampling period remains appropriate the optimal sampling season could conceivably change over time in response to climate change etc Standard Report Format Annual reports and trend analysis reports will use the NPS Natural Resource Publications template a pre formatted Microsoft Word template document based on current NPS formatting standards Annual reports will use the Natural Resource Report template and trend analysis and other peer reviewed technical reports will use the Natural Resource Technical Report template These templates and documentation of the NPS publication standards National Park Service 2005 are available at http vvvvvv nature nps gov publications NRPM index cfm Revievv Products for Sensitive nformation Certain proyect information related to the specific locations of rare or threatened taxa may meet criteria for protection and as such should not be shared outside NPS except where a written confidentiality agreement is in place prior to sharing Before preparing data in any format for sharing outside NPS including presentations rep
188. ext to each other This double flag serves two functions It signals the boundary of the vegetation plot when you return later to assess the vegetation at the point count station and it also will warn that you are nearing a survey point and prevent you from accidentally bypassing the point when you return to collect vegetation data Then continue on to the remainder of the points remembering to flag the route to place a double flag 50 m beyond each point and to mark each point with a flag that is a different color than the route marking flags What to Do When an Obstacle is Encountered In some instances it will not be possible to travel 100 m off trail in the indicated direction or for that matter in any off trail direction from the transect origin This will most commonly occur where the trail crosses very steep terrain or where it lies adjacent to an uncrossable stream When this occurs travel 100 m along the trail instead in whichever direction that will lead farther away from your partner s planned route Conduct the first point count on the trail using pacing the field map and the GPS unit to ensure that the point is 100 m from the origin as the crow flies Note If there are switchbacks or the trail doubles back then it may be necessary to walk more than 100 m to end up 100 m from the origin Name the point and all subsequent points according to the cardinal or semi cardinal direction that most closely approximate
189. f txt and the outfile must have an extension of csv Also the program will not overwrite existing files so if output files exist with the requested names an error will result 154 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 For example gt PreBirdTrendV 1 1 c myfiles birdfiles testcasefull csv 39 c myfiles birdfiles output testsum txt c WnyfilesWbirdfilesWestcaseclean csv Notice that the argument names are not required as long as the inputs are in the proper order If errors are noted in the output file a message will appear on the screen alerting the user In this case the input file must be revised to correct the errors and PreBirdTrend must be rerun with the corrected data If the input file had no errors the new input file generated by the preprocessor outfile can be used as the input into BirdTrend If warnings or notes are displayed in the output file you may wish to modify the input file according to the recommendations then re run PreBirdTrend prior to running BirdTrend Table A6 2 shows the first page of sample report output from PreBirdTrend for the supplied input file testcasefull csv Each report file specifies the input file and contains a date time stamp A table showing the subplot count by variance group transect panel elevation and year is generated for each species by park The
190. f housing is to be provided for the field crew housing needs to be arranged Camping arrangements at SAJH or LEWI need to be made in advance and the appropriate personnel at these parks should be consulted to schedule survey dates The pre season training session needs to be planned in detail including preparing any teaching materials scheduling the session to make sure all necessary topics are covered coordinating with park personnel who may need to meet with the crew this may include Park Biologists Rangers Data Managers and or GIS Specialists and arranging camping or lodging for the crew throughout the training session An adequate number of data forms to fulfill training needs and provide for the first 7 day tour at least should be printed or copied about one quarter should be produced on waterproof paper Additional data forms will need to be copied or printed throughout the field season if they are not produced in advance 30 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records Management 31 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records Management Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Project Workspace Set
191. f the distinction between the working database and the master database After the season s field data have been entered and processed they need to be reviewed and certified by the Project Lead for quality completenes and logical consistency Data validation is the process of checking data for completeness structural integrity and logical consistency The working database application facilitates this process by showing the results of pre built queries that check for data integrity data outliers and missing values and illogical values The user may then fix these problems and document the fixes Once the data have been through the validation process and metadata have been developed for them they are to be certified by completing the NCCN Project Data Certification Form available on the NCCN website The completed form certified data and updated metadata may then be delivered to the NPS Lead and the Data Manager according to the timeline in Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List Data Quality Review The following table shows the automated validation checks that are performed on the data prior to certification These queries are designed to return records that need to be fixed so ideally once all data checks have been run and any errors have been fixed none of the queries will return records However not all errors and inconsistencies can be fixed in which case a description of the resulting errors and why edits were not ma
192. fected by whether the counts are conducted on or off trails Siegel Institute for Bird Populations written commun 2006 Additionally visitor impacts are light enough along most trail stretches in the NCCN parks that it seems unlikely that trail proximity substantially affects avian community composition or abundance On the second and all subsequent visits to a transect in future years observers will be provided with maps coordinates and descriptions indicating the location of all their survey points Unreliable GPS coverage may mean that we will not always be able to precisely relocate survey points but we expect to reliably conduct point counts within 50 m of the intended location This level of precision should be adequate as it will usually place the observer in habitat very similar to the intended location and in any case the transect rather than the survey point is our primary unit of analysis At each point the observer will record the starting time score the degree of noise interference caused by such factors as flowing water or wind record the weather conditions see Point Count Conditions form SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts and then after waiting minute for any birds disturbed by the approach of the observer to resume their normal activities begin the 5 minute point count Birds observed in the first 3 minutes will be recorded separately 3 Field Methods 11 from those observed in the last 2 minutes in ord
193. fer slightly from those utilized in the large parks they should nevertheless provide unbiased estimates and therefore be comparable to results from the other network parks As with analysis of data from the larger parks density estimates and trends in the small parks will be assessed every 5 years Because birds will be monitored on alternate years in SAJH and LEWI there will be uneven numbers of years contained in the sample analyzed in the two parks during years 5 15 25 etc During the intervening reporting years 10 20 etc there will be even numbers of data points in each analysis This unavoidable imbalance will create a slight imbalance in power to detect trends between SAJH and LEWI 4 Data Handling Analysis and Reporting 17 that will be particularly evident during the first 5 year report 2 versus 3 years in the analysis By year 15 the imbalance in sample size 7 versus 8 years of data should be less of an issue Annual reports during the intervening years will simply summarize and tabulate data without attempting to model detectability estimate density or evaluate trends in density Detailed specifications and formats for reporting program results for the small parks and the large parks are provided in SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting 1 Reporting and Product Development Report Content We recommend that a summary report be produced annually with a more detailed report produced every 5 years The annual
194. ffort in point count sampling of birds in bottomland hardwood forests in Ralph C J Sauer J R and Droege S eds Monitoring Bird Populations by Point Counts Berkeley California USDA Forest Service General Technical Report PSW GTR 149 p 7 17 Stevens Jr D L and Olsen A R 1999 Spatially restricted surveys over time for aquatic resources Journal of Agricultural Biological and Environmental Statistics v 4 p 415 428 Stevens Jr D L and Olsen A R 2003 Variance estimation for spatially balanced samples of environmental resources EnvironMetrics v 14 p 593 610 Stevens Jr D L and Olsen A R 2004 Spatially balanced sampling of natural resources Journal of the American Statistical Association v 99 p 262 278 TerraStat Consulting Group 2005 Protocols for analyzing and reporting trends in avian abundance in NCCN parks Task 2 Report Available from USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Olympic Field Station Port Angeles Washington Thomas L Laake J L Strindberg S Marques F E C Buckland S T Borchers D L Anderson D R Burnham K P Hedley S L Pollard J H Bishop J R B and Marques T A 2005 Distance 5 0 Research Unit for Wildlife Population Assessment University of St Andrews UK Program Distance Home Page web site at http www ruwpa st and ac uk distance Accessed October 10 2007 Urquhart N S and Kincaid T M 1999 Designs for
195. fornia s National Parks September 13 15 1990 University of California Davis p 5 14 Ralph C J and Scott J M eds 1981 Estimating numbers of terrestrial birds Studies in Avian Biology 6 p 630 Reynolds R T Scott J M and Nussbaum R A 1980 A variable circular plot method for estimating bird numbers Condor v 82 p 309 313 Robbins C S Sauer J R Greenburg R and Droege S 1989 Population declines in North American birds that migrate to the neotropics Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences v 86 p 7658 7662 Rosenstock S S Anderson D R Giesen K M Leukering T and Carter M F 2002 Landbird counting techniques current practices and an alternative Auk v 119 p 46 53 Saab V A and Rich T D 1997 Large scale conservation assessment for Neotropical migratory land birds in the interior Columbia River basin Portland Oregon General Technical Report PNW GTR 285 USDA Forest Service Pacific Northwest Research Sauer J R 2000 Combining information from monitoring programs complications associated with indices and geographic scale in Bonney R Pashley D N Cooper R J and Niles L eds Strategies for bird conservation the Partners in Flight planning process Ogden Utah USDA Forest Service Proceedings RMRS_P_16 p 124 126 Sauer J R and Cooper R J 2000 Population and habitat assessment monitoring bird populations over large areas in Bonne
196. g associated images where photos taken False or where image date is different from the date of the event qa 61 Events missing conditions Point count events with missing environmental conditions noise level wind cond precip cond cloud cover temperature qa 6m Events illogical dates Events with start date times occurring after end date times or records that have update or verified dates prior to the record creation date qa 7a Observers missing critical info Missing event ID or contact ID qa 7b Observers missing role Observer role is missing no remedy required qa 7c Markers missing critical info Missing marker code location ID marker type marker status or marker updated values qa 7d Markers missing measurements Missing marker height substrate or having only partial offset information distance without azimuth or vice versa qa 7e Markers status inconsistencies Marker status removed but no removal date or with a removal date and status lt gt removed qa 7f Markers illogical dates Marker updated or marker removed date before marker installed date qa 7i Features missing measurements Missing distance or azimuth values qa 7j Features missing critical info Location ID feature type or feature status is missing qa 8a Habitat missing critical info Missing event ID or habitat number qa 8b Habitat missing values Missi
197. g changes to the NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol including its accompanying SOPs and Appendixes are provided in SOP 21 Revising the Protocol References Cited Akaike H 1973 Information theory as an extension of the maximum likelihood principle in Petrov B N and Csaki F eds Second International Symposium on Information Theory Akademiai Kiado Budapest p 267 281 Altman B 2005 Conservation priorities for landbirds of the Pacific Coast of Oregon and Washington in Proceedings of the Third International Partners in Flight Symposium General Technical Report PSW GTR 191 Albany California USDA Forest Service Pacific Southwest Research Station p 143 148 Altman B 2000 Conservation strategy for landbirds of the east slope of the Cascade Mountains in Oregon and Washington Prepared for Oregon Washington Partners in Flight American Bird Conservancy 121 p available online at http www orwapif org pdf east_slope pdf accessed October 3 2006 Altman B and Bart J 2001 Special species monitoring and assessment in Oregon and Washington Landbird species not adequately monitored by the Breeding Bird Survey Oregon Washington Partners in Flight Andelman S J and Stock J 1994a Management research and monitoring priorities for the conservation of Neotropical migratory landbirds that breed in Oregon Olympia Washington Washington Department of Natural Resources Andelman S J and Stock
198. g phrase Internal NPS Use Only Not For Release These specimens should be stored separately from other specimens to prevent unintended access by visitors As with any sensitive information a confidentiality agreement should be in place prior to sending these specimens to another non NPS cooperator or collection Procedures for Coordinate Offsets 1 Process GPS data upload into the database and finalize coordinate data records Update tbl_Coordinates Is_best as appropriate especially where there is more than one set of coordinates per sample location 2 Set the minimum and maximum offset distances project specific typically up to 2 km 3 Apply a random offset and random azimuth to each unique set of coordinates 4 Coordinates may then be either rounded or truncated so the UTM values end in zeros to give a visual cue that the values are not actual coordinates 5 Do not apply independent offsets to clustered or otherwise linked sample locations for example multiple sample points along a transect Instead either apply a single offset to the cluster so they all remain clustered after the offset is applied or apply an offset to only one of the points in the cluster for example the transect origin and store the result in the public coordinates for each point in that cluster 6 These public coordinates are then the only ones to be shared outside NPS including all published maps reports publications pre
199. gain for more than 2 seconds and then release it to change the backlight from low to off Push the PWR button GPS antenna inside the housing PWR 1 Scrolling button again for more than 2 seconds and then release it to turn the backlight on again Receiver Screens The NAV button scrolls through navigation screens Many navigation screens have been turned off such as the road view during the configuration intialization process The screens that will be used most are the satellite chart the background map the position screen and the heading and bearing screen The ESC key steps back through previous screens Look for the Satellite Status screen This shows the status of the battery power how many satellites are being tracked the solid bars in the graph and whether the GPS is calculating positions in 2D or 3D mode upper right corner If there are four or more satellites being tracked and the 3D indicator appears then data recording can proceed SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data T Check Signal Reception and Current Location Push ENTER 5 Use the scroll arrows and ENTER button to type in a Push the NAV button until the Position screen appears job file name job files should be named the following This also will show the status of the strength of the satellite standard way signals The line that reads Averaging will indicate whether Xyymmdd the GPS is Search Ist sat
200. gejour pua4rp4ig uni1oi pue s oyd pojsenbo ay 103 AIO OOIIP Jo jndjno 3nq p y s 219A sjo d 420 AOPULA 1 yndjno ue Ajroadg uoun 427p n0770 d Sulssiiq MOMMA pua ppg unio1 pue oumu eureu ndyno Kreurums FUSSI AAOPULA 1 Kreurums Ayr ds uou zo Kapununs SuTssiiN MOMMA ac pua4rpaig UNII pue eureu jnd3no dofs Sussy AAOPULA A eureu opty edo s Ayr ds yuong jno sadojs Sulssii MONA pua4rpaig UNII eureu o r jndino srsA eue puo SuisstjA AAOPULA 4 pue eureu mdymo Ayr ds yuoumnsse 271 710 Sulssii MONA pua4rpaig UNII eureu oj jndur Sursstj AAOPULA 4 pue ureu dur ue Ajroadg yuoumnsie 1 1 SutsstjA MONA SJO LIq OL YUM 9SUSS9 AI puas psig Aq poje1ouoG oq ULI jeg sojou pue SSuTUTEA SIOLIO JO ISTI 9 9V AQEL 1002 LT ooojo1g SUNOJN NOON Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 166 peje no eo jou sem sxed 550 puo peurquioo v os xed ouo jseo 1 10 po dures jou SVM uoneAe9 o IUO ISLI 1E IOAIMOY Puas PAL ouo 1s o ye 10 jou SEA IUO ISVLA 3 osneooq OU Ted ur 7 0 195 sem sSy4pdauiquioo 9u rmno p l npuo Jou sem syed ssoJoe 3S puo pourquiod 19JON c poureu l 0 UMVIM SEM AVU os sjsrxo peoijpe jojdjno
201. gh elevation species The trainer leads the crew in a discussion of field marks and distinguishing characteristics of vocalizations and also quizzes the crew During the evenings that are not occupied by group review sessions Field Technicians should use a variety of materials field guides recordings from multiple sources their own field notes to study independently or in small groups About halfway through the training session the Field Technicians should be given a practice evaluation of their bird identification skills The practice evaluation should be structured similarly to the formal evaluation that crew members will need to pass before they are certified to conduct point counts see below The practice evaluation helps crew members assess their own strengths and weaknesses and also helps the trainer s identify individual species or groups of species that the crew may be having particular trouble learning Certifying Observers to Conduct Point Counts Before they can collect point count data for the NCCN landbird monitoring program Field Technicians must pass a rigorous bird identification exam We recommend that the exam involve identifying approximately 60 recorded vocalizations including all the more common landbird species in the parks and many of the rarer ones although familiarity with the numerous shorebird species in table is desirable it is not strictly necessary should not be a major focus of training and sho
202. he area of inference and the sampling frame by discarding the survey points in one or more units or one or more habitats Even after such a reduction surveying the remaining points at LEWI may still require a 2 person crew at least 7 days of sampling not including travel to and from the large parks 116 or any days for familiarization vvith the area Additionally any days lost because of rain vvill further extend the time required to complete the survey Given the usual vveather patterns at LEWI in late May and early June the survey could therefore easily take 2 weeks or more for a 2 person crew to complete or 1 week for a 4 person crew to complete The crew should therefore begin monitoring the weather forecast for the LEWI area towards the end of training if the forecast looks promising then two or more crew members should be sent to LEWI during the first work tour after training is completed If however substantial rain is forecasted the crew may choose to postpone their visit to LEWI until the second or perhaps even third work tour although every effort should be made to complete the survey by June 21 Even employing this strategy it may not be possible for the NCCN landbird crew to complete the full survey grid at LEWI given the likely funding and staffing constraints faced by the NCCN landbird monitoring program If this proves to be the case personnel at LEWI may wish to find locally based volunteers or staff to survey a
203. he large parks we will sample avian populations along primarily off trail and off road point count transects accessible from the parks road and trail systems Because travel and logistics do not pose significant problems in the two smaller parks we will sample avian populations from points distributed as a systematic grid covering each park area in its entirety Large Park Sampling Scheme To address the first three constraints in sampling large wilderness parks safety issues travel costs navigational issues we have restricted our sampling frame to accessible areas of the parks within km of a road or trail We are defining the more remote portions of the parks areas farther than 1 km from a road or trail as a separate stratum which under current funding and staffing constraints will not be sampled at all We considered sampling this remote stratum as part of the current program with effort stratified in a manner that would ensure that most of our sampling would still occur in the accessible stratum Unfortunately with just a two person crew working in each park there is no minimal amount of effort that could be channeled into the remote stratum without siphoning substantial resources away from sampling in the accessible stratum If for example the crew spent one of their 6 week long tours each year working in the remote stratum this might yield just a single transect as traveling to and from the starting poin
204. he points on each half of the transect Each point is named with a unique 8 character string that consists of the transect number the direction of travel from the origin point the sequential point number along that half of the transect For example if an observer heads southwest from origin point 3005 the first point will be called 3005SVVOT the second point will be called 3005S W072 and so on Even if for some reason the observer must change direction somewhere along the transect all points surveyed on that half transect will still be named according to the original direction of travel in this case they will all contain SW Note Traveling due north from the origin point would yield points with NN in their names due south would yield points with SS and so on Once the direction of off trail travel has been determined use pacing to measure 100 m in the indicated direction Use vinyl flagging to mark the route with flags spaced such that the next flag is visible from each flag Stop at 100 m and use a different color flag to mark the first point count station Then conduct a point count following the instructions in SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts After conducting the first point count continue walking in the same cardinal or semi cardinal direction followed to reach the first point count station Fifty meters out from the point count station leave two flags of the same color as the route marking flags right n
205. he receiver Contact NCCN GIS staff for background map creation imports and proper configuration settings IN and OUT buttons to zoom in and out Use the scroll arrows To view a background map in the GPS receiver use the to move around the map and to set a center point for zooming in and out A black triangle vvill shovv your present position the triangle is really big and it is unclear if the triangle can be made smaller Zooming out beyond a certain scale will show a more general map Zooming in to the scale set during map creation in MobileMapper Office will show more detail Note The black cursor on the background map will not zoom in beyond 10 m on the display Navigation to a Target Location Use map compass and the background map to navigate as close as possible to a target location Switch to the Position screen using the NAV button to read current position coordinates and check them against the target coordinates Use the position screen and a coordinate averaging to fine tune your location The GOTO option in the receiver is useful to create a bearing and heading from a current position to a target location 1 Push the NAV button until the background map displays 2 If the GPS is receiving a minimum of four satellites a black arrow cursor will display your current location 3 Use the arrow scroll keys to move the center of the cross shaped selection cursor to the location to which you want to t
206. he sky as possible using offsets from better satellite reception areas to the target location and using an external antenna Signal to Noise Ratio SNR This is out of a user s control although adjusting for less multipath also will create a better SNR GPS file names should be recorded on hardcopy datasheets or in field computers GPS field coordinates coordinates shown on a GPS receiver while a GPS is receiving satellite signals and datum also should be recorded on hardcopy datasheets In the event a GPS file is lost or corrupted the coordinates recorded in the field from the GPS unit display window will become the best measure of location Be aware that these coordinates cannot be differentially corrected and are in the coordinate system and datum that were chosen for the unit s display 2 Thales MobileMapper Operating Instructions Contact NCCN GIS staff to have MobileMapper Office software installed and to have MobileMapper GPS receivers initialized The User Manual pdf available under the Help section of MobileMapper Office is a useful reference 70 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Battery Options MobileMapper GPS receivers use two AA batteries These will last approximately 8 hours with the backlight on and 14 16 hours with the backlight off External Antenna MobileMapper GPS units have internal antenna at the top of the unit External antennas are not nece
207. hewan_Julia Institute for Bird Populations Intern Field biolagist Siegel_Rodney Institute for Bird Populations Staff Biologist rsiegel birdpop org 415 663 2051 Wilkerson_Bob Institute for Bird Populations Staff Biologist bwilkerson birdpop org 415 663 2051 Dolrenry_Stephanie Institute for Bird Populations Intern Field biologist By selecting a contact record and clicking on the View edit button or by double clicking on a contact record the following popup is opened in edit mode Once edits are accepted with the Done button the user may either page through the records using the record navigator at the bottom of the form or may search for a particular name in the dropdown pick list View and edit contact information Search Kuntz Bob Close Filter View all contacts Filter by search Firstname Boo 0606000 Edit record Newrecord Undo Done Middle initial Work phone 360 856 5700 ext 368 Last name Kuntz Email robert kunzGnpsgov Organization NPS NOCA l Fax 360 856 1934 Positionvtitle Wildlife Biologist Home Location HO Sedro Woolley WA 98264 gt Mobile Comments Contact ID Created 8 2 2005 1 59 10 PM Active v Project code 03 Last updated by SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification 91 Database Backups If you respond Yes to the backup prompt a window will open to allow you to indicate where to save the file The Data bac
208. hey move you will not mistake them for additional individuals Do not forget to record the common species they re easy to tune out as you are concentrating on detecting and identifying rarer species When estimating distances to birds do not round to the nearest 5 or 10 m make your best estimate to the nearest meter Reference Cited Sibley D A 2003 The Sibley field guide to birds of western North America Alfred A Knopf New York 471 p Park Transect Date Observer SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts 59 NCCN Landbirds Point Count Conditions Form Noise 1 5 Temp C Wind 0 6 Rain 1 4 Clouds Point Comment Transect Comments Noise Code Explanation No noise Slight noise but probably not missing birds Moderate noise might be missing some high pitched songs calls of distant birds Substantial noise detection radius is probably substantially reduced Wind Code Beaufort Scale Loud noise probably detecting only the closest loudest birds Explanation Calm smoke rises vertically 2 km h Light air smoke drifts 2 5 km h Light breeze wind felt on face leaves rustle 6 12 km h Gentle breeze leaves and twigs in constant motion 13 19 km h Moderate breeze small branches move raises loose paper dust rises 20 29 km h Fresh breeze small trees sway 30 39 km h
209. hiving Posting and distribution Distribute products as planned and or post to NPS clearinghouses Archival and records management Review analog and digital files for retention or destruction according to NPS Director s Order 19 Retained files are renamed and stored as needed Season close out Review and document needed improvements to project procedures or infrastructure complete administrative reports and develop work plans for the coming season B Pre Season Preparations for Information Management Set up Project Workspace A section of the networked file server at each host park is reserved for this project and access permissions are established so that project staff members have access to needed files within this workspace Prior to each season the NPS Lead should make sure that network accounts are established for each new staff member and that the 4 Data Handling Analysis and Reporting 13 Data Manager is notified to ensure access to the project workspace and databases Additional details are provided in SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records Management GPS Loading and Preparation The GIS Specialist and Project Lead should work together to ensure that target coordinates and data dictionaries are loaded into the GPS units prior to the onset of fieldwork and that GPS download software is available and ready for use Additional details on GPS use and GPS data handling are provided in SOP 1
210. hose call is a high sharp pik note Groups of birds that we will often encounter in the field that have less well defined songs and calls include hawks and falcons grouse and quail owls woodpeckers flycatchers jays and crows and chickadees particularly CBCH The general rule to follow for distinguishing between songs and calls for all species is to defer to vocalization descriptions in The Sibley Field Guide to Birds of Western North America Sibley 2003 with a few clarifications described as follows SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts 57 Hawks and falcons Never sing Regard all vocalizations as calls Grouse and quail Low hoot of SOGR and drumming of RUGR classified as song all other vocalizations classified as calls Quark of MOUQ and Chi ca go of CAQU classed as songs all other vocalizations are calls Owls Songs are defined as the typical series of hoots a male defending territory would give This does not include any of the female and juvenile calls The NOPO s submarine sonar vocalizations and FLOW s poop are included as songs Woodpeckers Songs are limited to rattles for most species Calls are defined as all contact calls drumming and any other vocalizations For NOFL and PIWO the similar sounding wuk wuk wuk wuk wuk vocalizations are classified as songs all other vocalizations are calls Flycatchers Well defined by Sibley Typical two and three note vocalizations from empidonax flycatchers
211. ial Considerations for Small Parks Detailed instructions for collecting location coordinates are not provided in this SOP but instead are presented in SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data 1 Establishing a New Transect A Day Before Conducting Point Counts A pair of observers will split up to conduct the two halves of a single transect during each morning of sampling For each transect observers will be given maps and coordinates indicating a transect origin point that lies on a trail or road Observers should make every effort to reach this point the afternoon before the planned survey If camp has been established somewhere prior to reaching the transect origin the observers may be tempted to forego visiting the site until the morning of the survey but this should be avoided as it is likely to lead to delays and problems the following morning if the point proves difficult to locate Additionally by timing the trip back from the origin point to camp observers can determine with certainty what time they will need to set out towards the point in the morning The first time a transect is surveyed the serially alternating portion of the sample design ensures that this will happen for at least the first 5 years of the project the observers should mark the origin point and the first survey point in each direction along the transect Instructions for installing permanent markers are provided in Section 4 Installing Permanent Markers of this
212. iate However after 15 years of sampling if some of the rotating panels have only two years and others have three years of observations two estimates for rotating panel variance would be most appropriate Example Input File An example input file testcasefull csv is provided with the software The first page of the example input file is displayed in Table A6 1 Running the pre processor PreBirdTrend In order for BirdTrend to run properly and to provide correct results the data have to meet certain basic requirements Other elements of the data may meet the basic requirements but not be ideal for statistical analysis The pre processor PreBirdTrend was designed to screen the input for these details PreBirdTrend evaluates and provides summary information for each species Appendix 6 153 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 and park in the input file including warnings for improper variance groups or other problematic data PreBirdTrend must be run prior to running BirdTrend Two user named files are output by PreBirdTrend The first file is a report providing summary tables of the input data as well as e Errors in the file that will prevent BirdTrend from running e Warnings on elements of the input file that are not ideal and e Notes which are merely informational Note that this file may be quite large if many species in multiple parks are included The file is a tab delimited ASCII file which can easily be
213. ib according to document sensitivity Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Naming Conventions In all cases file names should follow these guidelines No spaces or special characters in the file name Use the underbar character to separate file name components Try to limit file names to 30 characters or fewer up to a maximum of 50 characters Dates should be formatted as Y YY YMMDD Correspondence files should be named as YYYYMMDD AuthorName subject ext As appropriate include the project code for example BDa03 network code or park code and year in the file name Examples NCCN BDa03 2007 Annual report pdf NCCN BDa03 2007 Field season report doc NCCN BDa03 2007 Certification report doc References Cited Boetsch J R Christoe B and Holmes R E 2005 Data management plan for the North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program USDI National Park Service Port Angeles WA 88 p Available at http www nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt cfm North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2005a GIS Product Specifications USDI National Park Service Available at http vvvvvv 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2005b GIS Naming Conventions USDI National Park Service Available at http vv
214. iegel R B and McLaughlin J 2005 Modification No 6 cooperative agreement between National Park Service North Cascades National Park Complex The Institute for Bird Populations and Western Washington University National Park Service agreement number H9471011196 Stevenson J Jenkins K and Siegel R B 2003 Cooperative agreement between United States Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Corvalis OR and The Institute for Bird Populations USGS FRESC agreement number 03WRAC0040 Stevenson J Jenkins K and Siegel R B 2004 Modification No 1 cooperative agreement between United States Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Corvalis OR and The Institute for Bird Populations USGS FRESC agreement number 03VVRAC0040 TerraStat Consulting Group and USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center 2004 Protocols for analyzing and reporting trends in avian abundance in North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Park Purchase Order No 4 FRSAH 00023 TerraStat Consulting Group and USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center 2005 Modify computer program BirdTrend Requisition No 6 9355 0004 Draft Protocol and Standard Operating Procedures Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Jenkins K Kuntz R C II Boetsch J Schaberl J and Happe P 2007 Landbird monitoring protocol for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network NCCN Vers
215. iew Quality review and data validation using database tools Project Lead August October Section 4E SOP 14 SOP 14 Prepare coordinate summaries and or GIS layers and data sets as needed for spatial data review GIS Specialist By September 15 Joint quality review of GIS data determine best coordinates for subsequent mapping and field work Project Lead and GIS Specialist September October Metadata Section 4F SOPs 15 and 19 Identify any sensitive information contained in the data set SOP 19 Project Lead and NPS Lead August October Update project metadata records SOP 15 Project Lead and NPS Lead August October Data Certification and Delivery Section 4G SOPs 14 18 19 20 Certify the season s data and complete the certification Project Lead November report SOP 14 Deliver certification report certified data digital NPS Lead By November 30 photographs and updated metadata to Data Manager SOP 18 Upload certified data into master project database store Data Manager December January data files in NCCN Digital Library SOP 20 Notify Project Lead of uploaded data ready for analysis and reporting Data Manager By January 15 Update project GIS data sets layers and associated metadata records GIS Specialist December January Finalize and parse metadata records store in NCCN Digital Library SOP 15 Data Manager and GIS Specialist
216. ile path changes or if a user wants to connect to a different back end data file Table links can be updated using the Data Table Connections tool available by clicking on the Connect data tables button on the main menu Browse to the desired back end file and then click on Update links to refresh the connection Update Data Table Connections y etna al i Back end data Back end database file including working project data and lookup tables Current name Landbirds BDa03 be 2006 OLYM pre cert mdb Path C My Documents WorkspaceLandbirds 03 5 beiLandbirds BDa03 be 2006 OLYM pre cert New file Landbirds BDa03 be 2006 OLYM mdb Browse Path C My Documents Workspace Landbirds_BDa03 database Landbirds_BDa03_be_2006_OLYM mdb 92 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank SOP 13 After the Field Season 93 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 13 After the Field Season Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This Standard Operating Procedure identifies steps that must be completed before NCCN landbird monitoring field crews complete the field season Record needed repairs or replacement parts on the equipment checkout sheet in the appropriate column
217. ill worth collecting in part because the incremental cost of doing so is very low once the observers have already hiked to the transect starting point to collect the trend points Data from the extra points will be included in some of the summary report tables see SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting In the small parks the 350 m grids will yield 54 individual point count stations at San Juan Island National Historical Park fig 2 and 91 point count stations at Lewis and Clark National Historical Park fig 3 After the 2006 pilot season we may determine that we have selected more sampling points than can feasibly be surveyed at LEWI given current funding and staffing constraints If this is the case we will discard some of the points in future years perhaps eliminating points in one or more of the park s constituent landholdings or one or more of the park s habitats Either way the area of inference would be reduced somewhat 8 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network A Mount Rainier National Park EXPLANATION O Lovv elevation points 800 m C Olympic National Park El Mid elevation points between 800 and 1 350 m A High elevation points 51 350 m EXPLANATION Roads Low elevation points 650 m Trails El Mid elevation points between 650 and 1 350 m A High elevation points 51 350 m Roads Trails Figure 1 Continued British Cam
218. indexed text 20 Location_name text 50 UTME_public double UTMN_ public double Public_type indexed text 50 publishable Public_scale indexed text 50 Elevation double Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 14500 Elev_units text 2 Default m Elev source text 20 Slope deg int Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 Aspect_deg int Azimuth_to_point Direction_changed Reason_for_change Travel_notes Dominant slope aspect in degrees corrected for declination Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 360 Or 1 int Azimuth degrees declination corrected to the sampling point from the previous point to facilitate relocating the position 999 signifies points along the trail Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 360 Or 999 bit text 200 text Indicates whether the azimuth to the point was changed to accommodate navigation Brief comments about why the azimuth was changed Comments about navigation to the point kept up to date as conditions change 182 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Location desc Location status Location notes Loc established Loc discontinued Loc created date Loc updated Loc updated by Trail or road text Environmental description of the sampling location indexed text 10 Status of the sample location blank for incidental locations text Other notes about the samp
219. inear regression lines as dotted lines Table 1 displays the results of the analysis of trend for the AMRO example For this example the average trend is not significant after 10 years but is significant after 20 years In addition to the overall regional trend test it may be of interest to look at the trend slopes by elevation or by habitat Figure 4 displays two plots of the cumulative distributions of estimated slopes CDF plot the top by elevation strata and the bottom by habitat The median slopes are the same and the distributions of slopes are not widely different This is as expected because identical trends were added for the different categories With real data these plots might be more interesting 2 1 Appendix 4 141 Panel 1 Figure 1 Example of AMRO data log transformed densities for panels 1 annual panel and 2 rotating panel Solid lines connect the data dotted lines are estimated linear trends 142 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Panel 3 z 7 c o Q z I I I I 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Year Panel 4 T D O c o Q z Figure 2 Example of AMRO data log transformed densities for rotating panels 3 and 4 Solid lines connect the data dotted lines are estimated linear trends LN Density Appendix 4 Panel 5 LN Density
220. ing Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 42 p pso ynoN se reodde s r ds uouruioo poAne o1 Luew os pojo duroo Aq erured ATUO sem MAT Je A1ojuoAur parqpue v Inq syed 19410 v 10 p sn sov o ye nu pi s po uoy d yi pirg owy ym pojueuinoop poys s r ds yons yo uonoojop Syed pojeorpur oy A10juoaur parqpueg v SULINP poj2ojop Jou sem jeu s r ds e sojeorpur p ps0 ynoN Woy odoy pirg awy e YIM pojueurmnoop aq pinous s r ds yons jo n p ed oy ur m o o p dsns ss r ir u sr yng ed pojeorpur oy Jo eu Surmp jou SEA yey s r ds e sojeorpur o qissoq yed n ur p p st IWA v Spirg avy 3urodos 8 dOS s uuo yodoy prg reyi e yo uono duroo ou qru pojueuroop jsnui ss r q A ut Mq K1ojuoAur PITQpUR ou S rinp x1ed poyeorpur oy ur pojuourmnoop SEA Je S r ds e sojeorpur AVY A10juoAur pirqpuer oy SuLNp yd pojeorpur oy ur pojuoumoop IIM yey s r ds sojeorpur AIOWIAUT AAT z SULIOJ ejep 3 no 3urod ay uo s r ds p sn PINOYS s po 19jo 1n0 osau popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popioooswnoN 21415804 popiooosnoN dSOH sn ns tuop J2ssUq AAOZTEd osnoH popioooswnoN popiooownoN K1ojuoAu dgT KrojuoAu dgI HDAH snug4adsaA s lsnbuylo
221. inks on startup 84 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork To set defaults click on the Change button This will open up a new window where the user can enter the park datum and user name This window also appears each time the user selects the path for data entry or review to ensure that the correct user and park are indicated Set application default values Entering Data Enter and verify transect data in the following order Data Gatew 1 Point Establishment form accessed by clicking on the Point setup button in the Data Gatevvay Form m Transect Visit Log and Point Count Conditions Form and the Point Revisit Form if applicable all of which can be entered in the unified form called Data Entry Form 3 Habitat data accessed by clicking on the Habitat data button in the Data Entry Form at any point after entering transect visit log data 4 Point count data accessed by clicking on the Point count data button in the Data Entry Form at any point after entering transect visit log data When you select the Enter edit data button you will have a chance to change the default user name park and declination Make sure this information is correct each time you enter data Next you will see the Data Gateway Form which is where you will see a list of transects sample points and incidental rare bird observations
222. ints in MORA derived through GRTS sampling are shown in figure 1 Each transect will consist of approximately 10 point count stations as many as 12 in areas where foot travel is easier and faster and as few as 8 in areas where it is slower and more difficult spaced 200 m apart Transects will start at selected points along park trails and will extend perpendicularly away from the trail to yield approximately five survey points in each direction The first sampling points will be established 100 m from the trail starting point in each direction Experience conducting our inventory projects has shown that five off trail points is the maximum number that a crew member can reliably survey during a morning of work in densely forested NCCN habitats In habitats where travel is easier such as high elevation areas without forest cover each of the two observers may be able to conduct as many as 10 points in a morning In such habitats our crews will conduct as many point counts as they can complete during the morning The extra points beyond the sixth point in each direction will not contribute to Park or Network trend analysis to avoid analytical complications associated with excessively variable transect lengths but they may nevertheless yield useful information on the status and distribution of particular species Although such data are not as valuable as data from the points that will be used in trend analysis they are st
223. ion 1 0 February 2007 A report in partial fulfillment of USGS cooperative agreement 03VVRAC0040 The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Appendix 8 199 Draft NCCN Avian Monitoring Protocol and Standard Operating Procedures Scientific Reviews and Response to those Reviews Fancy S 2006 Review of Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network NCCN Prepared for S Zylstra U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Corvalis OR May 9 2006 Geissler P 2006 Review of Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network NCCN Prepared for S Zylstra U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Corvalis OR June 13 2006 Olsen A R 2006 Review of Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network NCCN Prepared for S Zylstra U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Corvalis OR June 12 2006 Siegel R B Jenkins K Kuntz R C IL 2006 Response to peer review of Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Monitoring Network NCCN Prepared S Zylstra U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Corvalis OR August 2006 200 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Par
224. ion type origin and missing an event or event is null and features markers or images were entered qa 3g Locations missing establishment dates Locations with sampling events or field coordinates or discontinued dates but without with location establishment dates qa 3h Locations loc status inconsistencies Missing loc status sampled locations with location status rejected or proposed locations with establishment dates or field coordinates and loc status proposed retired locations without discontinued dates discontinued dates on status other than retired qa 3i Locations unclassified new points Newly sampled locations with an undetermined location type location type new qa 3j Locations loc type and loc code inconsistent Locations where loc code TO and loc type lt gt origin or vice versa or where loc code rare and loc type lt gt incidental or vice versa qa_3k_Location_illogical_dates Discontinued date prior to establishment date or updated date prior to created date qa 31 Locations without coordinates Locations without coordinates qa 3m Locations without field coords Locations that have sampling events but no field coordinates no remedy required qa 3n Locations with more than one coord Locations with more than one coordinate record verify that these are intended qa 3o Locations missing travel inf
225. ipulated that NOCA produce two reports Through a cooperative agreement H9471011196 The Institute for Bird Populations IBP and NOCA produced reports summarizing recommendations of the September 2000 meeting Siegel and Kuntz 2000 and reviewed and summarized existing literature on landbird monitoring methods Siegel 2000 In 2001 NOCA was awarded a second grant from WRAC to initiate a 2 year avian research program and species inventory at NOCA Siegel and others 2002a 2004b WRAC and the National Park Service s 5 year inventory program provided the funding to inventory NOCA as well as four other parks in NCCN table 1 All inventories were completed 2001 through 2004 Siegel and others 2002a 2002b 2003 2004a 2004b 2004c 2005 Wilkerson and Siegel 2005 These inventories provided much needed quantitative data used to help develop the landbird monitoring study plan Landbird Monitoring Study Plan Siegel and Kuntz 2000 provided a summary of the first set of recommendations for designing a network wide monitoring program for breeding landbirds A temporal sampling workshop held in Olympic National Park on November 12 14 2003 further helped elucidate how the network avian monitoring design would be defined NCCN I amp M Program 2003 Since the initial workshop in 2000 NCCN I amp M Program 2000 annual meetings also have served to aid in the development of this landbird monitoring program NCCN I amp M Program 2002
226. ire additional funds every 5 years We expect the cost in 2007 dollars to be approximately 12 500 as indicated table 5 Additionally NPS will re evaluate at each 5 year period whether it is most cost effective to renew our cooperative agreement with IBP 22 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Table 5 Netvvork Five year data analysis budget for determining trends in North Coast and Cascades Abbreviations CA Cooperative Agreement NPS National Park Service USGS U S Geological Survey pp pay period Data analysis CA NPS USGS Salaries w benefits NPS Lead 2 pp MORA amp OLYM Biologists 1 pp 11 078 USGS Research Scientist 1 pp 4 200 Cooperative Agreement CA 12 500 Totals 12 500 11 078 4 200 D Protocol Revisions All protocol revisions will be documented in the revision logs Small changes to the protocol for example adding or modifying a variable will be reviewed by the Project Leads and Park Biologists or Resource Management Specialists small parks at the affected park s and approved by the Network Coordinator More drastic changes for example modifications to the sample design or analytical methods for trend detection will trigger an outside review to be conducted by the NPS Pacific West Regional Office or designated review panel as directed by the NPS Inventory and Monitoring Program Detailed instructions for making and trackin
227. ision to prevent the release of protected information the written document must include the following standard Confidentiality Agreement Confidentiality Agreement 1 agree to keep confidential any protected information that 1 may develop or othervvise acquire as part of my vvork vvith the National Park Service 1 understand that vvith regard to protected information I am an agent of the National Park Service and must not release that information Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network I also understand that by law I may not share protected information with anyone through any means except as specifically authorized by the National Park Service I understand that protected information concerns the nature and specific location of endangered threatened rare commercially valuable mineral paleontological or cultural patrimony resources such as threatened or endangered species rare features archeological sites museum collections caves fossil sites gemstones and sacred ceremonial sites Lastly I understand that protected information must not be inadvertently disclosed through any means including websites maps scientific articles presentation and speeches Note Certain States including the State of Washington have Sunshine laws that do not have exemptions for sensitive information NPS should not create confidentiality agreements or share sensitive information with these S
228. istances within 10 15 percent of the actual distance Accuracy may be reduced somewhat for particularly distant birds or objects gt 100 m but this is not of great concern as far off detections have less effect on detectability models than do closer detections B Estimating Distance to Singing Birds When Field Technicians have become relatively proficient at estimating distances to seen birds they should start estimating distances to singing but unseen birds The importance of this skill cannot be overstated as the greatest majority of birds detected during point counts can be heard but not seen Estimating distances to unseen birds is challenging because birds can sound louder or quieter depending on how far away they are how much vegetation is present to muffle the sound how loud they are actually singing and the acoustic properties of the particular species vocalizations Nevertheless observers can greatly improve their estimates with practice As with estimating distances to seen birds measuring the actual distance to unseen birds is needed to assess the accuracy of the estimates Measuring distances to unseen birds can be quite challenging especially in habitats where thick undergrowth makes walking noisy or difficult Singing birds will often retreat as the observer approaches resulting in no measurement or in a measurement that does not really reflect the distance to the bird when the estimate was made A useful
229. ition screen to make finer adjustments in navigation The position screen will show a running average of a current position and will show the duration and average UTMs during that duration Relatively small movement like shoulder width distance will reset the duration clock and create a new running coordinate average 3 Transferring GPS Receiver Data to a Computer Processing differentially correctable GPS rover files requires a computer a data transfer cable and GPS software GPS receivers typically come with manufacturer specific software and data transfer cables Each software package operates differently but the basic process is the same It is extremely important that whenever field crews return from the field GPS files are transferred from GPS receivers to computers or network folders that are routinely backed up Files should be transferred to an appropriately named folder such as Raw or Backup Files can be selected one by one for differential correction vvith base station files Base stations and associated files necessary to correct rover GPS files can be selected via the GPS softvvare interface vvith the internet or through ftp sites if provided by the base station of interest Contact NCCN GIS staff to help set up GPS software projects for GPS data processing and the default settings in the software Note Files collected on the MobileMapper GPS are termed jobs and files saved via MobileMapper Office a
230. ive Agreement CA Totals 13 513 2 146 2 716 3 531 1 200 1 033 5 399 8 842 1 800 18 950 6 604 4 445 6 461 3 599 14 118 1 090 6 315 12 467 70 157 10 730 33 342 Annual reports for the NCCN landbird monitoring program will tabulate and summarize raw count results but in the interest of keeping annual costs down will not include complex data analysis At the end of every 5 year interval when each of the alternating panels has been sampled and the annual panel has been sampled five times we will conduct a comprehensive data analysis This analysis will have two major components Estimation of species specific detectability and application of appropriate correction factors to point count data Trend detection Additionally for the 5 year reports we will use linear regression to assess temporal trends in density estimates at the small parks SAJH and LEWI which will involve statistical procedures that differ from those used to assess trends in the larger parks because of the differing sample designs at those parks Finally the 5 year reports also will include assessments of any apparent distributional changes of species in the parks as well as an evaluation of temporal change in density and or distribution in the context of results from other regional and or national monitoring programs These substantial additions to the annual data analysis and reporting workload will requ
231. juosoJdoi uoo18 1481 S qqa piepuejs 3109 juesoudoi so qe uoo18 Jeq soun Aq pojuosoudord so qe sdrqsuone os seqe ep 12ofoud n Jo ure38erqq digsuone os Au m n 1002 LZ SuriojuoJA puiqpue T NOON Appendix 7 175 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Data Dictionary Required fields are denoted with an asterisk tbl Analysis Notes Sample location specific comments related to data analysis Index Index columns Location_ID pk_tbl_Analysis_Notes primary Location_ID Location_ID Analysis_year Field name Index key Data type Description Location ID primary FK text 50 Sampling location for this event Analysis year primary text 4 The analysis year e g 2007 Is included bit Indicates whether or not the sampling location is included in Default True Analysis notes the analysis for the specified year text Comments about this sample location with regard to analysis tbl Coordinates Coordinate data for sample locations Index Index columns pk Coordinates primary udx Coord index unique Coord label Coord ID Location ID Event ID Coord label Coord type Coord type Coord updated Coord updated Datum Datum Event ID Event ID Field coord source Field coord source GIS loc ID GIS loc ID Location ID Location ID Field name Index key Data type Description Coord ID primary text 50 U
232. k woodlands plant communities that are fairly rare in western Washington Atkinson and Sharpe 1985 and host distinct bird communities Lewis and Sharpe 1987 Siegel and others 2002 Lewis and Clark National Historical Park includes lowland wetlands as well as coastal and upland forests and extends our program s area of inference substantially southward We have opted to exclude Ebey s Landing and Fort Vancouver from this monitoring program because they provide very limited habitat for breeding birds National Parks in the NCCN can fulfill vital roles as both refuges for bird species dependent on late successional forest conditions and as reference sites for assessing the effects of land use and land cover changes on bird populations throughout the larger Pacific Northwest region Silsbee and Peterson 1991 These changes may result from regional activities such as land conversion and forest management or from broader scale processes such as global climate change Indeed monitoring population trends at control sites in national parks is especially important because the parks are among the few sites in the United States where population trends due to large scale regional or global change patterns are relatively unconfounded with local changes in land use Simons and others 1999 Additionally long term monitoring of landbirds throughout the NCCN is expected to provide information that will inform future decisions about important managemen
233. ks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank Manuscript approved for publication March 5 2007 Prepared by the U S Geological Survey Publishing Netvvork Linda Rogers Sharon L Wahlstrom For more information concerning the research in this report contact the Director Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center U S Geological Survey 777 NW 9th Street Corvallis Oregon 97330 http fresc usgs gov za USGS Siegel and others Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Techniques and Methods 2 A6
234. kups must be made on a regular basis perhaps default path is the same as the back end database file and the every day that new data are entered to save time incase of default name is that for the back end file with a date stamp mistakes or database file corruption Depending on application appended to the end Backups are to be made in a subfolder defaults you will be prompted upon opening or closing the created exclusively for backups in order to clearly separate application as to whether or not you want to make a backup If the working back end database file from the backups These you choose not to make a backup at this time you may make periodic backup files should be compressed to save drive one at any point by clicking on the Backup data button on space and may be deleted once enough subsequent backups the main menu are made All such backups should be deleted after the data have passed the quality review and have been certified Create Backup p Save As L L a Would you like to make a backup copy of the data e aas j mem il 3 Landbrds BDa03 be 2006 OLYM mdb w EM Documents Desktop m My Documents VE esse mmun sw Save as iype access mdb Cancel 74 Link Back End Data File When first installing the front end application the user will need to establish the table links to the back end database Users also may need to refresh the links if the back end f
235. labeled View summary report This button opens the formatted information for each query the last run time the number of records returned at last run time a description SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification 101 report can be exported from the database and included as an attachment to the certification report by either clicking on File gt Export on the Access menu or by right clicking on the report object and selecting Export Select Rich Text Format rtf to retain formatting to facilitate importing it into the certification report in Microsoft Word and any remedy details that were typed in by the user This tbl QA Results Quality Assuranceand Data Validation Results Run time 03 29 2006 17 02 QA by Records Query description Remedy details Missing park code project code stratification date stratum name stratum definition Stratum record updated date prior te created date Massing site code park code or stratum ID Park code inconsistent with strata table Duplicate records on site code and park code Missing site status retired sites without discontinued dates discontinued dates on status other than retired or discontinued dates without establishment dates Discontinued date prior to establishment date or updated date prior to created date Active sites without a panel type Missing site name no remedy required Massing site ID except where loc type incidental location c
236. ld only be rendered at a scale that does not reveal their exact position for example 1 100 000 maximum scale If a large scale close up map is to be created using exact coordinates for example for field crew navigation etc the map should be clearly marked with the following phrase Internal NPS Use Only Not For Release The Data Manager and or GIS Specialist can provide technical assistance as needed to apply coordinate offsets or otherwise edit data products for sensitive information Presentations and Reports Public or general use reports and presentations should adhere to the following guidelines 1 Do not list exact coordinates or specific location information in any text figure table or graphic in the report or presentation If a list of coordinates is necessary use only offset coordinates and clearly indicate that coordinates have been purposely offset to protect the resource s as required by law and NPS policy 2 Useonly general use maps as specified in the section on maps and other GIS output If a report is intended for internal use only these restrictions do not apply Hovvever each page of the report should be clearly marked vvith the follovving phrase Internal NPS Use Only Not For Release Voucher Specimens Specimens of protected taxa should only be collected as allowed by law Labels for specimens should be clearly labeled as containing sensitive information by containing the followin
237. le location datetime Date the sample location was established datetime Date the sample location was discontinued datetime Time stamp for record creation Default Now indexed datetime Date of the last update to this record text 50 Person who made the most recent edits indexed text 15 Indicates whether or not the sample location is along a road or trail tbl Markers Markers placed at a sample location to facilitate relocation Index Index columns Location ID Location ID Marker code Marker code Marker status Marker status Marker type Marker type pk Markers primary Marker ID Field name Index key Data type Description Marker ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each marker record Location ID Marker code Marker type Marker substrate Height cm Offset dist m Offset azimuth Marker status Marker notes Marker installed Marker updated Marker removed Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv indexed FK text 50 Sample location indexed text 12 Field code given to the marker indexed text 20 Type of marker used text 50 Substrate of the marker e g tree shrub ground int Height above ground level in centimeters Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 double Offset distance in meters Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 int Azimuth degrees declination corrected from the actual sampling point to the marker Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 360
238. le name from Post processing Job1 to for example M060710 72 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 14 Push ENTER Note if the default data dictionary is being used then the screen will display choices Point Line Area Grid Note Positions will not begin to collect in a file until the GPS unit begins receiving three or four satellite signals Note Hold the unit vertically so that the antenna is oriented correctly Once the GPS unit receives sufficient satellite signals 15 Push ENTER The screen will change from showing feature type information for example New Feature X XX XPlot to a screen for feature data collection that shows data dictionary attributes that need data entry logging time number of satellites and PDOP Note The MobileMapper does not show the number of points collected in a file like Trimble files do Try to watch the elapsed time window and keep an eye on the PDOP Try to collect at least 3 minutes of PDOP lt 8 0 make your best guess Example of an attribute called depth that needs a value entered depth 0 0 Logging Time on Point 00 00 14 Num Sat P m s i Data Entry Using a Data Dictionary If a data dictionary is being used 1 Scroll to the proper feature and then push ENTER 2 Use the scroll keys and Enter button to t
239. lect record enter and verify data IBP Technicians Data Manager Consultant on data management activities John Boetsch Data Manager OLYM GIS Specialist Consultant on spatial data collection GPS use and spatial analysis techniques Facilitate spatial data development and map output generation Work with Project Lead and Data Analyst to analyze spatial data and develop metadata for spatial data products Primary steward of GIS data and products Roger Hoffman GIS Specialist OLYM Ensure project compliance with park requirements Review reports data and other project deliverables Network e Review annual reports for completeness and compliance with I amp M standards and NCCN Network Coordinator Coordinator expectations Park Biologists Facilitate logistics planning and coordination Park Wildlife Biologists and Resource Managers Park Curator Receive and catalogue voucher specimens Receive and archive copies of annual reports analysis reports and other publications Facilitate archival of other project records for example original field forms etc Park Curators and Collections Managers at OLYM NOCA and MORA USGS Liaison Consultant on technical issues related to project sampling design statistical analyses or other issues related to changes in protocol and SOPs Kurt Jenkins Biologist USGS FRESC These individuals act as coordinators and primary points of contact for this p
240. levation strata are also given The results of the trend test Appendix 6 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 for mean slope across all panels and elevations are provided including the observed t statistic degrees of freedom and the two tailed p value If requested and appropriate a trend test combined across parks is also included The slope output file SLOPEFILE txt is also a tab delimited ASCII file and should be opened in the same way Table A6 8 displays the first page of the slope file output for testcasefull csv The file contains the slope estimate for each transect in the input file by species Elevation variance group panel and park are also included as columns The summary output file SUMMARYFILE txt is also a tab delimited ASCII file and should be opened in the same way Table A6 9 displays the first page of the summary file output for testcasefull csv The file contains a one line summary of the trend test per species park combination as well as a combined test if it was calculated If requested cumulative distribution plots are also output by BirdTrend These are encapsulated metafiles which can be input as pictures into a MSVVord document An example CDF plot is shown in Figure A6 1 This CDF plot for example shows that the medians cumulative probability 0 50 are identical at zero for the three parks but there are a wider range of slopes at OLYM 157 158 Landbird Monitoring Protoc
241. lications to update data disposition and quality descriptions and to describe any changes in collection methods analysis approaches or quality assurance for the project Specific procedures for creating parsing and posting the metadata record are provided in NCCN Metadata Development Guidelines North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2006 General procedures are as follows 1 After the annual data quality review has been performed and the data are ready for certification the Project Lead or a designee updates the Metadata Interview Form a The Metadata Interview Form greatly facilitates metadata creation by structuring the required information into a logical arrangement of 15 primary questions many with additional sub questions b The first year a new copy of the NCCN Metadata Interview Form should be downloaded Otherwise the form from the previous year can be used as a starting point in which case the Track Changes tool in Microsoft Word should be activated in order to make edits obvious to the person who will be updating the XML record c Complete the Metadata Interview Form and maintain it in the project workspace Much of the interview form can be filled out by cutting and pasting material from other documents for example reports protocol narrative sections and SOPs d The Data Manager can help answer questions about the Metadata Interview Form Deliver the completed interview form t
242. llect digital photographs of the point location and will write a brief narrative description of the point location to facilitate re locating the point in subsequent years see Point Establishment Form SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points After completing their fieldwork each day partners will review each other s data forms for missing or incorrectly recorded data discuss any interesting or surprising bird detections and complete a Transect Visit Log data form provided in SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points Whenever crew members detect species thought to be rare or difficult to sample in the park they will complete Rare Bird Report Forms including descriptions of the birds appearance and behavior and geographical coordinates These reports cover not only birds detected during point counts but also birds detected while sampling vegetation hiking between transects relaxing at camp in the evening or at any other time during the field season including the pre season training session We provide a sample field form for rare bird reports in SOP 8 Reporting Rare Bird Detections E End of Season Procedures At the end of the season the Field Lead will prepare and archive a brief generally not more than three pages field season report that Clearly enumerates which transects were completed during the season Describes any logistic difficulties
243. lly numbered 001 002 003 etc These numbers should be used wherever the data forms require the point to be indicated Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network When conducting surveys in the small parks complete the Point Establishment Form according to the instructions provided in SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points except for the following fields Point Type All points should be recorded as Survey points Bearing to Point Leave blank Change of Direction Leave blank Reason Leave blank Notes regarding travel between points Be sure to indicate which point or other landmark you are approaching the survey point from Permanent Marker Information Leave all associated fields blank Survey points at SAJH and LEWI should not be marked with permanent markers At the end of each day s work at the small parks each observer should complete a Transect Visit Log The data form should be completed according to the instructions in SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points with the following exceptions Observer2 Leave blank Transect Arm Code Leave blank Both SAJH and LEWI include some habitats and potentially bird species that survey crews may not have encountered during training in the large parks The Field Lead should ensure that surveyors are prepared to identify correctly any such habitats or bird species wh
244. lop the protocol and SOPs and provides a list of these documents Choosing and Prioritizing Vital Signs for Long Term Ecological Monitoring In several stages individual parks of the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN identified topics vital signs for ecological monitoring and prioritized them In the first stage parks held Vital Signs meetings in which each park enlisted the help of outside experts to identify and justify a list of vital signs and their associated monitoring questions All seven parks in the NCCN completed their Vital Signs Meetings by June 2001 Next priorities were set by scientific discipline across parks in February 2002 and within individual parks by June 2003 All seven NCCN parks identified landbird monitoring as a high priority Vital Sign For a more complete summarization of the Vital Signs process see Weber and others 2005 North Coast and Cascades Network Vital Signs Monitoring Plan Landbird Inventories Parallel to the above Vital Signs identification and prioritization process in January 2000 the Wildlife Research Advisory Committee WRAC of Seattle City Light awarded North Cascades National Park Service Complex NOCA a grant to develop plans for a long term monitoring program The WRAC stipulated that NOCA use part of the grant to host a round table meeting of landbird monitoring experts to produce recommendations for this plan This meeting was held in September 2000 The WRAC grant further st
245. lope in response to climate change may not be discernible by simply looking at aggregate population trends 2 Sampling Design A Rationale for Selecting this Sampling Design Over Others In concordance with other NPS bird monitoring protocols that have recently been developed or are currently under development Coonan and others 2001 Peitz and others 2002 Siegel and Wilkerson 2005 this protocol surveys landbirds with 5 minute point counts incorporating distance sampling Reynolds and others 1980 Fancy 1997 Nelson and Fancy 1999 Buckland and others 2001 Rosenstock and others 2002 Incorporating distance sampling Buckland and others 2001 into point counts facilitates the estimation of detection probability a parameter that may vary greatly by species habitat observer or other factors Estimates of detection probability permit the estimation of absolute density or abundance of birds across the landscape much more meaningful metrics than the relative abundance indices that can be produced without methods that quantify detectability Distance sampling is rapidly becoming a standard method of the NPS Inventory and Monitoring Program for estimating detection biases associated with avian monitoring Fancy and Sauer 2000 We chose a largely off trail sampling design for monitoring birds in the NCCN For the safety and logistical reasons outlined below each of the point count transects emanates from a park road a small p
246. ly closed canopy habitats table 1 once with the data filter set to include only detection at relatively open canopy habitats table 1 and once with all detections of the species included Then use criteria including AIC model fit statistics and biological reasonableness of the models to determine whether a better model was fit by separating or combining the two groups of habitats The same general approach may be used to assess other potential sources of variation in detectability including observer and year Other sources may be important as well there is no substitute for thorough data exploration Alternately the multiple covariates distance sampling MCDS engine in the Distance software may be used to model potential sources of variation in detectability as covariates of the scale parameter of the key function Using this method the covariates are assumed to influence the Table 1 Recommended grouping of North Coast and Cascades Network habitats for detectability modeling Most habitat categories come from Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 but a few were developed as part of separate classification efforts LEWI and SAJH Vegetation Type Code Grouping Alaska Yellow cedar ALYC Dense Beach BEAH Sparse Big Leaf Maple BIGM Dense Black Cottonwood BLCO Dense Conifer Deciduous Mix CODM Dense Developed DEVO Sparse Mixed Douglas fir Western Hemlock DFWH Dense Douglas fir DOFI Dense Dune Grass DUGR Sparse Engelmann Spruc
247. map Distance from previous point The approximate distance based on pacing from the previous point to the indicated landscape feature Notes regarding travel between points Provide any additional notes that might assist subsequent observers in finding their way to the correct place to conduct the point count Photo Frame Enter the frame number on the digital camera if a photograph was taken at the sample point Description Enter a brief description of the contents of the photograph or leave blank if no photograph was taken File name Enter the final digital file name of the photograph after returning to the office downloading the camera and renaming the file s Leave blank if no photograph was taken Conspicuous Features Seen from Point Description Indicate up to three visible features that will help future observers confirm they are at the correct location Visible features could include permanent geographical features such as peaks or ridgelines or conspicuous features closer to the point such as boulders bodies of water or large distinctive trees Distance m Indicate the distance from the survey point to the feature Bearing Provide the declinated compass bearing from the survey point to the feature Frame Enter the frame number on the digital camera if a photograph was taken of the feature Write the final digital file name in the margin upon returning to the office downloading the camer
248. mate the variance as follows 8 N n 14 5 Varg n td where 2 5 18 the sample variance of slopes for panel j in elevation strata 7 For the general case where all rotating panels can all be assumed to have the same variance the variance formula becomes N n 1 2 Var y m s 7 where is the number of sites in the annual panel in elevation strata 1 5 1s the sample variance of all slopes in the annual panels for strata i sh is the sample variance of all slopes in rotating panels for strata i For a given species if there are less than two non zero sites in either the annual or rotating panels or both but at least two sites total the annual and rotating panel sites will be combined to calculate one variance If there is only one variance calculated the formula reduces to N n i Var y 8 2 Si n i 140 The general case for rotating panels shovvn above vvill only be used if the number of years sampled for each site in the set of rotating panels is the same If years are missing for some sites or if trend is being analyzed in a year that is not a multiple of five variances should be estimated separately for the sets of sites that have different numbers of revisits where possible This might not be possible for example if most sites have 3 years of data and only one site is missing year of data In thi
249. migratory bird species and other bird species breeding in North America have stimulated interest in avian population trends and mechanisms driving those trends Robbins and others 1989 DeSante and George 1994 Peterjohn and others 1995 Data from the North American Breeding Bird Survey indicate that many landbird populations in Pacific Northwest coniferous forests are declining Andelman and Stock 1994a 1994b Sharp 1996 Saab and Rich 1997 Altman 2000 2005 Sauer and others 2001 Indeed Altman 2005 reported that 30 species exhibit statistically significant recent and or long term declining trends while only 14 species in the region have statistically significant increasing trends Threats to bird populations breeding in Pacific Northwest coniferous forests include outright habitat loss as well as forest management practices that discourage the development of old growth conditions Since European settlement large tracts of low elevation coniferous forest have been lost to residential and agricultural development with the overall extent of old growth forest reduced by more than one half since World War II Bolsinger and Waddell 1993 Landscapes that have been managed for timber production are now dominated by early and mid successional forests Bunnell and others 19977 and exhibit increased fragmentation as well as a variety of altered structural characteristics that likely affect bird community composition and structure M
250. mote parts of NOCA and OLYM in particular where just a single transect could require over a week of a crew s time to reach sample and return Given the tight financial constraints on the implementation of this project attempting to reach such remote places would consume an inordinate proportion of available resources and would greatly reduce the number of transects that could be surveyed each year 3 Navigation Tall dense forests of the Pacific Northwest wilderness areas make relocating plots with the use of Global Positioning Systems unreliable Furthermore there is great sensitivity over the visual impacts of excessively marking plots to facilitate relocating them in successive years Hence there are realistic questions about the repeatability of surveys in remote areas of the park 4 Diverse habitats All three large parks span enormous elevational gradients producing substantial intra park variation in avian community composition breeding phenology and average date of accessibility by crew members The parks particularly NOCA but the others as well also contain ecologically important east west gradients in habitat conditions and avian community composition Because each of the five parks in the NCCN pose such different constraints in safety travel and logistics costs we utilize two separate sampling schemes one for the three large wilderness parks MORA OLYM NOCA and one for the two smaller parks SAJH LEWI In t
251. mp for record creation Default Now Stratum updated indexed datetime Date of the last update to this record Stratum updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits tbl Task List Checklist of tasks to be completed at sampling locations Index Index columns Date completed Date completed pk Task List primary Location ID Request date Task desc Field name Index key Data type Description Location ID primary FK text 50 Sampling location Request date primary datetime Date of the task request Default Now Task desc primary text 100 Brief description of the task Date completed indexed datetime Date the task vvas completed Task notes text Notes about the task Requested by text 50 Name of the person making the initial request Task status text 50 Status of the task Followup_by text 50 Name of the person following up on or completing the task Followup_notes text Comments regarding what was done to follow up on or complete this task tbl Training Notes Training records for project observers Index Index columns pk Training Notes primary Training ID Trainee and date unique Trainee name Training date Training type Training type Field name Index key Data type Description Training ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each training record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Trainee name unique text 50 Name of the
252. n 7 Notify the Data Manager and NPS Lead by email that the certification materials have been uploaded or otherwise sent Upon receiving the certification materials the Data Manager will Review them for completeness and work with the Project Lead if there are any questions 2 Notify the GIS Specialist if any geospatial data are submitted The GIS Specialist will then review the data and update any project GIS data sets and metadata accordingly 3 Check in the delivered products using the NCCN project tracking application 4 Store the certified products together in the NCCN Digital Library 5 Upload the certified data to the master project database 6 Notify the Project Lead that the year s data have been successfully uploaded and processed The Project Lead may then proceed with data summarization analysis and reporting 122 7 Develop parse and post the XML metadata record to the NPS Data Store 8 After a holding period of 2 years the Data Manager vvill upload the certified data to the NPS Data Store This holding period is to protect professional authorship priority and to provide sufficient time to catch any undetected quality assurance problems See SOP 20 Product Posting and Distribution Specific nstructions for Reports and Publications Annual reports and trend analysis reports will use the NPS Natural Resource Publications template a pre formatted Microsoft Word template document based
253. n and the first survey point This will save time and effort in the morning B Day of Point Count Survey As when conducting a new transect observers should be in place to conduct their first point counts at the correct location within 10 minutes of official sunrise After completing the first point count the bearing and directions provided on the Point Establishment Form from a previous year should be followed to orienteer to each successive point count station along the transect Every effort should be made to conduct point counts at all previously established point count stations before 3 5 hours after sunrise Occasionally this may not be possible however no point counts should be conducted later than 3 5 hours after sunrise even if this means that one or more points will go un surveyed Conversely sometimes an established transect will be completed well before 3 5 hours after sunrise In this circumstance continue in the same direction of travel and establish and survey as many more points as can be completed before 3 5 hours after sunrise 3 Completing Point Establishment Form After completing the last point count for the morning take a rest if needed Then start retracing the route back toward the transect origin collecting flagging along the way When establishing new points complete a Habitat Assessment Form see SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation and a Point Establishment Form for each point When surveying points that h
254. n is likely to facilitate post stratification of survey data to answer future questions that may arise about bird communities or individual species in particular habitats 12 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork At each point count station we will classify vegetation within a 50 m radius circle centered on the station using the vegetation classification system developed by Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 A 50 m radius circle describes an area that is large enough to be meaningful in characterizing bird habitats but small enough to allow for rapid assessment We will classify percent canopy cover ocular estimates of vegetation gt 2 m above ground using the same broad classification bins mapped by Pacific Meridian Resources and record the largest size class of tree for each circle Observers also will note any obvious changes that may have occurred since the previous visit such as landslides or fire Our habitat classification field form is provided in SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation The NCCN is currently developing a new network wide plant community classification system when this becomes available it will be adopted by the landbird monitoring program in lieu of the Pacific Meridian Resources classifications While classifying vegetation at each point observers will use GPS units to collect a location data file for detailed instructions see SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data will co
255. n point to the first point for example NW for northwest or NN for north The last two characters indicate the sequential order of the point along the half transect for example the first point surveyed by a particular observer would be 01 the second point would be 02 etc Noise 1 5 Record the noise interference during the point count using the following codes Noise cod Explanation 1 No noise 2 Slight noise but probably not missing birds Moderate noise might be missing some high pitched 3 songs calls of distant birds Substantial noise detection radius probably is 4 substantially reduced 5 Loud noise probably detecting only the closest loudest birds Temperature C Record the temperature at the start of the count in Celsius 56 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Precip 1 3 Record the rain conditions during the point count using the following codes Wind code Beaufort Explanation Scale 0 Calm smoke rises vertically lt 2 km h 1 Light air smoke drifts 2 5 km h 2 Light breeze vvind felt on face leaves rustle 6 12 km h 3 Gentle breeze leaves and tvvigs in constant motion 13 19 km h 4 Moderate breeze small branches move raises loose paper dust rises 20 29 km h 5 Fresh breeze small trees sway 30 39 km h 6 Strong breeze large branches moving wind
256. n sampled during the current year and the number of points along each transect that was actually sampled An abbreviated version of the table is provided below Number Park Panel Elevation Transect of points completed MORA Annl Low 4001 14 MORA Annl Medium 4015 10 MORA Alt2 High 4017 10 NOCA Annl Low 1017 10 NOCA Anni Low 1020 10 NOCA Alt2 Medium 1032 8 OLYM Anni Low 3100 10 OLYM Anni High 3450 0 C Summary History of Transects Completed Up Through the Current Year Table 3 of the annual report should indicate how many transects were surveyed in each elevation zone of each park during the current year and in all previous years A sample table is provided below Number of transects completed Park Elevation class 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 MORA Low 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 MORA Medium 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 MORA High 4 4 3 4 4 3 4 4 MORA ALL 10 10 9 10 10 8 10 10 NOCA Low 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 NOCA Medium 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 NOCA High 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 NOCA ALL 12 12 11 12 12 12 12 12 OLYM Low 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 OLYM Medium 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 OLYM High 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 OLYM ALL 12 12 12 12 12 10 12 12 ALL Low 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ALL Medium 12 12 12 12 12 11 12 12 ALL High 12 12 11 12 12 9 12 12 ALL ALL 34 34 3l 34 34 30 34 34 D All Species Recorded in the Large Parks During the Field Season Table 4 in the annual report should list all species detected during point counts and or recorded on rare bird detection forms
257. n the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Empirical CDF of Slopes Species WIWA e qum 00 S o 9 o 2 x 2 o E 2 O N e 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 Ordered Slope Values Figure A6 1 Empirical CDF plots by park for WIWA Appendix 6 171 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 References supporting Appendix 6 Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P and Laake J L 1993 Distance Sampling Estimating Abundance of Biological Populations Chapman and Hall London reprinted 1999 by RUWPA University of St Andrews Scotland Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P Laake J L Borchers D L and Thomas L 2001 Introduction to Distance Sampling Oxford University Press London Buckland S T Anderson D R Burnham K P Laake J L Borchers D L and Thomas L editors 2004 Advanced Distance Sampling Oxford University Press London Thomas L Laake J L Strindberg S Marques F F C Buckland S T Borchers D L Anderson D R Burnham K P Hedley S L Pollard J H Bishop J R B and T A Marques 2005 Distance 5 0 Research Unit for Wildlife Population Assessment University of St Andrews UK http www ruwpa st and ac uk distance 172 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank Appendix 7 173 Appen
258. n training program Field Technicians must receive adequate instruction on data entry procedures see SOP 12 Date Entry and Verification so that they can complete their data entry during the field season If NPS computers are to be used for data entry crew members may need security clearances or other specific authorization which may have to be arranged well in advance of the field season 37 Training Observers SOP 3 popiooowloN popiooowoN popiooownoN o qrssoq popiooowlON 2819 DAS1u Djuv apy 10109 4019 popiooownoN K1ojuoAuTdg popiooownoN Eu lq ssoq OSMM p snf pumbl yy 19309 p SuTAL M AK popiooownoN K1ojuoAuTdg popiooownoN 9 qrssoq popiooownoN osns pibyy rdsa d DjJupjopy 19 09S Jing popiooownoN oy o qissod fq ssoq navH SH20UO1JSTI SHOTUOLUS H yong umbag popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoq fq ssoq OSH1 siuifo pd nAy dneog 1ossoT popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN SM pd nAy dneog wa popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN o qissoq M Y NANA 14011 02 vy xonq pexo ou 3urq popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 9 qissoqd popiooownoN ANVO DL N S DA D amp 1y peqseAue popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN o qrssoq popiooownoN HLMD D22242 spuy eo posurm usdIH popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN lq ssoq lq ssoq OHSN p p diq spuy T T AOU WIIYLION popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN a qissog 2 418804
259. nd fuel 4 cook kits 8 clipboards field paper and pencils 8 altimeters optional 8 clinometers optional 8 digital rangefinders optional C Startup Costs and Budget Considerations This project will incur relatively low startup costs beyond the cooperative agreement between USGS and The Institute for Bird Populations IBP which funded the development of this protocol narrative and accompanying Standard Operating Procedures Additional startup costs associated with the above equipment needs are approximately 10 000 excluding NPS radios While this protocol has been under development the amount of funds forecasted to be available for the project has been reduced substantially In response to this reduction in anticipated funding we will begin implementation of the monitoring program with a 6 person crew rather than an 8 person crew Under this scenario we will likely scale back sampling effort in each of the large parks by reducing the panel sizes from 12 12 and 10 transects in OLYM NOCA and MORA respectively to 9 9 and 8 transects in each panel The flexibility of the GRTS based sampling design enables us reduce the number of transects in each panel without compromising the statistical integrity of the sampling effort For each of the six panels we will simply eliminate the last selected transect in each of the three elevation strata in each park except for the low elevation stratum at MORA where we are al
260. ng software refer to SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data E BDa03 Landbird monitoring GPS data Analysis C 2006 Database C3 Data dictionary Documents 3 Import E Correspondence Rover data Equipment El Export Hiring Processed e Metadata a Raw C3 Presentations 2007 3 Protocol E e Images D Reference amp 3 2006 Reports 2007 Schedule and tasks E Spatial info C3 Training cis data E Tre reports El GIS layers Figure 1 Recommended file structure for project workspace Note Workspace folder name includes BDa03 the NCCN project code e Images For storing images associated with the project refer to SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images Note This folder contains subfolders to arrange files by year Spatial info Contains files related to visualizing and interacting with GIS data GIS data New working shapefiles and coverages specific to the project GIS layers Pointer files to centralized GIS base themes and coverages Map documents Map composition files mxd o o o 32 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Naming Conventions Folder Naming Standards In all cases folder names should follow these guidelines No spaces or special characters in the folder name e Use the underbar character to separate words in folder names Try to limi
261. ng PMR code canopy cover or tree size class qa 8c Nesting obs missing values Missing event ID taxon ID or nest activity qa 8d Point counts missing critical info Missing event ID taxon ID time interval or group size qa 8e Point counts missing values Missing observation distance seen first ever sang previously observed or flyover qa 8f Rare bird obs missing critical info Missing event ID or taxon ID qa 8g Rare bird obs missing values Missing observation distance group size or nest activity 98 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Using Database Quality Review Tools Open the working copy of the database application and click on QA Checks This will open the quality assurance review form Upon opening the quality assurance review form automatically runs the validation queries and stores the results in a table built into the front end database tbl QA Results Each time the queries results are refreshed or the quality assurance review form is re opened the number of records returned and the run times are rewritten so that the most recent result set is always available any remedy description Quality Assurance Review Form and the user name for the person making the edits is retained between runs of the queries These results form the basis of documentation in the certification report output as shown below
262. ng the form for the origin point or for the first point on either half transect Reason If Y was entered for Change of Direction provide here a brief explanation of why you had to change directions Example entries include Steep slope or Un crossable stream Coordinate Source Circle Map if coordinates could not be obtained from a GPS unit and instead the location vvas estimated solely by using the field map Circle GPS if coordinates vvere obtained from the GPS unit Elevation Enter the elevation and indicate whether the units are feet or meters Elevation Source Circle the primary method used to obtain the elevation Altimeter altimeter and map GPS high quality GPS unit and map map map only Do not use elevation measurements obtained from Garmin or equivalent GPS units Slope at Point Use a clinometer to estimate the slope in degrees Aspect at Point Enter the aspect in degrees GPS Model Enter name of the GPS unit you are using example Thales Mobile Mapper GPS File Name Enter the name the GPS unit assigned to the file for this survey point Leave blank if no GPS file was produced Easting UTM easting based on NAD83 of the survey point Northing UTM northing based on NAD83 of the survey point GPS Error Error in meters as provided by the GPS unit Leave blank if no GPS unit was used Datum Enter the datum on which the coordinates are based Field maps are ba
263. nique identifier for each coordinate record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv GIS_loc_ID indexed text 50 GIS feature ID for each set of coordinates to link with geospatial layers Location_ID unique FK text 50 Sample location Event_ID unique FK text 50 Sampling event of coordinate data collection Coord_label indexed text 25 Name of the coordinate feature e g plot center NW corner Is_best bit Indicates whether this set of coordinates is the best available for this location UTM east double Final UTM easting zone 10N meters including any offsets and corrections UTM north double Final UTM northing zone 10N meters including any offsets and corrections Coord type indexed text 20 Coordinate type stored in UTM east and UTM north target field post processed Datum indexed text 5 Datum of UTM east and UTM north Default NAD83 Est horiz error double Estimated horizontal error meters of UTM east and UTM north Field UTME double UTM easting zone 10N as recorded in the field Field UTMN double UTM northing zone 10N as recorded in the field Field datum text 5 Datum of field coordinates Field horiz error double Field coordinate horizontal error m Field offset m double Distance meters from the field coordinates to the target 176 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 200
264. not already known they should be checked at the proper ranger station to ensure that passes and necessary trails are open If special travel methods need to be organized such as boat transport or car rides to trailheads those should be organized as soon as possible Backcountry camping and travel permits if necessary also must be secured Finally the trip itinerary should be provided to the Project Lead and the appropriate Park Biologist who must then be contacted again when the crew returns from the field 44 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 3 Field Gear Crew members should take care to bring all necessary clothing and equipment into the backcountry Shared equipment likely will include a tent a stove a ground tarp a water purification filter and cookware Individual camping equipment should include a sleeping bag and pad a backpack a day pack or something suitable for carrying food and field equipment while conducting transects waterproof rain pants and jacket a flashlight and warm clothing wool or polypropylene Survey equipment per person should include the following Compass Data forms and maps Clipboard e Altimeter GPS unit Thermometer Safety whistle Pens or pencils Clinometer Binoculars Flagging Ground stakes Walkie talkie First aid kit Aluminum flags Hammer and nails 4 Food The final consideration to make before
265. ns of desired qualifications for the Field Lead and Field Technicians are provided in SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season C Training Procedures A comprehensive and well designed training program is critical to the success of this project as it will maximize observer consistency both within and between years Past experience has shown us that particularly experienced or talented crew members can be adequately trained in 2 weeks or less but we recommend allowing up to 3 weeks for the training period to maximize the likelihood that all observers will be qualified to conduct point counts at the end of the training session and to allow ample time for any required meetings between the crew and NPS personnel Park Biologists Data Manager GIS Specialist etc The details of how the training session should be conducted are addressed in SOP 3 Training Observers but in general terms the session should provide instruction in the following topics Bird identification by sight and sound Estimating distance to birds Conducting point counts Plant identification and habitat classification Completing field forms Orienteering and collecting GPS data First aid and backcountry safety Discussion of optimal scheduling and access routes for sites in the current panels including review of past years efforts Data entry procedures At the end of the training session all observers must pass a rigorous bird identification ex
266. ns of restoring data to the previous day s state After certification all data edits in the master database are tracked in an edit log refer to Appendix 7 Database Documentation so that future data users will be aware of changes made after certification In case future users need to restore data to the certified version we also retain a separate read only copy of the original certified data for each year in the NCCN Digital Library refer to Appendix 3 Schedule for Project Deliverables Geospatial Data The Project Lead and GIS Specialist may work together to review the surveyed coordinates and other geospatial data for accuracy The purpose of this joint review is to make sure that geospatial data are complete and reasonably accurate and also to determine which coordinates will be used for subsequent mapping and field work F Metadata Procedures Data documentation is a critical step toward ensuring that data sets are usable for their intended purposes well into the future This involves the development of metadata which can be defined as structured information about the content quality condition and other characteristics of a given data set Additionally metadata provide the means to catalog and search among data sets thus making them available to a broad range of potential data users Metadata for all NCCN monitoring data will conform to Federal Geographic Data Committee FGDC guidelines and will contain all compon
267. nsend s Warbler 0 368 0 953 0 986 Varied Thrush 0 814 1 000 1 000 Warbling Vireo 0 347 0 945 0 992 Western Tanager 0 192 0 785 0 999 Wilson s Warbler 0 302 0 902 0 978 Winter Wren 0 926 1 000 1 000 Yellow Warbler 0 154 0 287 0 661 10 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 3 Held Methods A Permitting and Compliance In developing the NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol we designed our sampling strategy using a minimum tool approach to insure we are complying with National Park Service regulations and standards including National Environmental Policy Act NEPA standards Management staff at each park reviewed the protocol and sampling strategy to ensure resource protections are adequate The Landbird Monitoring Program is excluded from further compliance with the National Environmental Policy Act according to the following Categorical Exclusion concerning resource management actions Nondestructive data collection inventory including field aerial and satellite surveying and mapping study research and monitoring activities Many of our point count transects occur in designated wilderness We consulted wilderness committees at each park to insure that minimum tool standards have been addressed in our protocol We plan periodic reviews of the Landbird Monitoring Program As these reviews occur all park compliance staff and wilderness committees will be consult
268. ntory and Monitoring Program 218 p Avian Inventory and Monitoring Group Reports Siegel R B 2000 Methods for monitoring landbirds a review commissioned by Seattle City Light s Wildlife Research Advisory Committee USDI Technical Report NPS NRNOCA NRTR 00 03 Siegel R B and Kuntz R C II 2000 Designing a landbird monitoring program at North Cascades National Park Service Complex summary recommendations from a September 2000 workshop USDI Technical Report NPS NRNOCA NRTR 00 04 Siegel R B Wilkerson R L and Hall S 2003 Landbird inventory for Olympic National Park 2002 first annual progress report The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Siegel R B Wilkerson R L and Hall S 2004a Landbird inventory for Olympic National Park 2002 2003 final report The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Kuntz R C II McLaughlin J and Curtis E 2002a Landbird inventory for North Cascades National Park Service Complex first annual progress report The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Kuntz R C II and McLaughlin J F 2004b Landbird inventory for North Cascades National Park Service Complex 2001 2002 final report The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Pedersen H K and Kuntz R C II 2002b Landbird inven
269. ntries in the previous fields Below the table more general information is requested about the transect as a whole General Comments Indicate anything else that seems important to note about the transect including the general level of difficulty presented by the terrain It also would be helpful to future crews to indicate where you camped the night before and the amount of time needed to travel from the campsite to the transect origin Describe any logistic problems encountered Provide detail about any problems experienced in reaching finding or marking the transect or any of the points or about any other logistic problems encountered Other interesting wildlife observations and or plant phenology observations Describe any interesting wildlife observations birds as well as other animals and indicate anything notable about plant phenology have deciduous shrubs fully leafed out yet Are many forbs blooming Nest Observations Incidental nest observations may provide important information about breeding phenology If any active nests were observed while visiting this transect though not necessarily at a survey point please indicate the species 4 letter code and indicate the nesting stage by circling one of the choices provided The fields in the box at the lower right corner of the form are intended for office use and should not be completed in the field After completing the last of the data forms partners should tra
270. o Sampled locations missing azimuth to point travel notes or reason for azimuth direction changes where direction changed yes qa 3p Locations missing env values Missing elevation slope or aspect values qa 3q Locations elev source inconsistencies Sampled locations where elevation source GIS theme qa 3r Locations missing elev metadata Missing elevation units or elevation source where elevations are present qa 3s Locations elev unit inconsistencies Elevation units m but elevation source GIS theme units m but elevation values greater than 4 419 qa_3t_Locations_without_markers Locations that have sampling events but no markers qa_3u_Locations_no_best_coord_assigned For GIS Specialist locations without best coordinates qa_4a_Coordinates_missing_critical_values Records missing location ID or coord creation date qa_4b_Coordinates_incomplete_field_UTMs A portion of the field coordinate pair is missing or the field datum is missing qa_4c_Coordinates_missing_field_UTMs Field UTMs are missing but where there is either a coordinate collection date a coordinate label a field error field offsets field sources GPS file or model type or a source map scale filled in qa_4d_Coordinates_missing_field_coord_date Field coordinates without a coordinate collection date qa_4e_Coordinates_inconsistent_field_source_info Field coordinate sour
271. o the Data Manager according to SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications The Data Manager or GIS Specialist for spatial data will then extract the information from the interview form and use it to create and update an FGDC and NPS compliant metadata record in XML format Specific guidance for creating the XML record is contained in NCCN Metadata Development Guidelines North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2006 104 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 4 The Data Manager will post the record and certified data Metadata Interview Form the NPS Lead and Project Lead to the NPS Data Store and maintain a local copy of the should work together to identify any sensitive information in XML file for subsequent updates The NPS Data Store the data after first consulting SOP 19 Sensitive Information has help files to guide the upload process Procedures Their findings may be documented and communicated to the Data Manager through the Metadata 5 The Project Lead should update the metadata interview Interview Form content as changes to the protocol are made and each year as additional data are accumulated Reference Cited Identifying Sensitive Information North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2006 Metadata Development Guidelines USDI National Park Service Available at http www 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm
272. ocated do not complete the Permanent Marker Information section on the Point Establishment Form If the previously installed marker cannot be relocated a new marker must be installed and the Permanent Marker Information section of the Point Establishment Form for the transect origin must be completed Detailed instructions for installing permanent markers are provided in Section 4 Installing Permanent Markers of this SOP When visiting a transect that was marked previously the last task before heading back to camp the afternoon prior to conducting the survey is to find the markers that were placed at the first two off trail point count stations first off trail station in each direction Using the information provided from the Point Establishment Forms that were completed when the points were marked in a previous year follow the indicated bearing for 100 m in each direction and find the markers indicating where the morning s first two point counts should be conducted As with finding the marker for the transect origin if a marker that was placed during a previous visit cannot be relocated it is necessary to install a new permanent marker and complete the Permanent Marker Information section of the Point Establishment Form Be sure to note in the Marker Comments section that the previously installed marker could not be relocated Then use flagging to mark the point conspicuously and also to indicate the route between the transect origi
273. ode location type or park code Park code inconsistent with sites table Duplicate records on site ID and 102 code Duplicate records on site ID and loc name Duplicate records on loc name and park code Location type lt gt ongin and missing an event or event null and features markers or images were entered Locations with sampling events or Seld coordinates or discontinued dates but without with location establishment dates Massing loc status sampled locations with loc status rejected or proposed locs with establi shement dates or field coords and loc status proposed retired locs without discontinued dates discontinued dates on status other than retired Newly sampled locations with an undetermined location type locaton type new Locations where loc code TO and loc type lt gt origin or vice versa or where loc code rare and loc type incidental or vice versa Discontinued date prior to establishment date or updated date prior to created date Wednesday March 29 2006 Pagel of 4 Query name qa Ia Strata missing critical info 0 qa ib Stram illogical dates qa Ja Sites missing cn cal info qa 2b Sites park inconsistencies qa X Sites duplicates on code and park qa 2e Sites site status inconsistencies qa 21 Sites illogical dares qa 2g Sites missing pene type qa 2h Sites missing site name qa Locatons missing eritical info qa 3b Locatons perk inconsistencies qa 3c Locations duplicates om s
274. oject code Field name Index key Data type Description Contact ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for the individual Lastname Firstname MI Project code indexed text 10 Project code for linking information with other data sets and applications Last name indexed text 24 Last name First name indexed text 20 First name Middle init text 4 Middle initials Organization indexed text 50 Employer e g NPS MORA Position title text 50 Position title held by the individual Email text 50 Email address Work voice text 25 Work phone number Work ext text 5 Work extension number Mobile voice text 25 Mobile phone number Home voice text 25 Home phone number Fax text 25 Fax number Contact location indexed text 255 Where the individual is located Contact notes text Notes about the contact Contact created datetime Time stamp for record creation Default Now Contact updated indexed datetime Date of the last update to this record Contact updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits Contact is active bit Indicates that the contact record is currently available for data Default True entry pick lists tlu Project Taxa List of species associated with project observations template Index Index columns Accepted TSN Accepted TSN Category Category pk Project Taxa primary Taxon ID Project code Record status Scientific name unique Species code unique P
275. ol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Table A6 1 Example Input File testcasefull csv Park Year Panel Elev Tran SubPlot Species Density VarGroup OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 1 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 2 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 3 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 1 1 1 4 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 5 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 6 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 7 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 8 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 9 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 10 AMRO 0 9376 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 1 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 2 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 3 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 4 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 5 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 6 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 7 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 8 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 9 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2002 Ann1 1 1 10 WIWA 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 1 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 2 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 3 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 4 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 5 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 6 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 7 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 8 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 9 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 10 AMRO 0 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 1 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 2 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 3 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 4 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 5 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 6 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 7 WIWA 1 3068 1 OLYM 2003 Ann1 1 1 8 WIWA 1
276. ollection occurs Data collection event for a given location Observers for each sampling event Quality assurance query results for the working data set Edit log for changes made to data after certification Checklist of tasks to be completed at sampling locations Markers placed at a sample location to facilitate relocation Images associated with sample locations The following are project specific data tables Point count observation data Rare species observations Incidental observations of non rare species Nesting observation records Event specific location description information to be uploaded to tbl Locations upon certification Characterization of the vegetation at the sample point Visible features used to guide navigation and relocate sample locations Training records for project observers Schedule for monitoring sites Transect variance groups assigned during analysis Sample location specific comments related to data analysis Detection parameters for each species and detection class Trend results for each species The following are a few of the more prominent standard lookup tables List of personnel associated with a project List of species associated with project observations Park specific attributes for taxa Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network 174 siskjeue DIOP o pajoja1 ejueumuio2 2yi2eds uone2o ajdwes 7 s oN sisApeuy qq
277. ollows Park Enter LEWI MORA NOCA OLYM or SAJH Transect Enter the 4 digit transect number Date Enter the date as mm dd yyyy Observer Enter the first and last name of the observer When you are ready set your stop watch and begin the count During the 5 minute point count record data as follows Point Enter the 4 character point name The first two characters indicate the semi cardinal direction traveled from the origination point to the first point for example NW for northwest or NN for north The last two characters indicate the order of the point along the half transect starting from the origination point for example the first point surveyed by a particular observer would be 01 the second point would be 02 etc For each point you must write the point name on the first row of data describing the first bird detection only This space may be left blank for subsequent detections at the same point Start Time Record the 4 digit time of day the point count began ex 0620 For each point you must write the start time on the first rovv of data describing the first bird detection only This space may be left blank for subsequent detections at the same point Species Enter the 4 letter bird species code refer to table 1 in SOP 3 Training Observers for a complete list of 4 letter species codes Juvenile birds should not be recorded on the data form It can be difficult to determine the age of birds during
278. om coordinate offsets of up to 2 km for data collection locations and Removal of data fields from the released copy that are likely to contain sensitive information What Kinds of Information Can and Can Not Be Shared Do not share Project staff and cooperators should not share any information outside NPS that reveals details about the nature or specific location of protected resources unless a confidentiality agreement is in place Specifically the following information should be omitted from shared copies of all data presentations reports or other published forms of information 124 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Exact coordinates Instead public coordinates are to be generated that include a random offset azimuth and distance These offset coordinates can be shared freely Other descriptive location data Examples may include travel descriptions location descriptions or other fields that contain information that may reveal the specific location of the protected resource s Protected resource observations at disclosed locations If specific location information has already been made publicly available the occurrence of protected resources at that location cannot be shared outside NPS without a confidentiality agreement For example if the exact coordinates for a monitoring station location are posted to a website or put into a publication then at a later
279. omments about the owl call start stop time species responding sex number response type Logistics notes text Comments about logistics difficulties Event notes text Comments about the sampling event Entered by text 50 Person who entered the data for this event Entered date indexed datetime Date on which data entry occurred Default Now Updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent updates Updated date indexed datetime Date of the most recent edits Verified by text 50 Person who verified accurate data transcription Verified date indexed datetime Date on which data were verified Certified by indexed text 50 Person who certified data for accuracy and completeness Certified date indexed datetime Date on which data were certified QA notes text Quality assurance comments for the selected sampling event bl Features Visible features used to guide navigation and relocate sample locations Index Index columns Feature status Feature status Feature type Feature type Location ID Location ID pk Features primary Feature ID Field name Index key Data type Description Feature status indexed text 12 Current status of the feature Default active Feature updated datetime Date on vvhich the feature record vvas last updated Feature ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each feature record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Location_ID indexed FK text 50 Sample location
280. ooo2 yeaqsoiy Surung KiojuoAu dgI KrojuoAu dgI aey XToyu AuL gI KrojuoAu dgI ODINV SHSLU s npap ueorreury KiojuoA u dgI K1ojuoAu d dI KxojuoAu dgT KrojuoAu dgI KrojuoAu dgI ISId snuid sijonpav UD SI ouiq popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooosnoN popioooswnoN Iwy HOMA pu do n DIXOT IIIqSSOTD peSurA oJu M AJOWWOAUT gI K1oguoAu d dI KrojuoAumdgI KrojuoAu dgI K1ojuoAu dgT WOTA DAISOMAANI DIXOT IIIQSSOTO poy popiooosnoN AIOWWOAUT IT popiooosnoN e qissoq AIOWOAUTY dI 14 SNUDIIXAUL snoppodup your snoH om AIOWWOAUT gI 1472 NUISSDI snoppod youl S UISSU 2 KiojuoA u dgI KioquoAu d dI popiooosnoN Ao u Au A KioquoAu d dI 1404 snaundand snoppodivy qdina popiooosnoN yY AIOWOAUT gI 4014 Djooiud 3v oqsoJr 2114 popiooosnoN Koyunda gI owy AIOWOAUT A gI HM syososyday 3J2gs02n2T q ur Asoyi poumoso ABIH popiooosnoN 2 415504 awy yong 1njoojnq sn42jJ2 roHO s xo o ng K1ojueAud gI AIOWOAUT gI K1oguoAud gI owy AIOWWOAUT YG OOH 4 p SnAYyJO OWN p1Iq 07 poproy umMoIg K1ojueAu d 41 Ao u Au 4 41 popiooownoN lq ssoq qq ssoq 7444 snpdaooun amp o snspydnq puq xoerg S Jomoig popiooesnoN popioooswnoN popiooownoN 9 gissoqd popiooownoN THA Snvydasoyjunx snipyd ooyyupy pimqxoerg popeou Ao 9X popiooownoN
281. oped DEVO No No No Yes Yes Mixed Douglas fir Western Hemlock DFWH No No Yes No No Douglas fir DOFI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Dune Grass DUGR No No No No Yes Engelmann Spruce ENGS Yes No Yes No No Grand Fir GRAF No No Yes No No Grassland GRAS No No No Yes No Hardwood Mix HAMI Yes Yes No No No Heather HEAT Yes Yes Yes No No Lodgepole Pine LOPI Yes Yes No No No Meadow MEAD Yes Yes Yes No Yes Mixed Conifer MICO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Mountain Hemlock MOHE Yes Yes Yes No No Noble Fir NOBF No No Yes No No Pacific Silver Fir PASF Yes Yes Yes No No Pasture PAST No No No No Yes Palustrine Wetland PAWE No No No No Yes Ponderosa Pine POPI Yes No No No No Quaking Aspen QUAS Yes No No No No Red Alder REAL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Riverine Wetland RIWE No No No No Yes Rock Sparsely Vegetated ROSV Yes Yes Yes No No Sand Dune SADU No No No Yes Yes Shore Pine SHPI No No No No Yes Shrub SHRU Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Sitka Spruce SISP No Yes No No No Snow SNOW Yes Yes Yes No No Subalpine Fir SUBF Yes Yes Yes No No Subalpine Larch SULA Yes No No No No Water WATE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Western Hemlock WEHE Yes Yes Yes No Yes Western Redcedar WERC Yes Yes Yes No No Western Redcedar Western Hemlock WRCH No Yes No No No Willow Shrub Wetland WSWE No No No No Yes Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network 64 201 18 5591 azig 991 25 19407 4008 19AJ98
282. opened by MSExcel for viewing The second output file from PreBirdTrend is the input file for BirdTrend and BirdTrendAnnualDensity This file will only be created if there are no errors identified in the input If there are errors the original input file will have to be revised by the user and PreBirdTrend rerun Note that BirdTrend and BirdTrendAnnualDensity will not run on an input file that has not been created by PreBirdTrend The first time PreBirdTrend is used in a particular working directory you must type gt source dirlocAPreBirdTrendV1 1 R at the command line prompt and hit enter The dirloc is the exact directory location where the PreBirdTrend software file is stored This command makes the program resident in the working directory NOTE In R directory locations must be specified with double backslashes For example gt source C Birds PreBirdTrendV 1 1 R Then type gt PreBirdTrendV 1 1 infile infile csv report out report txt outfile outfile csv and hit enter The infile csv is the name and exact directory location of the comma delimited ASCII input file reporf txf is the name and exact directory location for the detailed report output file that is generated by the pre processor and outfile csv is the name and exact directory location of the new input file that is generated during pre processing if no errors are found Note The report out file must have an extension o
283. opioooswnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 21415504 pepioooswnoN JANA SNI1YIJOI snupispiq jueseoqq poxoou surq popiooownoN popiooownoN 21415804 Y 7424 snui48242d ONDA uoo e ourigo1oqd popioooswnoN popiooosnoN ore e qrssoqd 9 qissoq TJAN snupquinjoo2 02 D4 UW popiooownoN popiooosnoN Y yY lq ssoq TAWNY snliaaspds ONsoy ueonourny yY yY jqrssoq qq ssoq VHO soJaps amp u o punby 8 uop or popiooownoN AIOWOAUT I owy Iy AIOJUOAUT dI VHLY oamg XAH po m posr popiooownoN owy 21415504 KiojuoAu dgI ODON suas 4 ndi y yMvysoy UYON popiooownoN 21418504 415504 VHO 1142d002 4 ndi y X eH S 4 doo popiooownoN popiooownoN ore e qissoqd VHSS 4andiooy x er pouurys dieys wy KiojyueAu dgI yY qq ssoq popiooownoN VHON snaup amp o 512417 46 AIOWOAUT YI popiooownoN Iwy AIOWWOAUT g 41 vayg snjpuida2o2n2 snl pbilDH aeg preg popiooesnoN popioooswnoN popiooownoN qq ssoq IALMA snanona snuva AYA POI WYM K1ojueAu d 41 Koyunda gI Iwy qq ssoq HdSO snjavypy uoipund 480 popiooownoN 21415804 popiooosnoN nami sisuaoipupl DAn amp x yong Appny Koyunu gI popiooownoN ary INIA 10101442S sn l yy Josue31o A pojsea1
284. or responsibilities for the various project tasks 130 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Document all edits in the Revision History Log embedded 6 in the protocol narrative and each SOP Log changes only in the document being edited for example if there is a change to an SOP log those changes only in that document Record the date of the changes the date on which all changes were finalized author of the revision describe the change and cite the paragraph s and page s where changes are made and briefly indicate the reason for making the changes Circulate the changed document for internal review among project staff and cooperators Upon ratification and finalizing changes a R o Ensure that the version date last saved date field code in the document header and file name field code in the document footer are updated properly throughout the document Make a copy of each changed file to the protocol archive folder a subfolder under the Protocol folder in the project workspace The copied files should be renamed by appending the revision date in YYYYMMDD format In this manner the revision date becomes the version number and this copy becomes the versioned copy to be archived and distributed The current primary version of the document for example not the versioned document just copied and renamed does not have a date stamp asso
285. ords in the text file must be sorted in the correct order habitat group and or grouping defined by other variables that may affect detectability such as observer or year survey point and species Follow the general instructions provided in the Distance User s Manual to create a project and import the data Although step by step instructions are beyond the scope of this SOP the suggestions below should help in successfully navigating through portions of the user interface that may be confusing n the New Project Setup Wizard at Step 3 Survey Methods choose Point transect as the Type of Survey At Step 5 it is not necessary to select any multiplier options if the project will be used only for modeling detectability that is if it will not be used for calculating density estimates which may be treated as a separate step from detectability estimation In Import Data Wizard at Step 5 Data File Structure select the habitat group field as the Region the point identifier field as the Point Transect note that in Distance terminology each of the sampling points is a Point Transect and the detection distance and species as Observation fields Once the data have been successfully imported use the Analysis tab to construct and test detectability models For each species with adequate data specify the model definitions three ways once with the data filter set to include only detections at points in relative
286. orroedg Jossooo1doud unio1 pue ureu l y q SIX jou soop err 1ndur porroedg Jossooo1doud unio1 pue eureu l dyno Ay ds juoumnSue 2 1 7no Sulssiy Jossoooudaud unII pue eureu y Woda Ajioadg juoumnaue 770 140d24 SUISSTA Jossooo1doud unII pue eureu 3ndur ue Ayr ds yuoumnsse 1 11 SutsstjA 55 MOU x MOU xx ipunoy SSIODWHs s IORDIEHs e SJO LI q pua4Ip4igao4d Aq poje1ouoS oq ULO jeu sojou pue SSUTUIEM SIOLIO Jo ISTI OV AQEL 1002 LT NOON 161 Appendix 6 eens SUODUA T Surssiui ym st uosrreduroo sne q oy JO woy vjep 5 sey yed v s p rern fg ou IITA syd ssor pu n p s nb i jy jr oq quo ueo sed sso1oe pu n pourquiog IMO S uoneA f szonba fz Auo woy eyep surejuoo ndug JUUL M kkk SISATEUE v ur p pnr ur SISATEUE puo ur pepnjour oq jou Jpm eq vjep jo i1eo ouo ATUO YM Sjoosuei IMO joesuel JO Jeo ouo ATUO seu 7 225UDA J 1995 1 SUTURE AA kkk SISATEUE puo r poeseolour osneo ABUT p suen e uym s oydans SIR sso1o po dures sjo dqns ser Jo jo sroqumu Sur416A
287. orts and publications the Project Lead should refer to the guidance in SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures Certain information that may convey specific locations of sensitive resources may need to be screened or redacted from public versions of products prior to release J Product Delivery Posting and Distribution Refer to Appendix 3 Schedule for Project Deliverables for the complete schedule for project deliverables and the people responsible for them To package products for delivery refer to SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications Upon delivery they will be posted to NPS websites and clearinghouses NatureBib NPSpecies NPS Data Store according to guidelines in Appendix 3 Schedule for Project Deliverables Holding Period for Project Data To permit sufficient time for priority in publication certified project data will be held upon delivery for a period not to exceed 2 years after it was originally collected After the 2 year period has elapsed all certified non sensitive data will be posted to the NPS Data Store Note This hold only applies to raw data and not to metadata reports or other products which are posted to NPS clearinghouses immediately after being received and processed Special Procedures for Sensitive Information Products that have been identified upon submission by the Project Lead and or NPS Lead as containing sensitive information will either be revised into a form that does not
288. oyunu gI popiooownoN o popiooosnoN AO T8 1 11204 sndomiu pu 6 14 K1ojueAu d gI Iy popiooownoN oq e qrssoq TIIN snaafiooa SNLIPDADY popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN o popiooosnoN 1449 snjpupdnuas SNLAPDADYD 19AOlQ poyeuryediuas popiooownoN popioooswnoN e qrssoq popiooosnoN TdNS SNLIPDADY 19AOlq AAOUS popiooosnoN popiooosnoN e qissoq popiooownoN HOVS s su ppun SnD ULIN IVUpues popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN e qissoq popiooownoN OOINV DUDO1421ID Dama 1000 wonowy popioooswnoN popiooosnoN qq ssoq popiooosnoN VOS DUIJOLDI pupz4oq IOS popiooosnoN popioooswnoN popiooownoN Y popiooosnoN VIA Djoonui snypy HEM amp IUISJIA popiooosnoN Koyunda gI popiooownoN awy 21415504 n v DIUAOJIIDI pid diyyp yeno eiuogme 2 415504 popiooownoN ONOW snjoid x amp 0240 rend urejuno A AIOWOAUT gI popiooownoN popiooosnoN ALIM oapdoy p sLSD l yy KNL PIM popiooosnoN AIOWWOAUT gI AIOWOAUT A gI K1ogueAu d dI DOS snsouidiqnf sndpspipuaq osnoir A300 popiooownoN popiooosnoN ore sndo8vT 1 po mj o1u A popiooownoN popiooosnoN popioooswnoN KiojuoAu dgI AIOWWOAUTY IT won sny qlun pspuog osnoir pany p
289. p B North Cascades National Park Service Complex EXPLANATION Lovr elevation points 650 m E Mid elevation points between 650 and 1 350 m A M High elevation points 51 350 m Roads Trails American Camp Figure 1 Location of transect starting points at Mount Rainier National Park North Cascades National Park Service Complex Figure2 Location of point count survey stations at San Juan and Olympic National Park Starting points were selected using Island National Historical Park Within each camp stations are the General Randomized Tessellation Stratified GRTS sampling placed atthe vertices of a 350 m grid with random starting point method Stevens and Olsen 1999 2003 2004 Figure 3 Location of point count survey stations at Levvis and Clark National Historical Park Within each unit stations are placed at the vertices of a 350 m grid with random starting point Note Spatial scales differ within the figure E Level of Change That Can Be Detected for the Amount Type of Sampling Being Instituted The statistical power of the stratified sampling program to detect temporal trends in landbird populations was evaluated through simulation exercises conducted by TerraStat Consulting Group TerraStat Consulting Group 2005 The simulation methods are described in Appendix 5 Simulation Methods In brief we used a profile summary approach to test the null hypothesis that the mean rate of change of 22 bird
290. p xpuopidurg Jogojeo q4 edo s orroeq popiooownoN popiooosnoN lq ssoq qq ssoq 1404 14aS OYsago xpuopiduq JayoyeoAT 810 pepiooownoN popiooownoN K1ojueAud gI KrojueAu d 41 Ao u Au 4 FI HVH xpuopidurg Iogojeo A 4 s puourummr Ao u Au 4 41 Koyunda g popiooownoN Koyunu gI TAIM npa xpuopidurg IYL MOM KiojueAu dgI oq KiogueAu d g T sninpip4os sndojuo UI9 S9AA K1ojueAud gI KiojueAu d GI KiojueAu dgI Ao u Au 4 41 K1ojueAu d gI OMId snvaqid sndoooKaq JoxoodpooAA p y popiooownoN KiojueAu d I AIOWOAUT gI Koyunda gI K1ojueAu d gI TAON 1217 49 020 IJONA 4 popiooownoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN OMA SNINIAD saplong 1oxooedpooA poxoeq xovrq popiooownoN popioooesnoN ore popiooownoN Iwy MLIV s ypsuop UROLIOUTY KiojueAu dgI KioguoA u dg T Koyunda GI K1ojueAu d gI KiojueAu d gI OAVH snsolla sapiooid IoxooedpooA ATTEH owy AJOWWIAUT dT KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT omoa suaosaqnd sapiooid popiooosnoN K1ojuoAu d gI KxojuoAu d dT KxojuoAu d dT VSIA 4aqna snoidpacyds Joyonsdeg pojseo1q pow popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN om KxojuoAu d gI VSN3I sipuonu snoidpacyds Jayonsdeg podeu pay popiooesnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN VSIM snapio
291. parameter vvas calculated Selected model text 255 Selected detection model Detection prob double Detection probability Sampling width m Std error Constraint Is Null Or 220 And lt 1 int Sampling width in meters Constraint Is Null Or 220 And lt 1000 double Standard error Constraint Is Null Or 220 And lt 1 Deg freedom double Degrees of freedom Sort order int Sort order Taxon ID primary FK text 50 Taxon record in the taxonomic lookup table tbl Edit Log Edit log for changes made to data after certification Index Index columns pk Edit Log primary Data edit ID Edit date Edit date Edit type Edit type Table affected Table affected User name User name Project code Field name Project code Index key Data type Description Data_edit_ID Project_code Edit_date primary text 50 Unique identifier for each data edit record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv indexed text 10 Default BDa03 indexed datetime Project code for linking information with other data sets and applications Date on which the edits took place Appendix 7 177 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Default Date Edit type indexed text 12 Type of edits made deletion update append reformat tbl design Edit reason text 100 Brief description of the reason for edits User name indexed text 50 Name of the p
292. person receiving the training Training date unique datetime Date on which training was given Trainer name text 50 Name of the person doing the training Training type indexed text 50 Indicates the type of training provided pre season or refresher Default pre season Training notes text Comments and results of training 188 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Variance Groups Transect variance groups assigned during analysis Index Index columns Analysis years Analysis years pk Variance Groups primary Site ID Analysis years Site ID Site ID Field name Index key Data type Description Site ID primary FK text 50 Site transect to which this grouping applies Analysis_years primary text 20 Range of years for which the results apply Variance_group text 10 Variance group Assigned by text 50 Name of the person who assigned the Variance group notes text 255 Comments about the variance grouping tlu Coord Label List of project specific coordinate labels template Field name Index key Data type Description Coord_label primary text 25 Coord_label_desc text 100 Sort_order tinyint Coord Source List of coordinate data sources standard Field name Index key Datatype Description Coord_source primary text 12 Coord_source_desc text 100 Sort_order tinyint tlu Coor
293. plication may be released as needed through the course of the field season If this happens there should be no need to move or alter the back end file Instead the front end file may be deleted and replaced with the new version which will be named in a manner reflecting the update for example ForestVeg_2007_v2 mdb If the front end database gets large or if performance slows compact it periodically by selecting Tools gt Database Utilities gt Compact and Repair Database Database Components The working front end application has the following functional components which are accessed from the main application switchboard form that opens automatically when the application starts Enter edit data Opens a form to confirm default settings for example park coordinate datum prior to continuing to the project specific data entry screens Training notes Opens a form for entering information about individual pre season and refresher training sessions Site task list Keeps track of unfinished tasks associated with sample locations for example forgotten equipment unfinished data collection that one field crew can use to communicate with a future field crew Lookup tables Opens a tool for managing the lookup values for the project data set for example species list list of project personnel etc QA checks Opens the data validation tool which shows the results of pre built queries that check for da
294. pling points using Generalized Random Tessellation Stratified sampling Tim Coonan Pip Courbois Steve Fancy Paul Geissler Tony Olsen and Don Stevens provided helpful comments on one or more earlier drafts of the plan Tamre Cardoso and Alice Shelly TerraStat Consulting Group analyzed statistical power of trend detection and developed statistical analysis and reporting programs We thank John Sauer and Paul Geissler for consulting on the computation of avian detection functions We could not have completed this protocol without the help of these key participants This is Contribution No 251 of The Institute for Bird Populations Introduction This protocol narrative outlines the rationale sampling design and methods for monitoring landbirds in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN during the breeding season The NCCN one of 32 networks of parks in the National Park System comprises seven national park units in the Pacific Northwest including three large mountainous The Institute for Bird Populations P O Box 1346 Point Reyes Station CA 94956 1346 U S Geological Survey Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center Olympic Field Station 600 E Park Ave Port Angeles WA 98362 3North Cascades National Park Service Complex 810 Highway 20 Sedro Woolley WA 98284 Olympic National Park 600 E Park Ave Port Angeles WA 98362 5Mount Rainier National Park Tahoma Woods Star Route Ashford WA 98304 2 L
295. pment and supplies Field Lead By August 7 Conference call to discuss recent field season close out discuss who needs to do what to get data ready for analysis Project Lead NPS Lead Park Biologists Data Manager and GIS specialist By October 15 Discuss and document needed changes to analysis and reporting procedures Project Lead NPS Lead Park Biologists and Data Manager By April 30 NPS Data Store is a clearinghouse for natural resource data and metadata http science nature nps gov nrdata Only non sensitive information is posted to NPS Data Store For details refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures NatureBib is the NPS bibliographic database http www nature nps gov nrbib index htm This application has the capability of storing and providing public access to image data for example PDF files associated with each record 3 NPSpecies is the NPS database and application for maintaining park specific species lists and observation data http science nature nps gov im apps npspp index htm The NCCN Digital Library is a hierarchical digital filing system stored on the NCCN file servers Boetsch J R Christoe B and Holmes R E 2005 Data management plan for the North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program USDI National Park Service Port Angeles Washington 88 p available only online at http www 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgm
296. point Use permanent marker pen to write the information indicated above for aluminum tags on the stake and then hammer the stake part way into the ground within a few meters of the edge of the trail Make sure that the marker will not be visible to the casual hiker For origin points and for the first off trail point counts on each half transect only regardless of which type of marker is used or even if for some reason no marker is used complete the section called Permanent Marker Information at the bottom of the appropriate Point Establishment Form The fields in this section of the form should be completed as follows Marker Number Enter the transect number T O transect origin or transect number the point name for example 4035SS01 If for some reason you did not mark a point that did not already have a marker write None in this field and provide explanation at the bottom of the form after Marker Comments Install Date Today s date in the mm dd yyyy format Removal Date Leave blank unless removing a pre installed marker in which case enter the current date 50 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Marker Type Indicate aluminum tag or ground stake Marker Substrate If an aluminum tree tag was used indicate the scientific name of the tree species to which the tag was nailed If a ground stake was used simply write gro
297. point counts but in general you should count a bird unless you are confident it is a juvenile Juvenile birds are defined as birds that hatched during the current breeding season Clues to look for that may indicate a young bird include the presence of family groups of birds birds wearing juvenal plumage weak flying birds and begging from or being fed by parents Be familiar with the typical signs of young birds species specific plumage varies but in general look for downy fluffy plumage that often looks quite different from that of an adult of the same species a fleshy gape often bright in color and contrasting with the bill color and heavy body molt plumage will look unusually messy with new body feathers growing in and replacing downy pre juvenal feathers Once birds have dispersed from the immediate breeding area it can become much more difficult to identify a young bird The seasonal timing of this survey should ensure that juvenile birds are encountered rarely except at high elevations where upslope migrating birds that hatched at lower elevations may appear before the local young have fledged In rare instances observers may not be able to identify particular birds to species The following 4 letter codes for incompletely identified birds are acceptable but should be used judiciously Species Explanation code UNAH Unidentified Accipiter Hawk
298. portion of the points Alternately it may prove necessary to eliminate a subset of the survey points perhaps the points representing one or more distinct park units or one or more habitats In this case the area of inference will of course need to be scaled back accordingly Data collection at SAJH and LEWI will follow the same methods described elsewhere in this protocol except for differences stemming from the fact that the points are arrayed in a systematic grid rather than along discrete transects Points in the grids do not need to be surveyed in the same order in successive years provided that all points are surveyed within the dates specified above Surveyors should group points opportunistically to facilitate surveying as many points as possible per morning Point counts at SAVH and LEWI are not grouped into discrete 10 point transects as they are in the large parks rather for the purpose of data management we are considering the survey points within each contiguous landholding to be a single transect For data collection at LEWI or SAJH use the following transect codes anywhere on the data sheets where it is necessary to indicate the transect Lewis and Clark National Historical Park Cape Disappointment CADI Dismal Nitch DINI Fort Clatsop FOCL Sunset Beach SUBE San Juan Island National Historical Park American Camp AMCA British Camp BRCA At both SAJH and LEWI individual points are sequentia
299. posable because it does not contain any data but rather acts as a pointer to the data that reside in the back end working database Whenever updates to the front end application are made available by the Data Manager an Each data entry form is patterned after the structure of the field form and has built in quality assurance components such as pick lists and validation rules to test for missing data or illogical combinations Although the database permits users to view the raw data tables and other database objects users are strongly encouraged only to use these pre built forms as a way of ensuring the maximum level of quality assurance Regular Data Backups Upon opening the working database the user will be prompted to make a backup of the underlying data see SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification It is recommended that backups be done on a regular basis perhaps every day that new data are entered to save time in case of mistakes or database file corruption These periodic backup files should be compressed to save drive space and may be deleted once enough subsequent backups are made All such backups may be deleted after the quality review and certification of the data Data Verification As data are being entered the person doing the data entry should visually review them to make sure that the data on screen match the field forms This should be done for each record prior to moving to the next form for data entry At r
300. poureu ogy 1010 y AYODUIAA I Zjoj dino o poureuoi jojdjno JON kkk S3 JON OL UIA ESS T V puad psig Aq poje1ouoG oq ULI jeg sojou pue SSuTUTEA SIOLIO JO jsr p nunuo 9 9y AQEL 1002 LT Areniqoq 0203014 NOON NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol Table A6 7 Example of report output by BirdTrend INPUT C myfiles birdfiles testcaseclean csv Wed Mar 29 07 17 27 2006 YEARS 2002 2011 SPECIES AMRO Variance Park Group OLYM 1 2 3 4 5 6 Combined Panels Grand Mean NOCA o c o m Combined Panels Grand Mean MORA oa A UN Combined Panels Grand Mean Combined Panel s Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Alt1 AIt2 AIt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt1 AIt2 AIt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt1 AIt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Anni Anni Anni Alt1 At2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt1 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt1 AIt2 AIt3 Alt4 Alt5 Ann1 Ann1 Ann1 Alt1 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt1 A t2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Alt1 Alt2 Alt3 Alt4 Alt5 Class Lovv Mid High Lovv Mid High Lovv Mid High AlI Lovv Mid High Lovv Mid High Lovv Mid High All Low Mid High Low Mid High Low Mid High All Elevation Non Zero Sites 4 4 4 20 20 20 24 24 24 204 Mean Slope 0 0337 0 0341 0 0091 0 0302 0 0276 0 0084 0 0308 0 0173 0 0086 0 0224 0 0302 0 0029 4 00E 04 0 0467 0 0039 0 0216 0 044 0 0028 0 0181 0 0178
301. pp ID int Sort order tinyint tlu PMR Cover Class List of Pacific Meridian vegetation cover classes Field name Index key Data type Description Cover class primary text 6 Cover class desc text 100 tlu PMR Size Class List of Pacific Meridian canopy tree size classes Field name Index key Data type Description Tree size class primary text 10 Size class desc text 100 Sort order tinyint tlu PMR Veg Type List of Pacific Meridian vegetation type codes Index Index columns pk tlu PMR Veg Type primary PMR type code Is forested Is forested Field name Index key Data type Description PMR type code primary text 4 PMR type desc text 100 At NOCA bit At OLYM bit At MORA bit At SAJH bit At LEWI bit Detection class text 20 Is forested indexed bit tlu Precip Code List of precipitation codes for bird observations Field name Index key Data type Description Precip code primary tinyint Precip code desc text 50 192 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network February 27 2007 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol tlu Project Crew List of personnel associated with a project template Index Index columns Contact location Contact updated First name Last name Organization pk tlu Project Crew primary Project code Contact location Contact updated First name Last name Organization Contact ID Pr
302. publications will be created in NatureBib which is the NPS bibliographic database http www nature nps gov nrbib index htm The digital report file in PDF format will then be uploaded and linked to the NatureBib record Refer to the NatureBib website for record creation and upload instructions 3 Species observations will be extracted from the database and entered into NPSpecies which is the NPS database and application for maintaining park specific species lists and observation data http science nature nps gov im apps npspp index htm These three applications serve as the primary mechanisms for sharing reports data and other project deliverables with other agencies organizations and the general public Holding Period for Project Data To protect professional authorship priority and to provide sufficient time to complete quality assurance measures there is a 2 year holding period before posting or otherwise distributing finalized data This means that certified data sets are first posted to publicly accessible websites for example the NPS Data Store approximately 24 months after they are collected for example data collected in June 2006 becomes generally available through the NPS Data Store in June 2008 In certain circumstances and at the discretion of the NPS Lead and Park Biologists data may be shared before a full 2 years have elapsed Note This hold only applies to raw data all metadata reports or o
303. q popiooownoN popiooownoN awy popiooowrnoN VSHd sojourjaui sup Jodidpurg e10j 00g popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooosnoN awy popiooownoN VSHT1 pyununu S14pi D2 Jodidpues 1582 popiooosnoN popiooo rnoN popiooosnoN awy popiooownoN VSAM unpu Jadidpues uio1soAA popiooosnoN popiooo noN popiooownoN qq ssoq popiooo noN ANYS pq p spi Sui iopueg popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN a qissog popiooo noN NJAA SNMUDI Spip pow popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 21418804 popiooosnoN HMns DIDSAIA pzuydy popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN 2 418804 popiooosnoN 1219 DIADUMY ouojsung Joerg elM1 zHfVS zWUOIN zINA10 V20N 19909 s r d snu b 9uieu uouluo9 panujuoj oman S PB SE pue 38802 UHON au l pejejunooue aq 0 Al yil s l ds pig 1 ayqey Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork 40 AIOWWOAUT gI AO WUIAUT gI AIOWIAUT gI rey AIOWWOAUT gI MSDA DUISSDIDYI pl urodiony AAOTIPA U9o91S 9 OIA popiooosnoN K1ojuoAu dgT KrojuoAumdgI oy e qissoq STAL 40 021q Djauio amp uong AOTIPAS 991 popiooo noN eY popiooownoN e qrssoq popiooownoN VWNd s qns audo4qd unreyy popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN V IOH siujsadjp ppydoway xe p u10H KiojuoAu dgI AIOWWOAUTY IT AIOWOAUT gI K1oguoAu d dI VAOD XD402 SA407 UOUIUIO POPIODOYION
304. q pos popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN ary qq ssoq HINO 4 sup l ni SnI W J suLFIoy uOululo popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN ary snypyym n sajkpoydoT Josuez1oJA p pooH popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooosnoN KiojueAud gI ODVg Doipuv si vypydaong s MoLeg popiooo noN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN Hans plo qip pypydaong peouopgng popiooesnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN 9 qtssoq popiooownoN nar sippuia njn8uv xonq por m Suo T IMIJI zHfWS zWUOIN zINA10 V20N 19909 s rs d snu weu uoululo9 panujuoj oman S PB SE pue 38802 UHON au l pejejunooue aq Ajay s l ds psig 1 ayqey 39 Training Observers SOP 3 popioooesnoN p p o2 ynoN popiooownoN popiooownoN MOO sna4aunf snyosay TAQ parog popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 21415804 MOUS sn tvuub f OV TAQ po1eo 10qS popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooosrnoN MOST snjo OV TAQ po1eo 3uo T popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooosnoN MODD psojnqau XAG TAQ Ker PAD popiooosnoN aey 21418804 OGva DIDA XAG IMO pore g popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN exa awy MOdS silblM plooo XAG IMO p nods popiooownoN Ry ay KxojuoAud gI OdON pwous VAQ Aur544 p p o ynoN awy 9 qissod 21418804 MOHD SNUDIUIBAIA oqng TAQ p u
305. r s targeted transects should be printed and assembled Crew housing needs to be secured at each of the large parks this process may need to begin earlier if NPS facilities are to be used and housing campsites and other logistical arrangements for the training session need to be made NPS personnel knowledgeable about backcountry conditions in each park should be consulted to determine to the degree possible whether conditions such as washed out bridges road or trail closures or unusually heavy snowpack may present novel logistical problems Hiring considerations and other pre season logistical tasks are discussed in more detail in SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season Additional pre season tasks pertaining to data management are discussed in Section 4B Pre Season Preparation for Information Management C Sequence of Events During Field Season We recommend beginning training between May 1 and May 7 depending on the experience level of the crew Although many of the Neotropical migrants may not yet be singing on their territories during the first week of May crews can begin practicing identification of the species that are present and also can spend time learning protocols and the numerous other skills required to successfully conduct surveys see Section 5C Training Procedures Surveys will begin no earlier than May 21 at OLYM and NOCA and about 10 days later at MORA Upon completion of the training session the
306. r example Huff and others 1985 Lewis and Sharpe 1987 Gilbert and Allwine 1991 Manuwal 1991 Hansen and others 1995 Smith and others 1997 as well as more specific information about the current status of landbirds in the NCCN already exists and has been used in developing 1 Background and Objectives 3 our project design Jenkins and others 2000 conducted a pilot study to field test geographically extensive survey techniques at Olympic National Park and to quantify sources of variance in the analysis of point count data More recently spatially extensive landbird inventories have been completed in North Cascades National Park Service Complex Siegel and others 2004b San Juan Island National Historical Park Siegel and others 2002 Olympic National Park Siegel and others 2004a Mount Rainier National Park Wilkerson and others 2005 and Lewis and Clark National Historical Park Siegel and others 2007 These research and inventory efforts provided opportunities to test and streamline field methodologies and analytical approaches and produced datasets that we used to assess statistical power of the proposed monitoring program Section 2E Level of Change That Can Be Detected for the Amount Type of Sampling Being Instituted Finally landbirds hold high and growing public interest Cordell and others 1999 Cordell and Herbert 2002 and are perhaps the most visible faunal component of park ecosystems
307. r example BDa03 2007 certified mdb SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications 121 3 Create a compressed file using WinZip or similar software and add the back end database file to that file Note The front end application does not contain project data and as such should not be included in the delivery file 4 Add the completed Metadata Interview and Data Certification Forms to the compressed file Both files should be named in a manner consistent with the naming conventions described elsewhere in this document 5 Add any geospatial data files that are not already in the possession of the GIS Specialist Geospatial data files should be developed and named according to NCCN GIS Naming Conventions North Coast and Cascades Network 2005b 6 Upload the compressed file containing all certification materials to the new submissions folder of the NCCN Digital Library If the Project Lead does not have intranet access to the NCCN Digital Library then certification materials should be delivered as follows a the compressed file is under 5 mb in size it may be delivered directly to the NPS Lead and Data Manager by email b If the compressed file is larger than 5 mb it should be copied to a CD or DVD and delivered in this manner Under no circumstances should products containing sensitive information be posted to an FTP site or other unsecured web portal refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures for more informatio
308. ravel from your present location 4 When the cursor is over the feature the feature s name will display at the bottom of the screen Press ENTER This returns you to the Select Item screen Select the feature you want to go to Push ENTER This will display the Detail Info screen Scroll to the GOTO option in the lower right corner Highlight GOTO Press ENTER The background map will now show a line between your current position the black triangle cursor and the target location Press NAV until the navigation screen you wish to use displays the screen that shows distance bearing and heading is a useful one Note Setting the target location depends on the scale the background map is on when GOTO is selected If the cursor appears to be on top of the target at a background map scale of 750 m the cursor location can be 20 30 m away from the target when zoomed to a scale of 10 m 043 50m Note Remember these screens will give straight line distances The display will not account for topography such as cliffs rivers etc This GOTO option probably is best used after using map compass and altimeter to navigate close to a target point or polygon Then use GOTO and the position display screen where coordinate averages display to refine your location and get as close as possible to the target location Note The GOTO screen and background map will not zoom into a scale finer that 10 m At this point use the pos
309. rd Field name Index key Data type Description Record status code primary text 16 Record status desc text 200 Sort order tinyint 194 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 tlu Taxon Type List of taxon resolution codes standard Field name Index key Data type Description Taxon type primary text 12 Taxon type desc text 200 Sort order tinyint tlu Trail Or Road List of trail or road options for sample locations Field name Index key Data type Description Trail_code primary text 15 Trail_code_desc text 50 Sort_order tinyint tlu Trans Arm Code List of codes for the directional branches of transects Field name Index key Data type Description Arm_code primary text 2 Arm_code_desc text 25 Sort_order tinyint tlu VVind Code List of wind codes for bird observations Field name Index key Data type Description VVind code primary tinyint Wind code desc text 100 Appendix 8 195 Appendix 8 Administrative History for Landbird Monitoring Protocol Development The follovving administrative history briefly summarizes the process used to develop the National Park Service s North Coast and Cascades Network breeding landbird monitoring protocol and associated set of standard operating procedures SOPs This history also identifies the documents used to deve
310. re named jobs both have mmj extensions MobileMapper Office Project Set Up 1 Open MobileMapper Office program from the computer and create a job file a Click on the File menu Select New Click on the File menu again Select Save As Navigate to a computer or network directory in which a PC job file will be stored f Name the file g Push Save opang 2 Set the coordinate system a Click on the Options menu b Select Coordinate System c Click the dropdown arrow in the Spatial Reference System window d Select UTM VVGS84 UTM zone 10N i no coordinate system has been selected yet click lt new gt from the dropdown list ii Select SELECT a PRE DEFINED system iii Click the Next button iv Scroll down to UTM in the left pane of the Coordinate System Wizard Select window and double click v Double click on WGS 84 vi Select UTM WGS 84 UTM zone 10N from the right pane in the Coordinate System Wizard Select window SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data 75 vii Click on the Finish button viii Click on the browse button to the right of the dropdown list ix Click on the Datum tab x Select NAD83 from the Datum Name pick list xi Click OK xii Make sure the new option is selected in the Select Coordinate System window e Click OR Note MobileMapper Office does not display the pick list as NAD83 it displays as UTM WGS 84 UTM zone 10N 3 Setthe units a Click on the Options menu b Select Units
311. ready sampling only two transects per panel Implementation of this reduced sample design in 2007 under IBP management is expected to cost approximately 70 000 Table 4 provides a budget outline showing how funds will be allocated to the various project tasks 6 Operational Requirements 21 Table 4 Annual budget for implementing landbird monitoring in the North Coast and Cascades Network NPS I amp M includes funding allocated to the NCCN Inventory and Monitoring Program for network data manager s time Abbreviations NPS I amp M National Park Service inventory and monitoring CA Cooperative Agreement NCCN North Coast and Cascades Network pp pay period Project tasks NPS NPS CA IM other Administration Salaries vv benefits NPS Lead 3 pay periods MORA amp OLYM Biologists 0 7pp Seasonal Preparation Salaries w benefits NPS MORA amp OLYM Biologists 0 7pp Cooperative Agreement CA Equipment amp Supplies Crew Training amp Certification Salaries w benefits NPS Lead 1 5pp Data Manager 0 2pp Data Tech 0 2pp Cooperative Agreement CA Data Collection Salaries w benefits NPS Lead 0 5pp Cooperative Agreement CA Housing Travel Data Management Salaries w benefits NPS Lead Tpp Data Manager 1 8 pp Data Tech 0 5pp Cooperative Agreement CA Data Analysis amp Reporting Salaries w benefits NPS 4 1 MORA 6 OLYM Biologists 0 7pp Data Tech 0 5pp Cooperat
312. report should List project personnel and their roles List transects completed during the current year Provide a summary history of the number of transects completed during each year of the study enumerated by elevation and park List all bird species detected in the parks during the current year Indicate the number of individuals of each bird species detected during the current year in each park as a whole and on the annual panel of transects only Indicate the number of transects on which each species was detected in each park as a whole and on the annual panel of transects only Identify any data quality concerns and or deviations from protocols that affect data quality and interpretability Detailed reporting guidelines and table structures are provided in SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting A more in depth analysis and report should be produced every 5 years as the full set of five panels is completed In addition to the above the 5 year report also should Provide annual density estimates for each species during the previous 5 years Provide summary and detailed trend results for each species with an adequate sample size for estimating density and assessing trend Provide the detectability parameters used for estimating each species density Assess spatial patterns in the density estimates Identify any possible distributional changes within the parks Place network results within the larger cont
313. roject Their responsibility is to facilitate communication among network and park data managers and geographic information specialists and to coordinate the work that may be shared to enhance the efficiency of operations 132 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork This page intentionally left blank Appendix 2 Yearly Proyect Task List Appendix 2 133 This table identifies each task by project stage indicates who is responsible and establishes the timing for its execution Protocol sections and SOPs are referred to as appropriate Project stage Task description Responsibility Timing Preparation Sections 3A 3B and 4B SOPs 1 2 and 3 Initiate announcements for seasonal technician Project Lead November January positions begin hiring Notify Data Manager and GIS Specialist of needs for the Project Lead By December 1 coming season field maps GPS support training Meet or conference call to recap past field season discuss the upcoming field season and document any needed changes to field sampling protocols or the working database Project Lead NPS Lead Park Biologists and Data Manager GIS Specialist January Ensure all project compliance needs are completed for Park Biologists January February the coming season Provide names of field crew to Park Biologists Proj
314. roject code Record status Scientific name Species code Subcategory Subcategory Taxon type Taxon type TSN TSN Field name Index key Data type Description Taxon ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each taxon Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Project code indexed text 10 Project code for linking information with other data sets and Default BDa03 unique text unique Species code Scientific name text 100 applications 20 Unique field code for each project taxon Scientific name of the taxon from ITIS NPSpecies App 7 Database Documentation Page 20 Appendix 7 193 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Common name text 100 Common name for the taxon from ITIS NPSpecies Pref_com_name text 100 Preferred common name for this project TSN indexed int ITIS taxonomic serial number or a provisional number from NPSpecies Accepted TSN indexed int ITIS taxonomic serial number of the accepted name for this taxon from NPSpecies Category indexed text 20 General category of the taxon from NPSpecies Default unspecified Subcategory indexed text 20 Subcategory specific to the needs of each taxonomic discipline from NPSpecies Authority text 60 Taxonomic authority from ITIS Authority subsp text 60 Taxonomic authority for subspecific taxa from ITIS Family text 60 Taxonomic family from ITIS Taxon type indexed text 12 Indi
315. roportion of the transects or backcountry trail the vast majority of transects Although the sampling area of each park is constrained to a 2 km corridor surrounding park roads and trails the sampling plan extends inference away from roadsides thus addressing a common criticism of Breeding Bird Surveys and covers a significant portion of wilderness in each of the three large parks Specific features of the proposed sampling design address several very significant challenges in working in vast rugged parks with large roadless areas These challenges include 1 Safety concerns Substantial portions of all three large parks are rendered essentially inaccessible by prohibitively steep slopes or dangerous river crossings Even areas that do not present these extreme challenges can still require great care to access as traveling off trail nearly anywhere in the large parks generally involves traversing steep often wet terrain and climbing over numerous fallen logs Personnel at each of the large parks have considerable experience sampling remote park areas and have suffered high accident rates attempting to do so Each of the parks has now adopted a safety based work culture that places safety of workers above project objectives 2 High travel costs Substantial portions of the large parks are not only many kilometers away from the nearest road they also are many kilometers away from the nearest trail There are places in the more re
316. roup 2005b Development of Landbird Monitoring Protocol and Standard Operating Procedures The peer reviewed Landbird Monitoring Study Plan was converted into the Landbird Monitoring Protocol with some clarification added Additionally several SOPs have been written to provide instructions detailing how to conduct all phases of the monitoring program from preparing for the field season collecting data handling storing and analyzing data and developing the outputs and products Siegel and others 2006a 2006b 2006c 2006d 2006e 2006f 2006g 2006h 20061 2006j 2006k 20061 2006m 2006n 20060 2006p The USGS Forest and Rangeland Ecosystem Science Center in Corvalis Oregon conducted peer review of this draft protocol with SOPs in May and June 2006 The draft protocol was reviewed by three biologists environmental statisticians and or environmental monitoring specialists Fancy 2006 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Geissler 2006 Olsen 2006 A response was drafted to address the review comments Siegel and others 2006 and a revised final protocol was completed in August 2006 Siegel and others 2006 Selected References Vital Signs Identification and Prioritization Weber S Woodward A and Freilich J 2005 North Coast and Cascades Network Vital Signs Monitoring Plan revised September 2005 National Park Service Pacific West Region for NPS Inve
317. roup for use with the free software package R In addition to assessing temporal trends BirdTrend also calculates park and year specific density estimates for each species Detailed instructions for importing and analyzing data are provided in Appendix 6 User s Manual for BirdTrend of this protocol Note Distance output tables will have to be reformatted according to the specifications in the BirdTrend User s Manual before they can be imported into BirdTrend 5 Reporting Annual and 5 Year Results Several standard summary tables should be included in the annual report The recommended structures for standard tables and figures to include in the annual report are presented in the following pages in some cases with fabricated data included for illustrative purposes A Observers Who Conducted Point Counts in the Current Year Table 1 of the annual report should provide the names and roles of all observers who conducted point counts during the current year A sample table is provided below Observer Role Stephanie Dolrenry Technician Mandy Holmgren Technician Eric Mickelson Technician Lauren Mork Technician Rodney Siegel Project Lead Katie Stassen Technician Bob Wilkerson Field Lead 108 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork B Transects That Were Completed in the Current Year Table 2 of the annual report should list each transect that vvas supposed to have bee
318. roups of photographs acquired under sub optimal exposure or lighting can be batch processed to enhance contrast or brightness Batch processing also can be used to resize groups of photographs for use on the web Batch processing may be done in ThumbsPlus Extensis Portfolio or a similar image software package Image File Naming Standards In all cases image names should follow these guidelines No spaces or special characters in the file name Use the underbar character to separate file name components Try to limit file names to 30 characters or fewer up to a maximum of 50 characters Park code and year should either be included in the file name or conclusive by the directory structure The image file name should consist of the following parts Date of data capture formatted as YYYYMMDD Transect number if recorded at a transect Optional a brief descriptive word or phrase Optional a sequential number if multiple images were captured 5 Optional time formatted as HHMM Examples e 20070621 3130 g tree 001 ipg a feature at transect 3130 taken on June 21 2007 e 20070621 3130 1 marker jpg documents the marker at point 3130 NE01 e 20070518 training 004 jpg 4th photograph taken during training on May 18 2007 In cases where there are small quantities of photographs it is practical to individually rename these files However for larger numbers it may be useful to rename files in batches This ma
319. rrection factor for measurement of compass bearings Surveyed point bit Indicates that the sample point was surveyed at the intended location Default True Survey comments text 100 Survey comments e g explaining doubts about being in the intended position Site data updated bit Indicates whether the site data slope aspect etc were updated Coordinates updated bit Indicates whether coordinates were collected Features updated bit Indicates whether navigation feature descriptions were updated Photos taken bit Indicates that photos were taken Habitat data taken bit Indicates whether or not habitat data slope aspect etc were recorded Markers updated bit Indicates that site markings were updated Noise level indexed tinyint Noise level during the sampling event 178 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 VVind cond indexed tinyint VVind conditions during the sampling event Precip_cond indexed tinyint Precipitation conditions during the sampling event Cloud_cover indexed tinyint Percent cloud cover in viewable sky Constraint Is Null Or gt 0 And lt 100 Temp_C int Temperature during the sampling event Misc_obs text Wildlife or plant phenology observations Owl call made bit Indicates whether or not an owl call was made Owl call response bit Indicates whether or not there was any response to the call Owl call details text C
320. rye 01 euo uey oour s1eo po duues Jo 1equinu Sur deA ura UIOJJ sj2osue1 surejuoo nos oouvtmA enprArpur ue JT IJMO s oued Sunvjo1 ydninui seu dnospang dnoizs sour A 19JO NL sexe T vnu pi dnoJ3 n PIA UOHPA T IOLL y m peurquioo eq Aew dno13 uonpA f oy 32esuv o1ez uou po duies ouo Joesue1 poydures ouo quo seu suoneAe o v ATUO Sey uoneAo o ue T A AMOQ JI LINS ouo JO UO jsvo W oours pourquioo uooq DALY EWS WOI gyep urejuoo ATUO pm dnols oouermA yore Aq eop IJMO WIENS uoneAe e e dnnui sey dro42 40A osuere A 1930 NL kk S930N 2950 or z uou QUO ULY IIOU urejuoo v JI sdno18 souRLIeA JOOSULI euo UY e10ui SUTALY uoneAe o YOR YIM ur p nous vjens uoneAe e o qrssod Jy IMO IENS uoneAe e ydninui sey dnospavg 0 osuere A JUUR M kkk pojdures uooq JOU ABQ LWS uoneAeo o 1 IO ouo osne2oq p seiq st ojeurmse sim Inq SUISSIUI SUODEA T aq JIM puo s yuoneAo o 5 011242142 91OUI 10 ouo uiojj so dumes JI poseiq str pu n opra ieq IMO ATUO WOJ v3ep surejuoo GPA 107 ynduy SSUIUTE M kkk uoneja1d rojug OL DL A ESS T V 1002 LT p nunuo 9V AQEL ooojorg SUONUON NOON NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol Table A6 4 Sample summary table output from BirdTrendAnnualDensity ANNUAL DENSITY REP
321. s Evaluation_code Firing_order Panel_name Panel_type Park code Site code Site ID Site status Site updated Slope class Stratum ID Stratum ID Substratum Substratum VVatershed Park region Field name Index key Data type Description Site_ID primary text 50 Unique site identifier Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Park_code indexed text 4 Park in which the site is located Site_code unique text 10 Unique alphanumeric code for each site Site_name text 25 Brief colloquial name of the site Park_region indexed text 25 Region of the park in which the site is located Stratum_ID indexed FK text 50 Stratum of the site Slope_class indexed text 20 Slope classification used for site selection Substratum indexed text 20 Additional criteria used for site selection Panel_type indexed text 20 Sampling panel for the site Panel_name indexed text 10 Name of the sampling panel used to group data for analysis Firing_order indexed int Site selection and evaluation order Evaluation_code indexed text 2 Site evaluation status code Evaluation_notes text 100 Brief comment about the site evaluation rationale for not sampling etc Site_status indexed text 10 Status of the site 1 e proposed active rejected retired Site notes text Comments about the site Site established datetime Date the sample site was established Site discontinued datetime Date the sample site was discon
322. s GPS model Thales Mobile Mapper GPS error Easting Northing GPSfile name 0 ODatum Transect a Point H Nest activity po nest observed V l Description Project code Entered Entered by Updated Updated by Verify this Verifledi Verifedby observation QA notes 88 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Task List and Training Notes The task list browser functions in much the same way as the Data Gateway Form and can be sorted or filtered by park or location type Click on the Closeup button to view or edit information for that record Tasks as iated with sample locations Close up view for entering editing location task items Training notes form Record M S T 1 Manage Lookups SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification 89 From the main menu click on Lookup tables to open the lookup tool This tool has 3 tabs one for the project species list another for the project crew list and a third for viewing the contents of all other lookup tables The first tab is the project species list Minor edits may be made by putting the form into Edit mode By selecting a record and clicking on View details or by double clicking on any record selector the gray box to the left of each record the species popup form will open To add anew record click on New record
323. s be sure to update these to reflect the new image file name prior to data entry See SOP 9 Field Form Handling Procedures Process images as follows Copy the images to the Originals folder and set the contents as read only by right clicking in Windows Explorer and checking the appropriate box These originals are the image backup to be referred to in case of unintended file alteration or deletion Delete any poor quality photographs repeats or otherwise unnecessary photographs Low quality photographs might be retained if the subject is highly unique or the photograph is an irreplaceable data photograph Rotate the image to make the horizon level Photographs of people should have red eye glare removed Photographs should be cropped to remove edge areas that grossly distract from the subject When finished move the image files that are to be retained and possibly linked in the database to the appropriate folder data images under the Data folder other images under the Miscellaneous folder Photographs of interest to a greater audience should be copied to the park Digital Image Library To minimize the chance for accidental deletion or overwriting of needed files no stray files should remain in the processing folder between downloads 5 Depending on the size of the files and storage limitations contents of the Originals folder may be deleted if all desired files are accounted for after processing Large g
324. s are shown in bold and items with an asterisk next to the name are not to be edited except by the Data Manager these come from either ITIS or the NPSpecies application The Integrated Taxonomic Information System ITIS website may be accessed by clicking on the button labeled ITIS website or by clicking on either the Taxonomic Serial Number TSN or scientific name if either of these fields is already populated All new records except for unknown taxa or temporary names should have TSN entered if it exists on the ITIS website Species code AMBI Active Yes TSN 174856 Accepted TSN z ITIS website Undo Ciose Scientific name Botaurus enti gin OSUS Authority Common name American bittem Authority subsp Preferred common name American bittem Family Ardeidae EET Note Items in bold are required for new records Items with an asterisk jare to come only from Category bird X General notes NPSpecies or ITIS and not project should not be edited Subcategory z specific except in new records Taxon type specific AOU number 00950 Note Blue text are hyperlinked fields Double H click the TSN or name to specific open the ITIS website taxon notes Status Park Park code Park status Park origin Locallist name Local accepted TSN Preferred sciname Part a n LECL unknown unspecified False nfo
325. s case equal variance will be assumed for all rotating sites A similar rule should be applied to the annual panel variances will be assumed equal unless there are sites with more than sporadic missing years As a simple example if there are three bad weather years and one half of the sites are missed in these 3 years this group of sites may technically be considered another panel and variance may be estimated separately for this panel Trends will be tested by comparing the grand mean divided by the standard error of the mean to the t distribution with the appropriate degrees of freedom two tailed test o 0 10 Using the general case where all rotating panels are assumed to have equal variance the degrees of freedom will be estimated using Satterthwaite s formula 1941 as follows L 2 2 2 2 seio i l 242 242 sesi AipSin 9 Un i l Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network where _ V n ma and a Ni 7 nan 7 ma 10 Nn iR Nn i i iA Plots of the cumulative distributions of slopes also will be made to graphically compare different species elevation strata or regions of the park Example Trend Analysis This example is simulated based on a positive 4 exponential trend across 30 years Figures 1 3 display the example AMRO data log transformed densities by site for each panel with the estimated l
326. s natural and living resources natural hazards and the environment World Wide Web http www usgs gov Telephone 1 888 ASK USGS Any use of trade product or firm names is for descriptive purposes only and does not imply endorsement by the U S Government Although this report is in the public domain permission must be secured from the individual copyright owners to reproduce any copyrighted materials contained within this report Suggested citation Siegel R B Wilkerson R L Jenkins K J Kuntz II R C Boetsch J R Schaberl J P and Happe P J 2007 Landbird monitoring protocol for national parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network U S Geological Survey Techniques and Methods 2 A6 200 p Contents METERS REEL 1 nomine 1 rire OCU OM REDE 1 1 Background and bjectiV8s etc ciere cine tnn htt in ri nan sia 2 ZEE TTE E 4 Field Metliods n rte ro ERE 10 4 Data Handling Analysis and Reporting sess tnnt 3123331 12 5 Personnel Requirements and 19 6 Operational Requirements 20 References ti
327. s the direction the trail follows between the origin and the point Do not install a permanent marker at the first point count station if it lies on the trail After conducting a point count at the point assess again whether it is now possible to walk 200 m perpendicular to the trail If it is then proceed in that direction for the duration of the transect If the path is still blocked by an obstacle continue along the trail placing additional points at 200 m intervals as the crow flies along the trail After each point count leave the trail and head off trail in the manner described above if it is possible If and when it is finally possible to conduct a point count off trail install a permanent marker at the point according to the procedures described in Section 4 Installing Permanent Markers of this SOP SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points 47 Observers will sometimes encounter impassable obstacles such as cliffs or rivers between successive off trail points In this situation the direction of travel should be revised as follows i If you have already left the previous point count station you must return to it before altering your direction of travel Then assess the directions defined by the original direction of travel 45 If both appear traversable randomly select one of them and then follow it for the remainder of the transect unless another barrier is encountered If one direction is tr
328. s were included under the Input Range Constant is zero should NOT be checked Click Confidence Level if you want to change the level of confidence when creating intervals for the regression parameters Select one of the following Output options Click Output Range if you want the test results to be placed on the current sheet Next simply input the cell where you want the output to be placed Click New Worksheet Ply if you want the test results to be placed on a new sheet Next type the name of the new sheet where you want the output to be placed Click Residuals to output the residual values The residual value is simply the difference between the observed value and the fitted value SOP 17 Special Considerations for Small Parks 117 Click Standardized Residuals to output the standardized residual values Standardized residual values unlike residual values are invariant to the scale of measurement Standardized residuals can be used to check for outliers in the data If the standardized residual value is greater than 3 or less than 3 the Observation is a potential outlier Click Residual Plots to return the residual scatterplot The scatterplot allows a visual check of the regression assumptions If the scatterplot has any significant pattern the regression assumptions are being violated Click Line Fit Plots to return a scatterplot of the data with the predicted values added to the plot Normal
329. saction logging X 6 Rare bird observations Both components have an associated front end database application user interface with forms queries etc implemented in Microsoft Access The working database application has separate screens for data entry data review and quality validation tools The master database application contains the analysis and summarization tools including pre formatted report output and exports to other software for example Distance During the field season each project crew will be provided with its own copy of a working database into which they enter process and quality check data for the current season refer to Section 4D Data Entry and Processing and SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification Once data for the field season have been certified they will be uploaded into the master database which is then used for all reporting and analysis This upload process is performed by the Data Manager using a series of pre built append queries D Data Entry and Processing After each field trip technicians should enter data in order to keep current with data entry tasks and to identify any errors or problems as close to the time of data collection as possible The working database application is in the project workspace For enhanced performance it is recommended that users copy the front end database onto their workstation hard drives and open it there This front end copy may be considered dis
330. sample all points in each small park every second year alternating between the two parks each year It is possible however that our sampling regime at LEWI is overly ambitious and represents more work than can be completed under anticipated funding and staffing constraints We will assess the feasibility of our LEWI sampling regime after the 2006 pilot season B Site Selection Criteria for Site Selection Definition of the Boundaries of the Population Being Sampled Sampling will take place during the breeding season late May July Crew members in the large parks will survey the low elevation transects at the beginning of the field season and then work their way upslope gradually as the season progresses This will ensure that all transects are surveyed near the peak of the breeding season for the elevation zone they represent Because the small parks are entirely near sea level we will sample the small parks between late May and mid June Crew members will note detections of all bird species but species targeted for trend analysis will include all terrestrial bird species that are considered reasonably well sampled by point counts passerines near passerines and galliformes Procedures for Selecting Sampling Locations Stratification Spatial Design The sampling frame in the large parks consists of transects starting from points spaced every 50 m along maintained roads and trails in each park and extending perpendicularly aw
331. sample period End_date datetime End date of the sample period Trip purpose text 200 Brief description of the purpose of the trip Protocol version indexed text 100 Version of the protocol used for sampling Trip notes text Details about the trip Period created datetime Time stamp for record creation Default Now Period updated indexed datetime Date of the last update to this record Period updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits tbl Schedule Schedule for monitoring sites Index Index columns Site ID Site ID Calendar year Calendar year pk Schedule primary Calendar year Site ID Field name Index key Data type Description Site ID primary FK text 50 Monitoring site Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Calendar year primary text 10 Calendar year for scheduled sampling not necessarily actually sampled Schedule notes text 255 Comments about this schedule item especially for out of rotation sites 186 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 tbl_Sites Sample sites transects are clusters of sample points used as the basis of sampling summary and Index analysis Index columns Evaluation_code Firing_order Panel_name Panel_type Park_code Site_code unique pk_tbl_Sites primary Site_status Site_updated Slope_clas
332. sects to sample on the tour The Field Lead should provide a list of transects to be sampled and the elevation strata to which they belong Transects should be sampled as seasonal phenology allows with the low elevation sites visited early in the season and high elevation sites visited as the season progresses Once a transect has been sampled it should be marked as such on the season s transect list The Field Lead should determine which transects should be sampled during the upcoming tour by referring to the transect list and considering elevation and accessibility Once the set of transects to be sampled has been established maps for each of the transects should be assembled All survey maps should have been prepared prior to the beginning of the field season SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season For transects that have been sampled in previous years transect summary information should be compiled and taken into the field to assist in locating sample points 2 Planning Travel Routes Arranging Travel Logistics and Securing Backcountry Permits Careful consideration should be given to determining a travel route and order for sampling the transects If one or more of the transects has been sampled in a previous year information on accessing them should be available and referred to in determining travel routes In planning their routes observers should examine trail maps to determine accessibility If current trail conditions are
333. sed on NAD83 Travel Feature 1 Indicate a prominent landscape feature for example a creek or a ridgetop encountered along the way between the previous point and the indicated point Include the name of the landscape feature if it is indicated on the topographic map Distance from previous point The approximate distance based on pacing from the previous point to the indicated landscape feature Travel Feature 2 Indicate a second prominent landscape feature if available encountered along the way between the previous point and the indicated point Include the name of the landscape feature if it is indicated on the topographic map SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points 49 Distance from previous point The approximate distance based on pacing from the previous point to the indicated landscape feature Travel Feature 3 Indicate a third prominent landscape feature if available encountered along the way between the previous point and the indicated point Include the name of the landscape feature if it is indicated on the topographic map Distance from previous point The approximate distance based on pacing from the previous point to the indicated landscape feature Travel Feature 4 Indicate a fourth prominent landscape feature if available encountered along the way between the previous point and the indicated point Include the name of the landscape feature if it is indicated on the topographic
334. semi cardinal direction traveled from the origination point to the first point for example NW for northwest or NN for north The last two characters indicate the order of the point along the half transect starting from the origination point for example the first point surveyed by a particular observer would be 01 the second point would be 02 etc Habl and Hab2 Space is provided to enter habitat data for up to two habitats at each point Habitat designations follow the habitat classification developed by Pacific Meridian Resources PMR Pacific Meridian Resources 1996 with a few additions developed primarily for use at LEWI and SAJH If there is only one PMR habitat present complete the fields for Habl only If two PMR habitats are present determine which one occupies a greater proportion of the vegetation plot and enter data for it after Habl Enter data for the other habitat after Hab2 PMR Habitat Code Enter the 4 letter PMR code for each primary habitat and secondary habitat 1f present on the plot See table 1 at the end of this SOP for a complete list of PMR habitat codes In multi storied habitats classify the habitat according to the tallest vegetation layer PMR Habitat Name Enter the full PMR name for each primary habitat and secondary habitat 1f present on the plot See table 1 for a complete list of PMR habitat names Canopy Cover 96 Place an X in the field that contains the estimated percent c
335. sentations and distribution copies of the data set in the absence of a confidentiality agreement The following components can be used to create individual offsets rounded to the nearest 100 m in Microsoft Excel e Angle 4 359 Distance offset Min offset rand Min offset Public UTME Round UTME final Distance cos radians Angle 90 2 Public UTMN Round UTMN final Distance sin radians Angle 90 2 SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures 125 Project Specific Steps for Updating the Public Coordinates The following steps are specific to the landbird monitoring project 1 Offset large park incidental observation coordinates Criteria Park code LEVT And lt gt SAVH Is best True and Location type incidental 2 Set public coordinates for small park incidental Observations to the centroid of the unit or park Criteria Park code LEVVP Or SAH Is best True and Location type incidental 3 Offset transect origins Criteria Park code lt gt LEVVP And lt gt SAJH Is best True and Location type origin 4 Apply the site transect offsets to non origin points Criteria Park code LEWI And lt gt SAVH Is best True and Location_type lt gt origin And lt gt incidental 5 Set public coordinates for small park grid points to the centroid of the unit or park Criteria
336. sible exception it is often more useful to shorten the duration of the practice point counts to 3 minutes rather than 5 minutes This makes it easier for observers to remember when and where they heard specific vocalizations when they are discussing their results after the point count 5 Identifying Plants and Collecting Habitat Data Throughout the training session the trainer s need to teach the Field Technicians to identify all trees as well as the most common shrubs in the parks Studying birds in different locations each morning should facilitate exposure to a wide variety of plant species and plant communities but observers also will need to study plant guides and receive some instruction to be prepared to identify plants in high elevation plant communities that will not likely be accessible during the training session The crew also should practice collecting habitat data as a group in order to standardize habitat classification canopy cover assessment and tree size class assessment See SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation Practice should occur in multiple habitats and should continue until crew wide standardization is achieved 6 Orienteering During the training session all Field Technicians must become proficient at off trail orienteering including the proper use of a compass altimeter and GPS unit and the ability to read topographic maps GPS signals are frequently unavailable in the NCCN parks so observers must be
337. ssary in the field but can be used especially in areas with satellite signal obstructions External antennas are required for mapping from aircraft or road vehicle With the unit facing you the antenna jack is on the upper right side underneath a small black rubber flap Hold the unit vertically so that the internal antenna is oriented correctly Projection and Datum GPS units receive coordinate data from satellites in latitude and longitude in the WGS 84 datum but can display coordinate in various projections and datums NCCN GPS units should be set up to display coordinate information in UTM zone 10 NAD83 Configuration Settings Configuration settings in MobileMapper receivers consist of setting map display scales selected navigation screens coordinate display selected background maps and power options Contact NCCN GIS Specialists for assistance with setting receiver configurations Receiver Operation and Data Collection Power On and Off Push PWR button to power on Push ENTER when the disclaimer warning screen appears or the unit will automatically shut off To turn off the receiver push PWR twice Most NCCN MobileMapper units have been configured to prevent accidental shut off by forcing users to push the PWR button twice Backlight The backlight can be adjusted by using the PWR button Push the PWR button for more than 2 seconds and then release it to change the backlight from high to low Push the PWR button a
338. st in related tables qa 6c Events missing start times Start times missing where location type is missing or origin qa 6d Events without observers Events without associated observers qa 6e Events without point count data Events without associated point count data where location type incidental qa 6f Events without habitat data Events without associated habitat data where location type lt gt incidental qa 6g Events missing obs records Events at incidental sampling locations without associated rare bird or nesting observations qa 6h Events inconsistent coord info Events at locations where coordinates updated True but missing associated coordinate records or having associated coordinates where coordinates updated False or where coord date is different from the date of the event qa 6i Events inconsistent feature info Events at locations where features updated True but missing associated feature records or having associated features where features updated False qa 6j Events inconsistent marker info Events at locations where markers updated True but missing associated marker records or having associated markers where markers updated False or where marker installed is different from the date of the event qa 6k Events inconsistent image info Events at locations where photos taken True but missing associated image records or havin
339. starting point Along the way they will classify broad vegetation types associated with each of the five survey points The objective of the vegetation classification is threefold 1 to use vegetation class as a covariate in developing detectability functions 2 determine if there are any coarse grained changes in vegetation classes associated with the avian monitoring points and 3 aid in point relocation in subsequent years Such information will not be used analytically but will be examined qualitatively if there are obvious changes in vegetation or bird populations observed over the long term Research on the associations between bird populations and structural characteristics of vegetation are beyond the scope of this monitoring program It is NOT the objective of the avian monitoring program to understand avian community responses to gradients of vegetation structure so we made the decision not to measure individual components of vegetation structure at any finer detail Such measurement would be time consuming and would detract considerably from the primary objective of monitoring avian population trends Detailed data on vegetation structure was collected as part of the preceding avian inventory program Siegel and others 2004a 2004b Wilkerson and others 2005 and provide an opportunity to analyze avian community correlates to gradients in vegetation structure as a separate research exercise Nevertheless habitat classificatio
340. t will include an assessment of park specific and Network trends in avian densities Because a spatially dispersed set of sites is assigned to the annual panel it will be possible to assess regional trends after the first 5 years of sampling by examining just the annual panel After 10 years all transects will be included It will not be possible to estimate trends in the densities of rare species particularly those species detected on only a few transects each sampling cycle Custom designed software programs to conduct the analyses described above have been developed for this project by TerraStat Consulting Group 2005 Appendix 6 BirdTrend User s Manual Density Estimation and Trend Detection in Small Parks The simpler sample designs at SAJH and LEWI which rely not on transects but rather on systematic grids of points will not require the profile summary approach described above Instead we will use Distance to produce a single park specific estimate of density and variance for each species at each of the two parks Additionally we will not use panel designs for the two small parks but instead will survey all points at each park every other year that is we will survey all points at SAJH in year x all points at LEWI in year x 1 all points at SAJH in year x 2 etc We will then use linear regression to assess trends in density estimates over time Although the sampling designs and corresponding analytical methods dif
341. t amp and lo qa 34 Locafions duplicates on site and lo qa 3e Locations duplicates on lec name qa 3f Locahons mussmg samphng events qs 3g Locanons missing establishment da qa 3h Locations loc status inconsistencies qa 3i Locations uuclassified new points qa 3j Locations loc type and loc code in qa 3k Lecation illogical dates 102 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Completing Data Certification Data certification is a benchmark in the project information management process that indicates that 1 the data are complete for the period of record 2 they have undergone and passed the quality assurance checks and 3 that they are appropriately documented and in a condition for archiving posting and distribution as appropriate Certification is not intended to imply that the data are completely free of errors or inconsistencies which may or may not have been detected during quality assurance reviews To ensure that only quality data are included in reports and other project deliverables the data certification step is an annual requirement for all tabular and spatial data The Project Lead is primarily responsible for completing a NCCN Project Data Certification Form available on the NCCN website This brief form and the certified data should be submitted according to the timeline in Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List Refer to SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications for
342. t cfm accessed January 25 2007 Network users have read only access to these files except where information sensitivity may preclude general access 5 NPS Director s Order 19 provides a schedule indicating the amount of time that the various kinds of records should be retained Available at http data2 itc nps gov npspolicy DOrders cfm 136 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network This page intentionally left blank Appendix 3 Schedule for Project Deliverables Appendix 3 137 Deliverable Product Primary Responsibility Target Date Destination s Field season report Field Lead September 15 of the same year NCCN Digital Library Raw GPS data files Field Lead September 15 of the same year NCCN Digital Library Processed GPS data files GIS Specialist September 15 of the same year NCCN Digital Library Digital photographs Project Lead November 30 of the same year NCCN Digital Library Certified working database Project Lead Delivered by November 30 of the Master project database and GIS data 8 J y proj Certified geospatial data Project Lead with GIS same year not posted to public sets copy to NCCN Digital Library Specialist sites until June of the second year and NPS Data Store Data certification report Project Lead November 30 of the same year NCCN Digital Library Metadata intervievv form Profect Lead and NPS Lead November 30 of the same year NCCN Digi
343. t could consume the rest of the week Given the heterogeneity of habitat conditions including elevation aspect weather and plant community covered by the remote stratum a single transect each year could not adequately represent the stratum and would likely yield spurious results Additionally most of us have been involved with previous attempts to conduct wildlife or plant surveys in the remote areas of one or more NCCN parks in the past including attempts to inventory landbirds in the remote stratum at NOCA as well as parkwide lichen surveys at NOCA and amphibian surveys at OLYM These efforts have fared poorly Such projects that were not abandoned altogether had to be redesigned and or resulted in poor crew morale and a failure to meet data collection goals Additionally in previous inventory and monitoring projects we have had extraordinary difficulties defining a priori the target population off trails The unfortunate fact is that we frequently cannot get to plots in the sampling frame we have defined due to high river flows unseasonable snow or wet steep slopes Typically we have dealt with this problem by over selecting randomly chosen plots and then using expert staff to determine which plots were feasible to access and for the potentially accessible ones which times of year were feasible To define safely accessible areas in advance requires a very subjective delineation of park areas that can
344. t counts with distance sampling including completion of the Point Count Conditions Form and Point Count Form which are provided at the end of the SOP Procedures for locating point count stations are described in SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points This survey utilizes 5 minute unlimited radius point counts with distance sampling Recording the distance to each bird detected allows estimation of detection probability an essential analytical component of this study Partitioning the data into birds detected during the first 3 minutes and the last 2 minutes of the point count facilitates comparison with results from the continent wide Breeding Bird Survey BBS which utilizes 3 minute point counts 1 Completing Point Count Conditions Form Before beginning the transect complete the top section of the Point Count Conditions Form as follows Park Enter LEWI MORA NOCA OLYM or SAJH Transect Enter the 4 digit transect number Date Enter the date as mm dd yyyy Observer Enter the first and last name of the observer Upon arriving at each sample point immediately mark the site with a vinyl flag differing in color from the flags used for marking the travel route The next step is to complete a line of data in the table on the Point Count Conditions Form as follows Point Enter the 4 character point name The first two characters indicate the semi cardinal direction traveled from the originatio
345. t each product contains sensitive information see SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures for more detail This form can be downloaded from the NCCN website or obtained from the Data Manager People who submit digital files directly to the NCCN Digital Library will be prompted for the same information and so a submission form is not required Upon notification and or receipt of the completed products the Data Manager or GIS Specialist will check them into the NCCN project tracking application 120 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Product Delivery Schedule and Specifications Deliverable product Primary responsibility Target date Instructions the same year Field season report Project Lead September 15 of Upload digital file in MS Word format to the NCCN Digital the same year Library submissions folder Raw GPS data files Field Crew Lead September 15 of Zip and send all digital files to the GIS Specialist Processed GPS data files GIS Specialist September 15 of the same year Zip and upload raw and processed files to the NCCN Digital Library Certified geospatial data Project Lead with GIS Specialist Data certification report Project Lead Metadata interview form Project Lead and NPS Lead the same year Digital photographs Project Lead November 30 of Organize name and maintain photographic images in
346. t folder names to 20 characters or fewer Dates should be formatted as Y YY YMMDD File Naming Standards In all cases file names should follow these guidelines No spaces or special characters in the file name Use the underbar character to separate file name components Try to limit file names to 30 characters or fewer up to a maximum of 50 characters Dates should be formatted as Y YY YMMDD Correspondence files should be named as YYYYMMDD AuthorName subject ext Archival and Records Management All project files should be reviewed cleaned up and organized by the Project Lead and NPS Lead on a regular basis for example annually in January Decisions on what to retain and what to destroy should be made following guidelines stipulated in NPS Director s Order 19 which provides a schedule indicating the amount of time that the various kinds of records should be retained Many of the files for this project may be scheduled for permanent retention so it is important to isolate and protect them rather than lose them in the midst of a large disordered array of miscellaneous project files Because this is a long term monitoring project good records management practices are critical for ensuring the continuity of project information Files will be more useful to others if they are well organized well named and stored in a common format In addition files containing sensitive information must be stored in a manner
347. t issues in the parks including visitor impacts fire management and the effects of introduced species B Rationale for Selecting this Resource to Monitor Landbird populations provide an excellent resource to monitor for several reasons First landbird monitoring is particularly efficient many species can be monitored simultaneously vvith the same survey protocol and costs are relatively low Preliminary analyses indicate that our project design will allow monitoring of population trends with a reasonable degree of statistical power for numerous species see Section 2E Level of Change That Can Be Detected for the Amount Type of Sampling Being Instituted The capacity to capture a fairly broad sector of park resources for example numerous bird species elevates the desirability of monitoring landbirds over some other taxa for which expensive projects may only monitor a single species Croze 1982 Manley and others 2004 Relative to other animal taxa landbirds are easy to detect at least during the breeding season They generally occupy a high position on the food web and they provide important ecological functions such as seed dispersal and insect control making them good indicators of changes in ecosystems Furness and others 1993 Greenwood and others 1993 Well developed standardized data collection methods and analytical procedures for estimating landbird population density already exist and will facilitate comparisons
348. t of the image Orig format text 20 Format of the original image Image edit notes text 200 Comments about the editing or processing performed on the image Image is active bit Indicates whether the image is still being used for navigation or interpretation Default True Image root path text 100 Drive space location of the main project folder or image library Image project path text 100 Location of the image from the main project folder or image library Default images Image filename text 100 Name of the image including extention jpg but without the image path Image notes text Comments about the image tbl Incidental Obs Incidental observations of non rare species Index Index columns Park code Park code Start date Obs date Taxon ID Taxon ID Contact ID Contact ID pk Incidental Obs primary Park code Obs date Taxon ID Contact ID Field name Index key Data type Description Park code primary text 4 Park code Taxon ID primary FK text 50 Taxon observed Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol Contact ID Obs date Loc description Obs_notes primary FK primary text 50 datetime text 50 text 200 Appendix 7 181 February 27 2007 Observer identifier Observation date Brief description of the location of the observation Comments about this observation tbl Locations Sample loca
349. t that The user name is automatically filled in if it was blank once the user types in the remedy details Quality Assurance Review Form p C View Edit Close Results Summary View and Fix Query Results Browse data tables Query name na 2d Sites missing evaluation codes LDesiga view User name Wilkerson Bob Query Established or rejected Sites without evaluation codes description Remedy 3 records fixe Sie 0 I Smcse seram Prism E E Sit y 120060126112748 212330937 385559 4013 Medium Ra relec 20060126112748 606938242 912292 4041 Medium discarded rejec 20060126112748 834396362 304688 4051 High discarded rejec 3 20060329170039 862619340 419769 A button labeled Design view also on this page opens the currently selected query in the design interface in Microsoft Access In this manner the user can verify that the query is in fact filtering records appropriately Note Any desired changes to query structure or names should be discussed with the Data Manager prior to making these changes E qa 2d Sites missing evaluation codes Select Query Certain queries due to their structural complexity cannot be edited directly Other queries may not contain all fields the user may want to see in order to make the best decision about whether and how to edit a given record In such cases the user may opt to view and or edit data directly in the data tables To facilitate this process the Browse D
350. ta integrity missing data and illogical values and allows the user to fix these problems and document the fixes See SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification View db window Allows the user to view database objects tables queries and forms Back up data Creates a date stamped copy of the back end database file Connect data tables Verifies the connection to the back end working database file and provides the option to redirect or update that connection SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification 83 Here is a view of the main menu switchboard form North Coast and Cascades Network onal Park Service Inventory and Monitoring Program J epartment of the Interior Main menu Defaults Info Enter edit data Training notes Lookup tables View db window Back up data Current back end file CAMy Documents WorkspacelLandbirds BDa 3databaselLandbirds BDa03 be 2006 OLYM mdb Connect data tables The second tab shows the current default settings North Coast and Cascades Network Nation k Inventory and Monitoring Program U S Department ot the Interior ice Main menu Defaults info Current defaults Project Tmerane EN User a Park OLYM ur Activity Prompt for backup on startup 2 Prompt for backup on exit Current back end file jv Compact back end on exit CAMy s Documents Workspace Landbirds_BDa03 database Landbirds_BDa03_be_2006_OLYM mdb table l
351. tal Library Full metadata parsed XML Data Manager and GIS Specialist March 15 of the following year NPS Data Store NCCN Digital Libraryl Annual I amp M report Project Lead April 30 of the following year NatureBib NCCN Digital Library printout to local park collections Field data forms NPS Lead and Project Lead Every 5 years by April 30 Scanned PDF files in NCCN Digital Library physical copies moved to park collections 5 year analysis report Data Analyst Every 5 years by April 30 NatureBib NCCN Digital Library printout to local park collections Other publications NPS Lead Project Lead Data Analyst As completed NatureBib NCCN Digital Library printout to local park collections Other records NPS Lead and Project Lead Review for retention every January Retain according to NPS Director s Order 19 The NCCN Digital Library is a hierarchical digital filing system stored on the NCCN file servers Boetsch J R Christoe B and Holmes R E 2005 Data management plan for the North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program USDI National Park Service Port Angeles Washington 88 p available only online at http www 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt cfm accessed January 25 2007 Network users have read only access to these files except where information sensitivity may preclude general access
352. tates without first seeking the advice of an NPS solicitor Freedom of Information FOIA Requests All official FOIA requests will be handled according to NPS policy The NPS Lead will work with the Data Manager and the park FOIA representative s of the park s for which the request applies Reference Cited National Park Service 2006 Management policies Accessed February 6 2007 http www nps gov policy mp policies htm SOP 20 Product Posting and Distribution 127 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 20 Product Posting and Distribution Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change This document provides details on the process of posting and otherwise distributing finalized data reports and other project deliverables For a complete list of project deliverables refer to SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications Product Posting Once digital products have been delivered and processed the following steps will be taken by the Data Manager to make them generally available 1 Full metadata records will be posted to the NPS Data Store which is the NPS clearinghouse for natural resource data and metadata that is available to the public at http science nature nps gov nrdata Refer to the website for upload instructions 2 A record for reports and other
353. te the nesting stage If no nest was observed do not mark any of the choices Description Use this space to thoroughly document the rare bird sighting Include diagnostic field marks and or vocalizations that would separate the species from similar sounding or appearing species For truly rare species the documentation should be thorough enough to convince reviewers that the observation is authentic Record the sex of the individual if possible as well as any nest sightings or activity indicative of nesting 66 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol March 19 2007 NCCN Landbirds Rare Bird Report Form Park Time Observer 1 Observer 2 Species Name Species Code X Quantity Location Name Coordinate Source circle one GPS GPS Model GPS File Name Easting Northing GPS Error m Datum Unkn Building Eggs Transect and Point if detected during point count Nesting Stage check one Nestlings Recent Fledglings Description include fieldmarks and or vocalization description and indicate sex and any nest sightings or behavior indicative of nesting Park Time Observer 1 Observer 2 Species Name Species Code Quantity Location Name oordinate Source circle one Map GPS GPS Model GPS File Name Northing GPS Error m Datum
354. ted v DR A eaaa 22 SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season seen ttes 27 SOP 2 Workspace Setup and Project Records 31 SOP 3 Training OWS Grvers sus inti tete ntt 33 SOP 4 Field Tour Preparation 5 adver dn AA Aa 43 SOP 5 Establishing Relocating and Describing Survey Points 45 SOP 6 Conducting Point Counts enrichir ttti retia saa rta rero SOP 7 Classifying Vegetation o ctt vetta SOP 8 Reporting Rare Bird Detections sese tnnt trennen SOP 9 Field Form Handling Procedures SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data seserinis aaaeeeaa EEEa EA EEEE EEA tennis ttn tnnt SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images sse tnnt tentent tentent SOP 12 Data Entry and VerifIC aln cte ttn etre tete etate nias SOP 13 After the Field Seasori intento rent tr rid SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification SOP 15 Metadata SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting treten tentent tentent tnn SOP 17 Special Considerations for Small Parks
355. that arose and explains how they were addressed Clearly documents and explains any diversions from established protocols Points out any interesting or potentially important observations about the parks bird communities that may have been noted during the field season for example apparent changes in phenology from previous years or notable changes in apparent abundance of particular species Provides suggestions for improving the training session or field season logistics in the future The Field Lead also is responsible for ensuring that all equipment is properly inventoried cleaned and stored see SOP 13 After the Field Season and any gate keys or other items that have been checked out from NPS staff are returned Additional end of season tasks are discussed in Section 4L Season Close Out 4 Data Handling Analysis and Reporting This chapter describes the procedures for data handling analysis and report development Additional details and context for this chapter are provided in the NCCN Data Management Plan Boetsch and others 2005 which describes the overall information management strategy for the network The NCCN website also contains guidance documents on various information management topics for example report development GIS development GPS use A Project Information Management Overview Project information management may be best understood as an ongoing or cyclic process as shown in
356. that will enable quick identification Refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures for more information To help ensure safe and organized electronic file management NCCN has implemented a system called the NCCN Digital Library which is a hierarchical digital filing system stored on the NCCN file servers Boetsch and others 2005 The typical arrangement is by project then by year to facilitate easy access Network users have read only access to these files except where information sensitivity may preclude general access As digital products are delivered for long term storage according to the schedule in SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications they will be catalogued in the NCCN project tracking database and filed within the NCCN Digital Library Analog non digital materials are to be handled according to current practices of the individual park collections Reference Cited Boetsch J R Christoe B and Holmes R E 2005 Data management plan for the North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program USDI National Park Service Port Angeles WA 88 p Available at http www 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt cfm SOP 3 Training Observers 33 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 3 Training Observers Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change
357. the the same year project workspace according to SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images Certified working database Project Lead November 30 of Refer to the following section on delivering certified data and related materials Full metadata parsed XML Data Manager and GIS Specialist March 15 of the following year Upload the parsed XML record to the NPS Data Store and stor in the NCCN Digital Library Annual I amp M report Project Lead and NPS Lead April 30 of the following year 5 year analysis report Project Lead NPS Lead Data Analyst Every 5 years by April 30 Other publications NPS Lead Project Lead Data Analyst As completed Refer to the following section on reports and publications Field data forms NPS Lead and Every 5 years by Scan original marked up field forms as PDF files and upload Project Lead April 30 these to the NCCN Digital Library submissions folder Originals go to the Park Curator for archival Other records NPS Lead and Review for Organize and send analog files to Park Curator for archival Project Lead retention every Digital files that are slated for permanent retention should be January uploaded to the NCCN Digital Library Retain or dispose of records following NPS Director s Order 19 The NCCN Digital Library is a hierarchical digital filing system stored on the NCCN file servers Boetsch and others 2005 Network users have
358. ther products are to be posted to NPS clearinghouses in a timely manner as they are received and processed Responding to Data Requests Occasionally a park or project staff member may be contacted directly regarding a specific data request from another agency organization scientist or from a member of the general public The following points should be considered when responding to data requests NPS is the originator and steward of the data and the NPS Inventory and Monitoring Program should be acknowledged in any professional publication using the data 128 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network NPS retains distribution rights copies of the data should not be redistributed by anyone but NPS Data that project staff members and cooperators collect using public funds are public records and as such can not be considered personal or professional intellectual property No sensitive information information about the specific nature or location of protected resources may be posted to the NPS Data Store or another publicly accessible website or otherwise shared or distributed outside NPS without a confidentiality agreement between NPS and the agency organization or person s with whom the sensitive information is to be shared Refer to the section in this document about sensitive information and also to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures e For quality assuran
359. tification Certified geospatial data GIS themes in ESRI coverage or shapefile format Refer to NCCN GIS Development Guidelines North Coast and Cascades Network 2006 and NCCN GIS Product Specifications North Coast and Cascades Network 2005a for more information Data certification report A brief questionnaire in Microsoft Word that describes the certified data product s being submitted A template form is available on the NCCN website at http www 1 nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm Metadata interview form The Metadata Interview Form is an Microsoft Word questionnaire that greatly facilitates metadata creation It is available on the NCCN website at http www 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm For more details refer to SOP 15 Metadata Development After the quality review is completed the Project Lead should package the certification materials for delivery as follows 1 Open the certified back end database file and compact it in Microsoft Access Tools gt Database Utilities gt Compact and Repair Database This will make the file size much smaller Back end files typically are indicated with the letters _be in the name for example Landbirds BDa03 be 2007 mdb 2 Rename the certified back end file with the project code BDa03 the year or span of years for the data being certified and the word certified Fo
360. tification step is an annual requirement for all tabular and spatial data The Project Lead is the primary person responsible for completing an NCCN Project Data Certification Form available on the NCCN website This brief form should be submitted with the certified data according to the timeline in Appendix 2 Yearly Project Task List Refer to SOP 14 Data Quality Review and Certification and SOP 18 Product Delivery Specifications for specific instructions H Data Analysis Annual reports will include little data analysis beyond simple tabulation and summary of the year s data with particular emphasis on raw count results obtained from the annual panel of transects in each of the larger parks but every 5 years we will produce a more comprehensive report that provides a detailed analysis of data gathered to date Refer to Appendix 3 Schedule for Project Deliverables for the specific analysis tasks and their timing and to SOP 16 Data Analysis and Reporting for a more detailed description of analytical procedures The analytical procedures summarized in this section will be conducted every 5 years rather than annually Correcting Point Count Data for Detectability At the end of every 5 year interval we will conduct a complete analysis of factors influencing the detectability of birds and will develop detectability models to be used in estimating density of birds from the raw counts We will use the software program
361. ting Also the program is designed to append outputs to existing files in order to generate a single table for all species So if either of the specified output files does not exist the program will generate a warning If Appendix 6 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 you vvant appended output then change the output file names and rerun BirdTrendAnnualDensity Table A6 4 shows the sample table output from BirdTrendAnnualDensity for the supplied input file testcasefull csv Table A6 5 contains a list of the possible errors warnings and notes that can result from a call to BirdTrendAnnualDensity Running BirdTrend The first time BirdTrend is run in a particular working directory you must type gt source dirlocWBirdTrendV 1 1 R at the command line prompt and hit enter The dirloc is the exact directory location where the BirdTrend computer files are stored This command makes the program resident in the working directory Then type gt BirdTrendV1 1 infile INFILE csv outfile OUTFILE txt slopes out SLOPEFILE txt summary out SUMMARYFILE txt combine parks F plot cdf None plot outdirDIRECTORY at the command line prompt and hit enter The NFILE csv is the name and exact directory location of the clean input file that has been produced by PreBirdTrend The OUTFILE txt SLOPEFILE txt and SUMMARYFILE txt are the requested names for the trend results files including th
362. tinued Site created date datetime Time stamp for record creation Default Now Site updated indexed datetime Date of the last update to this record Site updated by text 50 Person who made the most recent edits tbl Strata Stratification classes used during design and analysis Index Index columns pk tbl Strata primary Stratum updated Strata unique Stratum ID Stratum updated Park code Project code Stratification date Stratum name Field name Index key Datatype Description Stratum ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each stratum record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Park code unique text 4 4 letter park code of the stratification Project code unique text 10 Project code for linking information with other data sets and applications Default BDa03 Appendix 7 187 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Stratification date unique datetime Date on which the stratification occurred used for grouping strata Stratum_name unique text 25 Name of the stratification class e g low medium high Stratum_definition text 250 Brief text definition of the stratum e g elevations below 1000 meters N_population int Total population in the stratum Weight_factor double Weight factor to be used in analyses inverse of inclusion probability Stratum_notes text Comments about the stratum Stratum_created datetime Time sta
363. tions point count positions transect start points and locations of rare bird Index observations Index columns Loc_updated Location_code pk tbl Locations primary Location status Location type Park code Public type Public scale Site ID Trail or road Loc updated Location code Location ID Location status Location type Park code Public type Public scale Site ID Trail or road Unique identifier for each sample location Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Park code optional except for incidental observations not associated with sites Site membership of the sample location transect Alphanumeric code for the sample location e g NN1 or TO Indicates the type of sample location Brief colloquial name of the sample location generally only used as a landmark name for incidental observations UTM easting zone 10N meters after any dithering or resolution reduction UTM northing zone 10N meters after any dithering or resolution reduction Type of processing performed to make coordinates Estimated accuracy of public coordinates Elevation of the location Units for elevation data Source of elevation data Slope steepness in degrees Field name Index key Data type Description Location ID primary text 50 Park code indexed text 4 Site ID indexed FK text 50 Location code indexed text 10 for transect origin Location type
364. to be shared Refer to SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures for more information SOP 21 Revising the Protocol 129 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Standard Operating Procedure SOP 21 Revising the Protocol Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Overview This document explains how to make and track changes to the NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol including its accompanying SOPs Project staff should refer to this SOP whenever edits are necessary and should be familiar with the protocol versioning system in order to identify and use the most current versions of the protocol documents Required revisions should be made in a timely manner to minimize disruptions to project planning and operations This protocol attempts to incorporate the best and most cost effective methods for monitoring and information management As new technologies methods and equipment become available this protocol will be updated as appropriate by balancing current best practices against the continuity of protocol information All changes will be made in a timely manner with the appropriate level of review All edits require review for clarity and technical soundness Small changes to existing documents for example formatting simple clarification of existing content small changes in the task schedule or project b
365. toring and may decide to assume all Project Lead responsibilities at the end of the 5 year period Other personnel who will provide key roles in the implementation of this program include the Data Manager GIS Specialist Network Coordinator Park Biologists or Resource Specialists at each of the five parks and the USGS Liaison Specific responsibilities of all personnel involved with this project are detailed in Appendix 1 Project Roles and Responsibilities B Qualifications The Field Lead each year must be a highly skilled birder with experience conducting point counts with distance sampling and familiarity with Pacific Northwest birds and plant communities Familiarity with one or more of the NCCN parks also is desirable Ideally the Field Lead will have supervised field crews before and or previously served as an NCCN landbird monitoring crew member Finally s he must be very physically fit and prepared to spend extended periods of time in the backcountry 5 Personnel Requirements and Training 19 Field Technicians should have prior birding experience including substantial experience with NCCN birds or a demonstrated ability to quickly learn the songs and calls of new bird species They also must be very physically fit and prepared to spend extended periods of time in the backcountry Substantial backpacking experience and experience conducting point counts with distance sampling also are desirable More detailed descriptio
366. tory of San Juan Island National Historical Park Technical Report NPS D 73 of the National Park Service Siegel R B Wilkerson R L and Schaberl J 2004c Landbird inventory of Mount Rainier National Park first annual progress report The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Wilkerson R L Siegel R B and Schaberl J 2005 Landbird inventory of Mount Rainier National Park 2003 2004 final report The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Wilkerson R L and Siegel R B 2005 Landbird inventory of Levvis and Clark National Historical Park 2004 The Institute for Bird Populations Point Reyes Station CA Annual Monitoring Meeting Minutes North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program 2004 Summary of Avian Monitoring Discussions at the Temporal Sampling Workshop at Olympic National Park on November 12 14 2003 provided by Kurt Jenkins and including subsequent discussions with P Geissler R Siegel B Wilkerson Andrea Woodward North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2000 Meeting notes of the National Park Service Avian Monitoring Group at a workshop held at North Cascades National Park on September 12 13 2000 North Coast and Cascades Network Inventory and Monitoring Program Avian Monitoring Group 2002 Meeting notes to design an avian inventory in North Coast and Cascades Network parks
367. ty of each species at each point for all years under consideration To estimate point specific densities for a particular year in Distance begin by querying the NCCN landbird monitoring database to create a text file containing all point count detections for the year of interest At a minimum the text file will need to contain fields indicating the park NOCA MORA etc the habitat group open canopy or closed canopy the survey point the species 4 letter codes will be most convenient and the estimated distance from the observer If other variables such as observer or year also have affected detectability they need be included as well A few things to keep in mind when creating the text file Detections classified in the database as flyovers should be omitted from the text file There must be at least one record for every point that was surveyed in the year of interest For points where no birds were detected there should be a single record with species None Failure to account for points with no detections will cause an upward bias in the results e Distance will not perform the calculations correctly if the records are not sorted properly For the density estimations the records must be sorted by point such that all records for each species at each point are grouped together in the database Import the text file into Distance At Step 5 of the New Project Setup Wizard be sure to check the box indicating
368. u dgT KrojuoAuTdgI KrojuoAu dgI K1ojuoAu dgT VMOL ipuasuao D2104pua T Io QI0AA S PU SUAOL AIOWOAUT gI K1oguoAu d dI KiojuoAu d gI K1oquoAu d gI K1ogueAu d dI MALA suaosa181u n2104pu2 q IQM KLIO poyeory yor gq KiojuoAu dgI ATOWOAUTY dI AIOWOAUT gI qq ssoq qq ssoq VARA DIDUOLOD D2i04pua T Io QreA pedumn Ao o9A KiojuoAu dgI ATOWWOAUT gI AIOWOAUT gI Iwy Ao u Au A Io QIVAA AO 9 popioooswnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN POPIODOYION AIOWOAUT gI VMVN njndpoina DAOAIULI2A Io QI AA O IAUSEN A1OWOAUTG A KioquoAu d dI K1oqueAu d dI K1oguoAu d dI KiojuoA u d gI VAOO D10122 D4OAMUA24 IOJQIEM AIOWWOAUT 41 popiooosnoN AIOWOAUT IT AIOWWOAUTY GI AIOWOAUT AI WNAOAPAD p nodquog SUTAXEAL Tepo popiooosnoN qq ssoq VMOU suyuna p nodquoqg SUTAXEAL URTWOYOg popiooownoN popiooosnoN AIOWWOAUTY dI 21415504 Id NV suaosaqna snuy d q ueououry K1ojuoAumdgI KiojuoAu dgI pepioooswnoN AIOWOAUT gI ILSNA SLDS A snug Sulu ueodounq popiooownoN popioooswnoN popiooosnoN 2 415504 popiooownoN OINON sojojs amp jod snunpy URON popiooownoN popiooownoN popiooownoN popioooswnoN VOD S1 u2ui o4D2 p l r tunq ps qae Aen popiooownoN Iy AToyu AUlq 41 Ao u Au 4 TI K1ojueAud gI HIVA sna pu sn uox qsnig L poured KiojueAu d gI K1ojueAud gI KiojueAu d gI KiogueAu d GI K1ojueAu d gI
369. udget or general updates to information management handling SOPs may be reviewed in house by project cooperators and NCCN staff However changes to data collection or analysis techniques sampling design or response design will trigger an outside review to be coordinated by the Pacific West Regional Office Procedures Discuss proposed changes with other project staff prior to making modifications Consult with the Data Manager prior to making changes because certain types of changes may jeopardize data set integrity unless they are planned and executed with data set integrity in mind Because certain changes may require altering the database structure or functionality advance notice of changes is important to minimize disruptions to project operations Consensus should be reached on who will be making the changes and in what timeframe Make the agreed upon changes in the current primary version of the appropriate protocol document for example not the most recent versioned copy see below Note that the protocol is split into separate documents for each appendix and SOP Note A change in one document also may necessitate other changes elsewhere in the protocol For example a change in the narrative may require changes to several SOPs similarly renumbering an SOP may mean changing document references in several other documents The project task list and other appendixes also may need to be updated to reflect changes in timing
370. ued protection These products should clearly indicate that they are solely for internal NPS use by containing the phrase Internal NPS Use Only Not For Release These products can only be shared within NPS or in cases where a confidentiality agreement is in place They do not need to be revised in a way that conceals the location of protected resources Data Sets To create a copy of a data set that will be posted or shared outside NPS 1 Make sure the public offset coordinates have been populated for each sample or observation location in tbl Locations 2 Remove tbl Coordinates and tbl GPS Info 3 Delete the following database objects to ensure consistent omission of fields that may contain specific identifying information about locations of protected resources a Sites Site notes b Locations Travel notes Locations Elevation Elev units Elev source d Locations Location desc e Locations Location notes f tbl Features g Markers The local master copy of the database contains the exact coordinates and all data fields The Data Manager and or GIS Specialist can provide technical assistance as needed to apply coordinate offsets or otherwise edit data products for sensitive information Maps and Other GIS Output General use maps and other geographic representations of observation data that will be released or shared outside NPS should be rendered using offset coordinates and shou
371. uiio popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popioooswnoN 21415804 popiooosnoN 104 1421s40f Du421g Ulo 5 18 KxiojuoAuTd gI popiooosnoN 1418804 popiooosnoN JIVO pidsp Du421g Ulo ueidse popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN e qissoq popiooosnoN Da D amp jopial DSSIM pesso oerg popiooosnoN KxoquoAu d q popiooownoN e qrssoq e qrssoq NOMD su s np18 SNADT IND pesurm snoone H Aoyu Au gI popiooosnoN ay popiooownoN NOAM sijp1uapi220 sniv IND u19159AA pepio esnoN 21415504 21418804 NOVO snoqusofilp Snap TAD eroe popiooo noN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN oe YY lq ssoq nog SIsuadDMv ap sniv ID pejiq surq popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN e qissoq popiooosnoN NDAN SNUDI SNADT mO MIW popiooosnoN 21415804 DHHH 1uupuL22n SHADT IND s uupuL H popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 21418804 nood SNADT s ay1edeuog popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 21415504 popiooosnoN NSOO o pup3 o pulpo drus uouruo popiooosnoN popiooownoN popiooownoN J qissog popiooosnoN Oq41 snaopdojoos 14 840 popiooosnoN popiooowrnoN popiooownoN 21418504 popiooownoN odas snasus JouojyAo q po mq 10us popiooosnoN popiooosnoN popiooownoN 9 qtssod popiooowrnoN 7804 puldip SIAPYDD urun
372. uld not be part of the exam In addition two or more groups of approximately 10 recordings each should be grouped together in rapid succession to produce simulated point counts which test crew member s ability to rapidly identify vocalizations as is often required in the field Field Technicians also should have to identify 30 40 photographic images of birds generally rarer species or less obvious female plumages computer CD ROM programs work well for this Passing the exam should require a near perfect score Field Technicians who do not pass should be given feedback on which species they misidentified and be allowed to take the full exam again after a few days or a week The exam needs to be remade the order if not the identity of the recordings and pictures needs to be changed before the exam can be administered again 2 Pacing Practicing distance estimation is greatly facilitated by being able to reliably measure distance by pacing Accurate pacing also greatly helps in finding point count stations Field Technicians should be taught to measure distance by pacing within the first few days of training The trainer should measure out a 50 m walking route somevvhere fairly flat where the crew can walk freely and repeatedly Field Technicians should walk the route and count their steps multiple times and then commit to memory their average number of paces needed to travel 50 and 10 m Experienced observers should conduct
373. unctions on data stored as comma delimited ASCII files Some messages will be printed on the R command screen but the main output from the programs are text files which are Appendix 6 151 NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 created in directories specified by the user Details on the process are described below with examples Input files The required input file is a comma delimited ASCII file extension csv containing data from all sampled transects in each sampled year Zero densities must be included if transects were sampled and no birds of the given species were observed If no data are present for a given subplot or transect for a given year the program assumes that the subplot or transect were not sampled Both programs can be run with multiple species but due to the size of the input files and the potential size of the output files we recommend running one species at a time The table in the file should have a header row and consist of the following columns with one species density observation per line Note that the columns MUST be in the following order although the column headers do not need to precisely match these headers Park OLYM NOCA or MORA Year Sampling year Numeric field Panel Unique alphanumeric identifier Ann1 Alt1 Alt2 Alt3 etc NOTE rotating panels must be identified with Alt as the first alphanumeric characters in the panel ID Elevation Elevation Group 1 for low
374. und Height Above Ground For tree tags indicate the approximate height above ground in centimeters For ground stakes indicate the approximate height to which the stake protrudes from the ground in centimeters Offset Dist Indicate the distance between the actual survey point and the marker in meters Offset Bearing Indicate the declinated compass bearing from the point to the marker Marker Comments Provide any additional information that might help someone find the marker in the future including a brief description of how to find the marker from the sampling point 5 Completing Transect Visit Log When both partners have finished collecting habitat and location data at all of their points they should meet at the transect origin point where they can work together to complete the Transect Visit Log as follows Park Enter LEWI MORA NOCA OLYM or SAJH Transect Enter the 4 digit transect number Date Enter the date as mm dd yyyy Observerl Enter the first and last name of one of the Observers Observer2 Enter the first and last name of the other Observer Use the large table to summarize the data collected for each point on the transect each point should receive its own line of data in the table If more space is needed attach a second sheet Transect Arm Code For each point indicate the 2 character direction code used to name the points along the half transect SVV SS etc
375. unso puoi Iop1o no suuinpoo sey opu nduy Jossoooudoud v unII pue 1ndur y o s Supu Aress u oui STRIP 107 ajifjno syooyo 10sso20Jdoud ssed you pip ejr 1ndur porjroedg 108592024 v undo pue 3ndur jsnfpe r pao 10 s 9SN n JOJ Jopso Jo jno ore dur oy ur suum o eureu Mou AH ds isn S3S x Apere op 1ndjno ueo eureu Mou gyroeds jsn s3six z Woda nding jsixo JOU s op f nduy eureu dyno ueo o Sutssr A eureu ajy odas indino Surtssr eureu opty dur Sutssrq opino pue s 4 A A A A A A A OL PHM o sue ouo ATUO sey dno427 4DA Anois ooue ue A puo 10 18 O uoos OOL E Ep JO s1eo eAnnoesuoo oA seu ATUO qIYAVd 103 1ndug Jossooo1doud uniei pue SULIOPIO uum oo XL JopJo Jo mo oJe suuinjo pua4rpaigao4qd unioi pue porrpoui snu 1 1 qiq seuvuruns pue sSurum A SsIOTWH 107 1n0110do1 yooyD Jossooo1doud UNJOI pue SULIOPIO uum oo qmo oJe suuinjo Iossoooidaid unos pue oureu o rj Mou e A ds sisix Kpeoupe indjno NV4 TO peuroedg Jossoooudeud under pue ouru l Mou g AH d sisrx peoijp mdymo p
376. up A section of the networked file server at each host park is reserved for this project and access permissions are established so that project staff members have access to needed files within this workspace Prior to each season the NPS Lead should make sure that network accounts are established for each new staff member and that the Data Manager is notified to ensure access to the project workspace and databases The recommended file structure within this workspace is shown in figure 1 Certain folders especially those for GPS data and images should be retained in separate folders for each calendar year as shown in figure 1 This will make it easier to identify and move these files to the project archives at the end of each season Each major subfolder is described as follows Analysis Contains working files associated with data analysis Database Contains the working database file for the season The master database for the project is stored in the enterprise data management system Boetsch and others 2005 Documents Contains subfolders to categorize documents as needed for various stages of project implementation GPS data Contains GPS data dictionaries and raw and processed GPS data files Note This folder contains subfolders to arrange files by year Each of these subfolders also contains the project code BDa03 to make it easier to select the correct project folder within the GPS processi
377. uring field Technicians May July 5 6 7 8 9 and 10 tri ps Review data forms after each day Technicians Daily Check in with Park Biologist Technicians After each tour De brief crew on operations field methods gear needs Field Lead After each tour 134 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork Project stage Task description Responsibility Timing Data Entry and Download GPS data and email files to GIS Specialist for Technicians After each tour Processing correction SOP 10 Sections 4C and 4D Download and process digital images SOP 11 Technicians After each tour SOPs 10 11 and 12 Enter data into working copy of the database SOP 12 Technicians After each tour Verification of accurate transcription as data are entered Technicians After each tour Correct GPS data and send screen capture to Field Lead and Project Lead for review GIS Specialist After each tour Periodic review of GPS location data and database Field Lead Bi weekly entries for completeness and accuracy Merge correct and export GPS data Upload processed GIS Specialist August and verified coordinates to database Product Development Complete field season report SOP 13 Field Lead July August Section 41 Product Delivery Send field season report to NPS Lead Park Biologists Project Lead By September 30 Section 4J Data Manager and GIS Specialist SOP 18 Quality Rev
378. urveyed point and select a new direction of travel The new direction of travel will be determined as follows 1 The observer assesses the directions defined by the original direction 45 2 If both appear traversable one is randomly chosen and then followed for the remainder of the transect unless another barrier is encountered 3 one direction is traversable and the other is not the traversable one is followed for the remainder of the transect If neither direction is traversable the observer assesses the directions defined by the original direction 90 in the same manner as described above In some instances such as when a trail is immediately adjacent to a river it may not be feasible for one or both of the observers to walk even 100 m away from the trail In this situation the observer will conduct the point counts directly on the trail every 200 m ina pre determined direction After each successive point count the observer will reassess the feasibility of returning to the perpendicular bearing and if it seems promising leave the trail to conduct the remainder of the transect off trail in the cardinal or semi cardinal direction that best approximates a perpendicular bearing from the trail We are confident that conducting some of our transects partially or completely on trails will not unduly bias survey results as landbird inventory work at NOCA has shown that bird detectability during point counts appears unaf
379. us comments about each sampling event quality assurance information about the event and information on who created the sampling event record who last updated it etc When all data for the sampling event have been entered click on the button that says Verify this sampling event to indicate that the event record is complete and accurately reflects the field forms The following forms for point count data and habitat assessment can be accessed from the Data Entry Form using either the Point count data or Habitat data buttons at the top of the form Park OLY Transect i001 Date 5282000 Obsever Newname E Point Starttime T Speciescode Distim Seenfist Ever sang Time int Prev obs Flyover Group size Comments mE Next point Point zi Next point SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification 87 Rare bird observations also can be accessed from the Data Gateway Form either by changing the filter and opening by selecting the appropriate Visit date cell or by adding a new record using the New rare bird obs button Relevant records also may be accessed directly for verification by double clicking on the appropriate row of the Rec status column in the Data Gateway Form Rare Bird Observations Park 7 Find record 1 Nevv record Close Date Time Observers 7 7 Species Er o use esr Quantity J Obs dist m m Location name 4 Coord source P
380. ver of the vegetation type at the sample point using PMR cover classes 180 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork NCCN Landbird Monitoring Protocol February 27 2007 Tree size class indexed text 10 Tree size class of the dominant tree species using PMR size classes Habitat notes text 200 Comments about the habitat inclusion tbl Images Images associated with sample locations Index Index columns Event ID Event ID Image label Image label Image quality Image quality Image type Image type pk Images primary Image ID Field name Index key Data type Description Image ID primary text 50 Unique identifier for each image record Default Format Now yyyymmddhhnnss amp amp 1000000000 Rnd Novv Event ID indexed FK text 50 Sampling event Image type indexed text 20 Type of image Default ground photo Image label indexed text 25 Image caption or label Image desc text 255 Brief description of the image bearing perspective etc Frame number text 10 Frame number for photographic images Image date datetime Date on which the image was created if different from the sampling event date Image source text 50 Name of the person or organization that created the image Image quality indexed tinyint Quality of the image Is edited version bit Indicates whether this version of the image is the edited originals False Object format text 20 Forma
381. ves prior to the start of the training session The bird field guides listed in SOP 1 Preparing for the Field Season may be helpful in this process Throughout the training 34 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Netvvork session every day should begin vvith the Field Technicians birding at sunrise either with the trainer s usually the Field Lead perhaps with assistance from the Project Lead the NPS Lead or another qualified person or in small groups Observers learn to identify new species most quickly when they actually see and hear them in the field The crew should visit as wide a variety of habitats and locales as possible during the training session to maximize the number of species encountered in the field In addition to observing and listening to birds in the field Field Technicians should spend time throughout the training session studying field guides listening to recordings and using instructional software to review plumages and vocalizations and to test themselves We have found it most useful to conduct group reviews every other evening during training These reviews have been most effective when the trainer used an instructional CD ROM to present images and or recordings of the species encountered that morning as well as other species the group a may be having trouble distinguishing from one another or b may be unlikely to encounter during training for example hi
382. voH W19 popiooesnoN p p 02 ynoN 2 418804 Aoyu Aulq AI OSHA 11021uu25 sdo sp3 yy IMQ Y999I9 U19199AA p p o2 ynoN fq ssoq pq p olq TAQ ueg K1ojuoAu d gI popiooownoN popiooow1oN owy OGOIN DANOLIDUL ppipu z AOQI SuruinoJA Oey KxogjuoAu d dT K1ojuoAud gI awy lq ssoq IdLd Djpiospf SDu2018D Ud uo siq po mj pueq popiooosnoN popiooow1oN 21418804 popiooosnoN 14 4 DIAL pqunjo uo Siq YOY popiooosnoN popiooowrn1oN popiooown1oN 21418804 1401 DIDYAMD DINIAIIDAL urgng pany popiooosrnoN popiooosnoN popiooosnoN fq ssoq NdOH DIDINNULOI DINIAIIDA urgng p uroH popiooosnoN awy popiooosnoN e qrssoqd RDVHu DJD4220U014 D2U11 40127 PANY sor oouruy popiooosnoN popiooosnoN 1418804 nvv snounop snudiupaoyodqq PANY s ursseo 21418804 DINNV snnbyup smjdumaoqipju amp g PPN JUSTOUY p p o2 ynoN PoPIODOYION awy popiooownoN DINVIN snudulmadyopag y y rimniq M N popiooownoN owy popiooownoN 2014 02 snudd jouro mzr uooSiq popiooosnoN 21415504 popiooosnoN WOO as DD Df oum uo
383. vork The crevv s copy of the front end database also may be stored in the same folder Create a folder if it does not already exist in the same network folder named backups or backup copies for storing daily backups of the back end database file Prior to Using the Database Open the front end database The first thing the front end application will do is prompt you to update the links to the back end database file This update will only need to be done once for each new release of the front end database Important Reminders for Daily Database Use A new copy of the front end database will need to be copied to your workstation every day Do not open and use the front end database on the network as this bloats the database file and makes it run more slowly Backups should be made consistently at some point every day that data entry occurs Normally the front end application will automatically prompt you to make a backup either upon initially opening or upon exiting the application Backups also can be made on demand by clicking on the Backup data button on the main menu and storing the backup file in the backups folder To save drive space and network resources backup files should be compacted by right clicking on the backup file in Windows Explorer and selecting the option Add to Zip file Old files may be deleted at the discretion of the Field Lead New versions of the front end ap
384. vvvv 1 nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm North Coast and Cascades Network National Park Service 2006 GIS Development Guidelines USDI National Park Service Available at http wwwl nature nps gov im units nccn datamgmt guide cfm SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures 123 Landbird Monitoring Protocol for National Parks in the North Coast and Cascades Network Standard Operating Procedure SOP 19 Sensitive Information Procedures Revision History Log Revision Date Author Changes Made Reason for Change Overview Although it is the general NPS policy to share information widely the NPS also realizes that providing information about the location of park resources may sometimes place those resources at risk of harm theft or destruction This can occur for example with regard to caves archeological sites tribal information and rare plant and animal species Therefore information will be withheld when the NPS foresees that disclosure would be harmful to an interest protected by an exemption under the Freedom of Information Act FOIA The National Parks Omnibus Management Act Section 207 16 U S C 5937 is interpreted to prohibit the release of information regarding the nature or specific location of certain cultural and natural resources in the national park system Additional details and information about the legal basis for this policy are in the
385. whistling 40 50 km h Wind stronger than this precludes point counts Wind 0 6 Record the wind conditions during the point count using the following codes Rain code Explanation 1 No rain 2 Mist or fog 3 Light drizzle Rain stronger than this precludes point counts Clouds Record percent cloud cover within the portion of the sky that is visible to you This should be a number between 0 no clouds and 100 complete overcast If there are patches of clouds in different areas of the sky try to image gathering all of them together into one part of the sky and recording what percent of cloud cover that would represent On hazy mornings it sometimes can be difficult to decide whether cloud cover is 100 or 076 in such instances record 100 Point Comment If any additional information is needed to explain your entries for the preceding fields provide it here Transect Comments Space is provided here for any more general observations about weather or other conditions present during the transect 2 Completing Point Count Form After all data on the Point Count Conditions form have been collected prepare to conduct the point count Make yourself comfortable by taking off your backpack and situating binoculars so that they are in a comfortable and accessible position around your neck Place the point count data form on the top of your clipboard and complete the top portion of the form as f
386. y R Pashley D N Cooper R J and Niles L eds Strategies for bird conservation the Partners in Flight planning process Ogden Utah USDA Forest Service Proceedings RMRS_P_16 p 113 114 Sauer J R Hines J E and Fallon J 2001 The North American breeding bird survey results and analysis 1966 2000 Version 2001 2 Laurel Maryland USGS Patuxent Wildlife Research Center Sauvajot R M Quinn J E van Riper III C and Farmer C 1990 Comparative analyses of bird inventory databases from California National Parks in van Riper C and others eds Examples of resource inventory and monitoring in National Parks of California Proceedings of the Third Biennial Conference on Research in California s National Parks September 13 15 1990 University of California Davis p 15 48 Sharp B E 1996 Avian population trends in the Pacific Northwest Bird Populations v 3 p 26 45 Siegel R B and Kuntz IL R C 2000 Designing a landbird monitoring program at North Cascades National Park Service Complex summary recommendations from a September 2000 workshop USDI Technical Report NPS NRNOCA NRTR 00 04 Siegel R B and Wilkerson R L 2005 Sample designs for avian monitoring alternatives in Sierra Nevada Network parks Point Reyes Station California The Institute for Bird Populations Siegel R B Wilkerson R L and Hall S 2004a Landbird inventory for Olympic National Park 2002 2003 Point
387. y be done in ThumbsPlus Extensis Portfolio or a similar image software package A somewhat less sophisticated alternative is to batch rename files in Windows Explorer by first selecting the files to be renamed and then selecting File Rename The edits made to one file will be made to all others although with the unpleasant side effect of often adding spaces and special characters for example parentheses that will then need to be removed manually mor SOP 11 Managing Photographic Images 79 Renaming photographs may be most efficient as a two part event first step performed as a batch process that inserts the date and transect number at the beginning of the photograph name and a second step in which a descriptive component is manually added to each file name D Establish Database Links During data entry and processing the database application will provide the functionality required to establish a link between each database record and the appropriate image file s To establish the link the database prompts the user to indicate the root project workspace directory path the specific image folder within the project workspace and the specific file name This way the entire workspace may be later moved to a different directory for example the NCCN Digital Library and the links will still be valid after changing only the root path Refer to SOP 12 Data Entry and Verification for additional details on establishing these links
388. y designs and statistical methods for the estimation of avian population trends U S Fish and Wildlife Service Biological Report v 90 n 1 p 1 4 Fancy S G 1997 A new approach for analyzing bird densities from variable circular plot counts Pacific Science v 51 p 107 114 Fancy S G and Sauer J R 2000 Recommended methods for inventorying and monitoring landbirds in the National Parks available only online at http science nature nps gov im monitor protocols npsbird doc Accessed January 25 2007 References Cited 23 Furness R W Greenwood J J D and Jarvis P J 1993 Can birds be used to monitor the environment in Furness R W and Greenwood J J D eds Birds as monitors of environmental change London England Chapman and Hall p 1 41 Gilbert F F and Allwine R 1991 Spring bird communities in the Oregon Cascade Range in Ruggiero L F Aubry K B Carey A B and Huff M H eds Wildlife and vegetation of unmanaged Douglas fir forests USDA Forest Service Pacific Northwest Research Station General Technical Report PNW GTR 285 p 144 158 Greenwood J J D Baillie S R Crick H Q P Marchant J H and Peach W J 1993 Integrated population monitoring detecting the effects of diverse changes in Furness R W and Greenwood J J D eds Birds as monitors of environmental change London Chapman and Hall p 267 342 Hagar J C McComb W C and Chambers C C
389. y features plot locations to log per job Differential correction and export can be done on only one job at a time Fewer jobs will facilitate data post processing and GIS layer creation Let s try doing one job file per day and see how that goes Note Turning off the unit will close an open job file unlike the Trimble units the file will not stay open Note If batteries die during a job file replace batteries open a new job file and begin data collection again Entering Offsets into a GPS File From within the data file being collected 1 Press MENU 2 Scroll to Offset 3 Press ENTER 4 Scroll to Bearing 5 Press ENTER 6 Obtain a compass bearing from your position to the target location 7 Use the arrow keys to enter the bearing value 8 Press ENTER when finished entering the bearing value 9 Use the down arrow key to move to the Horz Distance field 10 Push ENTER SOP 10 Collecting GPS Data 73 11 Use the arrow keys to enter a horizontal distance meters 12 Press ENTER when finished entering the horizontal distance value 13 Use the down arrow key to move to the Vert Distance field 14 Push ENTER 15 Use the arrow keys to enter a vertical distance meters zero if current position and target position are on a flat plane 16 Press ENTER when finished entering the vertical distance value 17 Press ESC to return to the data logging screen Note Map screen will show th
390. ype in attribute data Push ENTER when finished entering attribute data 4 Select OK when finished m Close the Feature 1 Seroll to CLOSE vvhen finished logging the feature 2 Push ENTER This returns to the Nevv Feature screen Note This closes the feature not the file 3 Write the GPS file name on a hardcopy datasheet Open Another Feature in the Same File When the feature is closed the New Feature screen will appear From here a new feature for example a new plot can be opened 1 Scroll to the feature you wish to map 2 Push ENTER 3 Enter attribute data see Data Entry using a Data Dictionary 4 Close the feature see Close the Feature 5 Write the GPS file name on a hardcopy datasheet Close a File To close out of the entire job file 1 Push MENU 2 Scroll to Close Job 3 Push ENTER Open File Again to Collect New Feature To open a job file again 1 Push the LOG button 2 Select Open Existing Job 3 Push ENTER 4 Select the job file name 5 Push ENTER 6 Push LOG to get to the Nevv Feature Plot screen and vvait for satellite signals 7 Push ENTER and log another plot location feature 8 Write the GPS file name on a hardcopy datasheet To Close Out of the Entire Job File 1 Push MENU Scroll to Close Job 3 Push ENTER Note You also can re open a job from pushing the MENU button and selecting Open Job Note There is no set rule for how many jobs to create and how man

Landbird Monitoring Protocol - The Institute for Bird Populations

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents